Home

Fiery Manual - Print and Finishing Solutions

1. Server name or IP address Select XF Server ao gt Save as PDF Printer description Printer Select None Model None Click Next to set calibration settings 2 Click the Info button and follow the on screen instructions to complete your media profile When you have created your media profile you can select it in Fiery XF For more information see Media profiles on page 137 Optimizing a media profile You can greatly improve color accuracy by applying an L a b optimization to a media profile An L a b optimization provides a better match for the color gamut of the simulation reference profile However check the print quality first to ensure that an optimization is really necessary CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES TO OPTIMIZE A MEDIA PROFILE 1 Connect your measuring device 2 Start Color Tools and click Optimize Profile Oe e File Opti eam Measuring device settings Printer information x l z Lisettings i Used printer N 1 Settings VUTEK TX3250r Optimization chart EPL int ition 2 Print and Optimize 1617 CGATS 178 7 4 z format type none Profiles Retrieve from workflow na Please select a workfiows a EPL containing patched media profile 356 X 540 le Color mode Reference profile CMYK Advanced Sele Halftoning none T Use optional additional characterization data
2. Printer options Printer Resolution Printer X Select resolution X Screening Dot shape Show Select shape r Fat 15 0 Screen ruling lpi z EN M ifs F 75 0 Screen angle C 15 M 75 Y 0 K 45 x E 0 0 El Rotate by 7 5 to prevent moir K 45 0 Advanced _ Save z aa Dot CREATOR Creating screening files One halftone screen is created for each of the four process colors cyan magenta yellow and black Light inks are not supported Each halftone screen is then rotated and printed at a different angle to prevent moir patterns from appearing The usual print order is cyan magenta yellow black Y 90 Dot Creator provides three industry standard settings for screen angles e C 15 M 75 Y 0 K 45 e C 8 M 51 5 Y 27 K 75 e C 18 4 M 71 6 Y 0 K 45 You can create halftone screens based on one of these settings or alternatively define your own customized screen angles for each color channel TO CREATE A SCREENING FILE WITH PREDEFINED SCREEN ANGLES You can save your settings as a preset at any stage of the procedure if required By saving your settings you can quickly and easily reload the preset at a later date to make further changes 1 Start Dot Creator 2 Select a halftone printer It is not possible to implement screening files for contone printers 3 Select a resolution 4 Select a dot shape Choose from round diamond square line elli
3. None A cm D Learb Plinternal__ b Source File v RISIEN H 4 ad Bie Unknown spot colors Print unknown spot colors as warning color a M Y K Reset The spot color table shows which screen angle is used for each color The default setting for all spot colors is black but you can select the screen angle of any other process color in the column Scroll to the right to view this column INCREASING JOB SPEED INCREASING JOB SPEED Many factors affect the speed at which job processing occurs in Fiery XF The following sections describe ways to increase job processing speed General tips The following are general tips that can help you to speed up job processing Make sure that the computer is not running multiple tasks concurrently Shutting down unnecessary tasks frees up extra system resources for Fiery XF Deactivate the preview setting By deactivating the preview settings you save the time that would otherwise be needed to create preview files For more information see Activating the preview on page 72 Convert complex PostScript jobs to PDF X 1a format Select a calibration set with a lower print resolution Printing at 720 x 720 dpi means four times less data to process than at 1440 x 1440 dpi For more information see Media profiles on page 137 In the graphics program convert jobs to a lower input
4. GETTING TO KNOW FIERY XF Function Fit to actual size Key combination e lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt lt 0 gt e lt Apple gt lt Alt gt lt 0 gt Fit selection to window e lt Ctrl gt lt F gt e lt Apple gt lt F gt Fit selection to window and zoom out one step e lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt lt F gt e lt Apple gt lt Alt gt lt F gt Zoom in two steps e lt Ctrl gt lt Space bar gt mouse click e lt Apple gt lt Space bar gt mouse click Zoom out two steps e lt Alt gt lt Space bar gt mouse click Zoom into selected area e lt Ctrl gt drag lasso e lt Apple gt drag lasso e Rulers guides and grid Function Show hide ruler Key combination e lt Ctrl gt lt R gt e lt Apple gt lt R gt Set ruler to new zero coordinates Drag cursor from top left corner of preview window where vertical and horizontal rulers intersect Return ruler to default zero coordinates Double click in top left corner of preview window where vertical and horizontal rulers intersect Create guide Drag cursor from ruler Re position guide Select and drag guide to new position Delete guide Drag guide and release in ruler unlocked guides only Show hide guides e lt Ctrl gt lt gt e lt Apple gt lt gt Lock unlock guides e lt Ctrl gt lt Alt lt gt e lt Apple gt lt Alt gt lt gt Show hide grid e lt Ctrl
5. CREATING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 Assign a color to the user optional Assigning a color can help you to identify users more easily For example you can assign a specific color to all users of one group Do one of the following e In the layout area right click the user click Color Indicator and click a color e In the layout area click the white stripe to the left of the user name and click a color You can select one of the available basic colors or you can define a custom color To define a custom color click Define Custom Colors Custom colors must be defined in the RGB color space When you have defined a color click Add to Custom Colors Click OK to close the dialog box 6 Save your changes TO CREATE A WORKFLOW You can create new workflows in Fiery XF Workflow templates are available for different workflow scenarios 1 Do one of the following roe e On the toolbar click New Workflow e In the layout area right click an existing workflow and click New Workflow e On the File menu point to New and click Workflow The New Workflow from Template dialog box appears fi 7 New Workflow from eme NNN cl 150 Goated v2 Offset ISO Coated v2 Offset Dynamic verification ISO Coated v2 Offset Validation Print ISO Coated v2 Offset Verify ISO Coated v2 300 Offset ISO Coated v2 300 Offset Verify ISO Newspaper 26 TVI CMYK ISO Newspaper 26 TVI CMYK Verify 150 U
6. If you change the display language make sure that the help set for that language is also installed Otherwise no help will be available You can install the help sets for the supported languages from the software DVD TO CHANGE THE DELTA E WARNING INDICATOR The delta E table displays the amount of deviation from the reference in terms of delta E By default the amount of deviation is indicated by the following color code Color Delta E value White The color patch is within the permitted tolerance Yellow The color patch exceeds the permitted average tolerance limit but is within the maximum tolerance limit Red The color patch exceeds the permitted maximum tolerance limit and therefore fails verification You can remove the color coded warning indicator 1 Open the Preferences dialog box and click the General tab For more information see To open the Preferences dialog box on page 315 VERIFIER 330 2 Under User interface clear Enable Delta E warning indicator 3 Click OK TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY MODE OF THE M1 M2 TABLES There are two display modes tile and cascade 1 Right click on the delta E table and click an item TO ADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS SETTING You can adjust the brightness of the displayed color values 1 Open the Preferences dialog box and click the General tab For more information see To open the Preferences dialog box on page 315 2
7. select Zund The Send to cut server after printing check box is automatically selected Clear the check box if you do not want the cut data to be sent automatically to the Ziind Cut Center after printing Under Device type select a Ziind G3 series cutter 10 11 12 CUTTING OPTIONS Under Cut marks type select a Ziind marks type Choose between Zund circle Camera Zund reverse circle Camera Zund cross Manual and Zund reverse cross Manual Define the distance between two Ziind marks along each edge of the image This setting can result in a larger gap between the last Ziind mark and the corner of the image if the length of the edge is not exactly divisible by the defined distance Click Print with tinted background optional On some media types the cut marks can be difficult to see This setting overcomes the problem by printing the cut marks on a yellowish background Click Print between layout elements optional This setting prints cut marks between nested pages and step and repeat elements Define a bleed setting optional The bleed setting repositions the Ziind marks in relation to the image By adding a frame around the image you can add white space between image and Ziind marks Under Export path do one of the following e Click Export path to select a folder in which to save the cut contour files Click Choose and browse
8. Fit to width The job width is scaled to the printable width of the media This may mean that the height of the image is clipped in the printout You can use the preview to check the effect of this setting and to make sure that the page will fit properly on the selected media size Fit to height The job height is scaled to the printable height of the media This may mean that the width of your image is clipped You can use the preview to check the effect of this setting and to make sure that the page will fit properly on the selected media size This setting is not available for roll media 1 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job 2 Do one of the following e On the Layout tab open the Layout Options pane Under Scale page select an item e In the preview window right click the page point to Scale point to Fit to and click an item e On the Edit menu point to Scale point to Fit to and click an item TO SCALE A JOB AS A PERCENTAGE You can scale a job by a percentage A value greater than 100 increases the size of the page A value less than 100 decreases the size of the page 1 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job EDITING JOBS 2 Do one of the following e On the Layout tab open the Layout Options pane Under Scale page select Scale job percentually In the boxes type a width or a height By default the page retains its p
9. In the layout area click an output device On the Edit menu point to Output Device point to Connected workflows and click an item that has a check mark next to it SETTING SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS ONLINE OFFLINE Action To disconnect one output device from all workflows Description e In the layout area right click an output device and click Disconnect Output Device from All Workflows e In the layout area click an output device On the Edit menu point to Output Device and click Disconnect Output Device from All Workflows WORKSPACES 67 WORKSPACES A workspace is a custom view of Fiery XF It defines the settings that you can see Your workspaces were initially assigned to you by the Fiery XF administrator who set you up as a user You can further customize your view of Fiery XF to suit your specific needs If you do not have administrator rights you can only select and customize the workspaces that are assigned to you If you have administrator rights you can additionally create and manage workspaces in Workspace Manager Selecting workspaces If you have been assigned more than one workspace you can switch to a workspace whose feature set has been set up for a different workflow environment TO SELECT A WORKSPACE 1 Do one of the following e On the tab bar click the menu button and point to Workspace e On the menu bar click Workspace 2 Click an item Select one of the following
10. Pure inkjet CMYK Color management via overprinting of pure inkjet dots Color accurate but different screening Printing press v2 screening Color managed dots Norm and light color Color management via inkjet halftoning Color accurate with same screening Fiery XF uses different methods to implement v1 and v2 screening e The vl method requires you to create a new base linearization file and a new media profile that incorporates the screening file To create a new media profile you require a license for the Color Tools Option e For the v2 method you can connect the screening file to an existing base linearization file and media profile The only requirement is that the screening file and the base linearization file must be created for the same printer resolution Dot CREATOR Fiery XF applies automatically a screening method based on the halftoning method from the base linearization file Halftoning method from base linearization file Applied screening method Screening vl screening Error diffusion SE1 or Stochastic screening SE2 v2 screening EPL SE1 SE2 SPT EPL Screening SPT ___ EPL Screening SPT a f Rs EPL SE1 SE2 SPT Job Starting Dot Creator To START DOT CREATOR 1 Do one of the following e On the toolbar click Dot Creator e On the Tools menu click Dot Creator Preset Save Preset Delete
11. Select a control strip or media wedge Make sure that you select a control strip that is compatible with your measuring device For more information on selecting control strips for verify workflows see Verify workflows in Fiery XF on page 301 Apply color management to the control strip optional If color management is applied the color patches are compressed into the color gamut of the selected reference profile Select Print with color management to check the accuracy of the media profile If color management is not applied the control strip is printed using the full color gamut of the printer Clear Print with color management to check the color accuracy of two printers Select the control strip for the nesting sheet optional By default control strips are printed for each page For nestings you can print the control strip for each page or just once for the whole nesting By selecting two control strips you can select one control strip for the nested pages and one control strip for the nesting sheet En ee o Dynamic wedges can be created only for pages Repeat the above steps for control strip 2 optional Some printers with an embedded measuring device can measure only one control strip per job Save your changes FOOTER 132 TO SELECT A DYNAMIC WEDGE Dynamic wedge 1 2 Dynamic colors extracted from job Generic media wedge in preview window A dynamic wedge is made
12. Tombo If you have a license for the Cut Marks Option FOTOBA crop marks are also available For more information see FOTOBA crop marks on page 226 Define the appearance of the crop marks You can specify the line thickness and length as well as the distance between crop marks and job Some of the settings are not available for certain types of crop marks The default color is black By clicking the black box you can select a different color Define a bleed setting optional The bleed setting repositions the crop marks in relation to the image By adding a frame you can insert white space between image and crop marks By cutting the image you can crop each edge by a defined margin Cut the image to eliminate unwanted paper white or to reduce the size of the image o The distance to job is also taken into account when you apply bleed For example if you place crop marks 1 cm from the image and add a frame with 1 cm bleed the crop marks are positioned 2 cm from the image Save your changes If you work regularly with different crop marks it is a good idea to save each group of settings as a preset A preset is a template for a group of settings that are saved under a unique name You can create presets in the pane bar menu The next time you set up crop marks you need only to select the preset name GROMMET MARKS GROMMET MARKS If you have a license for the Cut Marks Option you can print grommet marks
13. e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the output device On the Media tab open the Print Configuration pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Output tab open the Media Configuration pane 2 Select the type of ink that is inserted in the printer 3 Select the name of the media that you want to use 4 Select a calibration set A calibration set is a base linearization file that is connected to the media profile The base linearization file defines a set of print conditions and ensures that the printer s behavior is adjusted optimally to the media If multiple calibration sets are available click Catalog to view the print conditions under which each calibration set was created For example you can view the catalog to check for a screening file or to check which halftoning method was used to create the base linearization file For v1 screening the Halftoning column displays Screening For v2 screening the Halftoning column displays Error diffusion SE1 or Stochastic screening SE2 For more information see Screening methods in Fiery XF on page 344 You can create a new calibration set by creating a base linearization file and connecting it to an existing media profile For more information see Creating or editing a base linearization file on page 150 and Profile Connector on page 158 It is also possible to select a base linearization file th
14. e On Macintosh browse to the Fiery XF Client RGB Profile Connector folder and double click the RGB Profile Connector program file The Enter network IP address dialog box appears User admin Password awa 2 Unter Type select Fiery XF 3 Select or type the IP address of the Fiery XF server computer A list of all available Fiery XF servers in the sub network is displayed with their IP address in the drop down list box 4 Enter a user name and a password Log on with your Fiery XF login credentials 5 10 11 12 13 THIRD PARTY MEDIA PROFILES Click Connect A connection is set up to the Fiery XF server If an error message appears make sure that the Fiery XF server is started For more information see Starting the Fiery XF server on page 22 The RGB Profile Connector dialog box appears E rero cre E ES Unter Printer name select your RGB printer model Unter Ink type select the type of ink that is inserted in the printer Under Media type select the media type that most closely matches the media for which the RGB media profile was created Under Media name type a media name By default the media name is the same as the selected media type You can leave the name unchanged or type a custom media name The media profile will be available in Fiery XF under the name that you define here Select the resolution pr
15. 1 2 Spot color 1 with delta E inside tolerance limit Spot color 2 with delta E outside tolerance limit Spot color 3 inside color gamut COLOR EDITOR Be aware that it is possible for a spot color to yield a delta E that exceeds the defined tolerance limit but still be in gamut green In the diagram above the spot colors yield the following results Spot color Result Description 1 Green Spot color is out of gamut but is within the acceptable tolerance limit 2 Red Spot color is out of gamut and outside the acceptable tolerance limit 3 Green Spot color is in gamut Red Spot color is in gamut but outside the acceptable tolerance limit If a spot color is out of gamut you may be able to reduce the delta E value Try the following e Switch to a different combination of printer and print configuration set By switching between printers and print configuration sets you can quickly find out which combination will yield the best results COLOR EDITOR e Apply a spot color optimization file A spot color optimization file is a correction profile that attempts to improve the color accuracy of the selected spot colors and their gradients You can optimize in gamut spot colors that are outside the acceptable delta E tolerance limit For more information see Optimizing L a b spot colors on page 294 Converting L a b spot colors to the color space of the printer You can
16. If you give priority to CMYK TIFF files which consist of one file only Fiery XF starts job processing as soon as the file is detected Select an item for job recognition Many files are created with a final page A final page ensures that the CT file and the LW file are detected as being part of the same job If no final page is available Fiery XF tries to match the files by their names If the end characters of the file names are different they are not detected as belonging to the same job You can instruct Fiery XF to ignore an appropriate number of characters so that both files are in effect shortened to the same name The job cannot be combined if no final page is available and if Fiery XF cannot match the files to one job by their names 4 Save your changes SEPARATED JOBS SEPARATED JOBS To print an image on an offset printing press the image has to be separated into a minimum of four basic ink colors Cyan Magenta Yellow and Black Each single color layer is printed separately on top of the other to create an impression of an infinite number of different colors This process is known as process color separation ah b A on S CS a In Fiery XF you can output separations for CMYK jobs RGB jobs and multi color jobs including spot colors TO PRINT SEPARATED FILES 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Output tab open the Advanced Print Options
17. Printer Date Time 11 16 2012 4 18 01 PM Criteria Measured Tolerance Status Average all patches 1 75 dE 3 00 Passed Maximum all patches 472 dE 6 00 Passed Paper white 0 69 dE 3 00 Passed Cyan 2 17 dE 5 00 Passed Magenta 0 55 dE 5 00 Passed NOT PASSED Yellow 472 dE 5 00 Passed Black 1 18 dE 5 00 Passed Hue difference CMYK 2 93 dH 2 50 Not passed Hue diff average gray 0 43 dH 1 50 Passed Load properties Save properties J Ol Cancel Before printing complete the Print preview dialog box with job specific information By clicking Save properties you can save the information to the defined data folder and load it again later as a template for future jobs Customizing the Verifier user interface You can customize the appearance of Verifier TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY LANGUAGE By default Verifier is displayed in the language of the operating system Follow the steps below to change the display language in Windows On Macintosh you can change the language via the international settings in System Preferences To display one of the supported Asian languages on a PC Verifier must be running on an operating system that supports double byte fonts 1 Open the Preferences dialog box and click the General tab For more information see To open the Preferences dialog box on page 315 VERIFIER 329 2 Under User interface select a language 3 Click OK 4 Restart Verifier for the new language to take effect
18. Select the check box next to each required cut contour By selecting the check box you enable Fiery XF to extract the cut contour CUTTING OPTIONS C 4 Save your changes Contour cutting Material Generic Printer Profile Thickness 0 000000 Inch Width 78 756 Inch Height 3937 008 Inch Extract contour path from EPS PDF Contour colors Mode PANTONE 287 CVC Cut Standard PANTONE Black6C Cut Standard PANTONE Cool Gray 6 Cut standard Eee CutContour Cut VNN standard The scissor icon indicates which cut contours will be extracted TO SELECT CUT CONTOURS FOR UNKNOWN SPOT COLORS Follow these steps if The cut contour is a default cut contour For a list of default cut contour names see Cut contours in the graphics program on page 228 e The cut contour is an unknown spot color CUTTING OPTIONS Cut contours that have been defined in a spot color that is not recognized in Fiery XF are shown as follows Job with cut contour in an unknown spot color 1 Cut pane Material Generic Printer Profile Thickness 0 000000 Inch Width 78 756 Inch Height 3937 008 Inch Contour cutting Extract contour path from EPS PDF Contour colors Spot Color Mode PANTONE 208 C Standard PANTONE 433 C Cut Standard PANTONE 254 C Cut Standard PANTONE 2617 C Cut Standard PANTONE 234 C Cut Standard PANTONE 2755 C Cut Standard Kiss Cut VSVVNNNSN standard
19. Why do I get the error message Invalid page height Cause Remedy The information from the bounding box is not taken into account Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane Under Size definition select Calculate page size TROUBLESHOOTING The linearization cannot be processed Cause A corrupt base linearization file is being applied Remedy Go to System Manager In the layout area click the output device On the Media tab open the Print Configuration pane Check the calibration set that is selected for the output device Open the base linearization file in Profile Connector a tool provided with Color Tools and make sure that the name of the selected media profile matches that of the connected media profile If this does not help try reconnecting the base linearization file and the media profile in Profile Connector What does the error message Command Error mean Cause Some printers can be used with two different types of ink for example Ultrachrome Photo and Matte The error message occurs if the type of ink that is selected in Fiery XF does not match the type of ink that is inserted in the printer Remedy Make sure that you select the right type of ink for the output device The black ink cartridge lets you identify which type of ink is being used Go to System Manager In the layout area click the output device On th
20. cannot be rearranged JOB LIST AND PREVIEW WINDOW TO SORT THE JOB ORDER By default jobs are listed in the order in which they are loaded in Fiery XF However you can sort jobs according to any column heading 1 Click a column heading For example click Job Name to sort jobs alphabetically or click Job Size to sort jobs according to data volume An upward or downward arrow becomes visible in the column heading and the jobs are resorted Click the column heading again to reverse the sort order TO FILTER THE JOB LIST By default all loaded jobs are displayed in the job list The selector enables you to filter the job list For example you can list only jobs that are loaded in a specific workflow or that have a certain status Jobs that do not meet the selected criterion are not visible in the job list 1 Make sure that the selector is shown For more information see To customize the Job Explorer window on page 28 2 At the top of the selector select By Workflow By Status or By Printer 3 In the selector click an item a workflow a status or a printer The job list displays only those jobs that meet the specified criterion To redisplay all jobs click All Jobs Thumbnail images The job list can display thumbnail images of all loaded jobs for easy recognition of content To display thumbnail images make sure that the preview setting is switched on For more information see Activati
21. e On the tab bar click the menu button and point to Show e On the menu bar click Window and point to Property Tabs The menu displays the available tabs 2 Click an item To hide a tab click an item that has a check mark next to it To show a hidden tab click an item that does not have a check mark next to it To show all hidden tabs click All To SHOW HIDE A PANE 1 On the pane bar click the menu button and click Hide The pane is hidden from property inspector To show a hidden pane right click anywhere in property inspector point to Show and click an item that does not have a check mark next to it To show all hidden panes click All Creating workspaces If you have administrator rights you can create new workspaces and edit existing workspaces The default workspaces that are provided with Fiery XF cannot be edited You can create a workspace in two ways e You can save the current program view as a workspace e You can create a workspace in Workspace Manager WORKSPACES 69 TO SAVE THE CURRENT PROGRAM VIEW AS A WORKSPACE This type of custom workspace enables you to save and apply settings to future jobs quickly and easily 1 Do one of the following e On the tab bar click the menu button point to Workspace and click Save Workspace e On the menu bar click Workspace and click Save Workspace The Save Workspace dialog box appears 2 Enter a workspace name 3 Click Save Workspaces are automatically
22. for all four boxes it deactivates the spot color search feature In this case all spot colors are displayed as Unknown and job processing cannot continue Forcing the use of a source profile Each incoming PostScript and TIFF job is analyzed to determine whether it was created in the CMYK or in a multicolor CMYKOG CMYKOGB CMYKRGB color space Based on this analysis Fiery XF applies the appropriate CMYK or multicolor source profile that is selected in the color management settings For more information on selecting multicolor profiles in Fiery XF see To select source profiles and simulation reference profiles on page 138 Although Fiery XF can process mulicolor in both PostScript and TIFF format it is recommended that you use PostScript format whenever possible By default Fiery XF treats PostScript and TIFF jobs as described below SPOT COLORS e PostScript jobs To apply a multicolor source profile to PostScript jobs the job and the profile must be created for the same ink channels If a job contains ink channels that are missing from the source profile those colors are treated as spot colors The table below shows how a multicolor source profile is applied to PostScript jobs Color space of job Selected multicolor Applied source profile source profile CMYK None CMYK CMYKOG CMYKOG CMYKOG CMYKOGB CMYKOG CMYKOG Define B as a spot color CMYKRGB CMYKOG CMYK Define RGB as spot
23. A fully online system configuration is indicated by green arrows from user through to output device A red rectangle means that that stage of the system configuration is offline Lob om ___ _ poet Do any of the following e Click all red rectangles e Right click an object and click the following items see table below e Click an object user workflow or output device On the Edit menu point to the appropriate item and click an item Object Menu item User user name is Offline Workflow Workflow Accepts New Jobs Workflow Processes and Prints Jobs Output device Printer name is Offline TO SET A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OFFLINE Occasionally you may need to make alterations to a system configuration for example e You may need to add or delete a user e You may need to change workflow settings You may need to connect a workflow to a different printer e You may need to service an output device To make changes to a system configuration you must first stop the system configuration at the appropriate stage of job processing Depending on what changes need to be done you may be able to lessen the inconvenience to users by rerouting to an alternative workflow or by connecting the workflow temporarily to a different output device You can interrupt a system configuration as follows e You can disconnect a user a workflow or an out
24. CMYK Relative colorimetric no paper white Proofs with no paper white simulation Relative colorimetric with black point compensation Absolute colorimetric with black point compensation Proofs with or without paper white simulation Black point compensation can be performed on top of the colorimetric rendering intents It helps to preserve detail in dark or shadow regions of an image SELECTING PROFILES AND RENDERING INTENTS e Select Use dynamic rendering intent optional This setting analyzes the colors of the job and determines whether they can be accurately reproduced on the selected output device Based on this analysis the most appropriate rendering intent for the job is applied Result of job analysis Applied Description rendering intent All colors are within the reproducible Relative This rendering intent gamut of the output device colorimetric reproduces the exact colors of the job and no gamut compression is necessary Some colors are outside the Perceptual This rendering intent reproducible gamut of the output compresses the colors of the device job so that all colors can be printed without gamut clipping The simulation profile takes precedence over the source profile If a simulation profile is selected the dynamic rendering intent for the simulation profile is applied If no simulation profile is selected the rendering intent for the appr
25. Click Add e Click New Person and type a user name e Define a password Then confirm the password by re typing it in the appropriate box e Click Create Account Close the Info dialog box PRINTING THROUGH A HOTFOLDER Setting up a Windows user The Fiery XF server runs on Windows as a service By default the login rights are defined for the local computer It means that Fiery XF cannot communicate with folders that are located in the network To enable Fiery XF to communicate with hotfolders through the network the following requirements must be met e Ifthe Fiery XF server and the hotfolder are on different computers both computers must be logged on with the same login credentials You may need to create a new user on both computers The Windows user must have administrator status You can create a new Windows user with administrator status or assign administrator status to an existing user For more information see Printing problems on page 374 TO CREATE A NEW WINDOWS USER If Fiery XF server and hotfolder are on different computers perform the following steps on both computers Alternatively you can duplicate an existing user on the second computer 1 In Control Panel click User Accounts and click Manage User Accounts The User Accounts dialog box appears 2 Click the Advanced tab 3 Under Advanced user management click Advanced 4 Inthe Name column right click Users and click
26. For more information on how to set up a hotfolder see Printing through a hotfolder on page 183 3 Select Enable load balancing 4 Repeat the previous steps for a second workflow Make sure that you select the same hotfolder that is set up for the first workflow 5 Save your changes High priority printing You can increase the speed at which jobs are processed by setting up a high priority workflow In a high priority workflow all jobs are processed before jobs from other workflows that are printing to the same output device Jobs that are already being processed are completed first TO SET UP A HIGH PRIORITY WORKFLOW 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Workflow tab open the Speed pane 2 Select High priority workflow 3 Save your changes TO ASSIGN HIGH PRIORITY STATUS TO A JOB When multiple jobs in Job Explorer are being processed simultaneously you can assign high priority status to one of them A high priority job goes straight to the front of the print queue and is the next to be RIPed 1 Go to Job Explorer In the job list right click a job that is in the Processing state and click High Priority You can remove high priority status from a job by right clicking it and clicking Normal Priority IMPROVING PRINT QUALITY IMPROVING PRINT QUALITY The following sections describe ways to achieve the best possible print quality General tips
27. In flexo printing the smallest dot that can be etched onto a flexographic printing plate may be as small as 2 but may gain to as much as 12 on the press due to the nature of the photopolymer plate material and the printing process Offset printing You can reproduce an image that more closely resembles output on a printing press It creates a less smooth effect than an inkjet printout TO SIMULATE A PRINTING METHOD 1 Do one of the following Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Output tab open the Advanced Print Options pane Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Output tab open the Advanced Print Options pane 2 Under Simulate final run characteristics do one of the following For gravure printing define the area coverage of missing dots as a percentage The illustration shows missing dot simulatation up to an area coverage of 40 100 40 0 For flexo printing define where the first printable dot will start This setting can be applied to contone data but not to halftone data The illustration shows how a setting of 10 will cause dots that are smaller than 10 to be ignored 100 10 0 l IMPROVING PRINT QUALITY e For offset printing define the level of noise smoothing 100 0 3 Save your changes Simulating light conditions By default the media profiles that are provided with Fiery XF are based on the standard D 50
28. Occasionally Fiery XF has difficulty correctly extracting and interpreting the resolution of incoming PS and PDF files Rounding down errors may occur which cause a white edge to be output along the right and bottom edges of images the result of missing pixels The problem occurs only in step and repeat jobs where a thin white line may be visible between images even though no spacing is defined You can remedy the problem by changing the default input resolution POSTSCRIPT AND PDF JOBS TO CHANGE THE WAITING TIME FOR JOB COMPLETION 1 Do one of the following Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane 2 Under Waiting time for job completion type the number of seconds that Fiery XF waits to receive color separations for each job 3 Save your changes TO CHANGE THE DEFAULT INPUT RESOLUTION 1 Do one of the following Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane 2 Under EPS job detection type a new input resolution Values of between 1 dpi and 720 dpi are possible Selecting the input resolution size from the image helps to prevent rounding down errors 3 Save your changes I
29. PSO_Uncoated_NPscreen_ISO12647_eci icc Fogra 44 PSO_LWC_Improved_eci icc Fogra 45 PSO_LWC_Standard_eci icc Fogra 46 PSO_Uncoated_ISO12647_eci icc Fogra 47 PSR_LWC_PLUS_V2_PTiicc PSR_LWC_PLUS_V2 PSR_LWC_STD_V2_PT icc PSR_LWC_STD_V2 PSRgravureMFicc PSRgravureMF PSR_SC_STD_V2_PT ice PSR_SC_STD_V2 PSR_SC_PLUS_V2_PT PSR2_SC_PLUS_V2 ISOnewspaper26y4 icc IFRA26 PaC Space_CMYK_gravure_V1a icc PaC Space VERIFIER 318 Reference profile Characterization data GRACoL_2006_Coated1v2 icc GRACoLCoated1_ISO12647 7_ ControlStrip2009_Ref SWOP2006_Coated3v2 icc SWOPCoated3_ISO12647 7_ ControlStrip2009_Ref SWOP2006_Coated5v2 icc SWOPCoated5_ISO12647 7_ ControlStrip2009_Ref EFIJMPA3 EFIJMPA3 4 Select to load the characterization data set automatically optional This setting saves you from having to search for and load the characterization data set manually When you have measured the control strip the measured values are verified automatically against the reference The characterization data set is loaded from a defined folder By default the characterization data set is loaded from the IT8_CharacterizationData folder However you can change the default folder and load the characterization data from there For more information see To change the default folders on page 332 5 Under User interface click Enable measurement approval optional By default a job is verified as color accurate onl
30. Scale page s Click on page handle Then press lt Alt gt and drag Crop tool selected cursor GETTING TO KNOW FIERY XF Function Crop page s Transform tool selected Key combination Click on page handle Then press lt Alt gt and drag cursor Rotate page s Click on page edge and drag image Rotations snap automatically to 90 180 270 or 360 degrees Invert e lt Ctrl gt lt I gt e lt Apple gt lt I gt Reset page e lt Ctrl gt lt Shift gt lt R gt e lt Apple gt lt Shift gt lt R gt Maximize preview window e lt Ctrl gt lt Shift gt lt M gt e lt Apple gt lt Shift gt lt M gt Next page lt Ctrl gt lt Page down gt Previous page lt Ctrl gt lt Page up gt Go to first page e lt Ctrl gt lt Home gt e lt Apple gt lt Alt gt lt Page down gt Go to last page e lt Ctrl gt lt End gt e lt Apple gt lt Alt gt lt Page up gt Show hide crosshairs for more precise page layout lt Tab gt e Page position Function Move page 0 5 mm on sheet Key combination Arrow keys Move page 10 mm on the sheet lt Shift gt arrow keys Move sheet randomly lt Space bar gt drag mouse Scroll sheet up down e lt Page up gt lt Page down gt Scroll wheel up down Scroll sheet left right e lt Shift gt lt Page up gt lt Page down gt e lt Ctrl gt Scroll wheel
31. This setting is applied to JPEG TIFF and PSD jobs with an embedded source profile Embedded source profiles override the source profiles that are selected on this pane Applying an embedded source profile ensures that the color properties of the input device are taken into account during job processing SELECTING PROFILES AND RENDERING INTENTS 6 Under Simulation profile select a simulation profile You can load a simulation profile provided with Fiery XF or one supplied for example by a printing house EFI provides a number of additional customized profiles You can find them in subfolders of the Reference Additional folder To use these or custom simulation profiles copy them to the Reference folder Only profiles that are located in the Reference folder can be selected in Fiery XF For more information see see Program structure on page 363 You can also select Use media profile In this case the selected media profile is applied as the simulation profile It ensures that you benefit from the maximum possible color gamut that can be achieved from the selected combination of output device ink and media This setting can most usefully be applied to PDF jobs that contain a mixture of elements in different color spaces RGB CMYK Gray etc By applying the media profile in place of the simulation profile you can greatly improve the color reproduction of RGB images since the media profile has a bigger color space
32. all jobs to a uniform size The settings you make for the workflow are applied to all the jobs that you load in that workflow 7 Assign a color to the workflow optional Assigning a color can help you to identify workflows more easily For example you can assign a specific color to all workflows that are printing to the same printer Do one of the following e In the layout area right click the workflow click Color Indicator and click a color e In the layout area click the white stripe to the left of the workflow name and click a color You can select one of the available basic colors or you can define a custom color To define a custom color click Define Custom Colors Custom colors must be defined in the RGB color space When you have defined a color click Add to Custom Colors Click OK to close the dialog box 8 Save your changes TO CREATE A NEW OUTPUT DEVICE 1 Do one of the following e On the toolbar click New Output Device e In the layout area right click an existing output device and click New Output Device e On the File menu point to New and click Output Device An output device with the name New Output Device 1 is created CREATING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 Define a unique name for the output device Do one of the following e In the layout area double click New Output Device 1 overwrite the default name and press lt Enter gt e On the Device tab open the Information pane
33. and overwrite New Output Device 1 3 On the Device tab open the Information pane e Under Manufacturer select the manufacturer of your output device Select EFI as the manufacturer to set up an output device for one of the following options File Output Option Fiery Option Softproof Output Option e Under Device type select your device type If no media profiles are installed an information icon appears In this case you must install the appropriate media profiles before you continue You can install media profiles from the software DVD For more information see the Quick Start Guide Alternatively you can download the latest media profiles from the EFI website For more information see Updating media profiles on page 168 4 On the Device tab open the Connection pane and select a connection type e Select Print to system printer to print to a Windows printer that has already been set up as a system printer on the computer that is running the Fiery XF server software Then select the printer from the drop down list box This setting is only available for Windows and the system printer must be a printer that is supported by Fiery XF e Select Print via IP network to print to a network printer Type the IP address of the network printer You can check whether the connection to the printer has been properly established by clicking Test To test the connection the printer must be switche
34. be aware that it is not possible to merge tiles whose combined size would exceed the selected media size TO SPLIT A TILE INTO MULTIPLE TILES 1 Right click a tile and click Split Tile The Split Tile dialog box appears 2 Type the number of horizontal and vertical tiles to crreate and click OK The tile is split into the defined number of smaller tiles The smallest possible tile size is one square inch TILING TO HIDE TILES You can hide tiles from the preview By hiding tiles you can view the image more clearly 1 Do one of the following e On the View menu point to Visual Aids and click Tiles To show the tiled page click the command again e On the toolbar click Transform Job To show the tiled image again on the toolbar click Tile Job TO EXPORT TILE SETTINGS You can save the width height and x y coordinates of each tile as well as overlapping information as a specification sheet in Excel format The specification sheet is a useful aid to installation crews who have the task of piecing the printed tiles together 1 Right click a tile and click Export settings The tile settings are saved as an Excel file in the Working folder TO PRINT TILES AND TILINGS 1 Do one of the following e To print the tiling use the normal print command e To print individual tiles right click the tiles and click Print Tile Immediately e To remove individual tiles from the print job right click the tiles and cli
35. but 10 is sometimes used in the packaging or textile industry 4 Click OK TO CHANGE THE DEFAULT FOLDERS Verifier uses default folders to save and load data You can change the default folders VERIFIER 333 Open the Preferences dialog box and click the General tab For more information see To open the Preferences dialog box on page 315 Under Define default folders click Choose The Browse for Folder dialog box appears Browse to the required folder and click OK Click OK Saving and loading measurement data You can save measurement data to CSV TXT or JDF format By default the files are saved to the Temp folder You can save multiple sets of measurement data to one file TO SAVE MEASUREMENT DATA TO A CSV OR TXT FILE 1 4 5 On the File menu click Save The Save As dialog box appears Type a file name and select a file type Click Save The Save data to CSV TXT dialog box appears Secor cca Measurement 1 v Enable to save Comment Measurement 2 _ Enable to save Lommen Select the check box for one or both sets of measurement data Click OK TO ADD MEASUREMENT DATA TO A JDF FILE The JDF file contains the job settings and measurement data if available The JDF file is saved to the remote container VERIFIER 334 1 On the File menu click Add data to JDF It is not possible to create a new JDF file using this command Measurement data can only be
36. color COLOR EDITOR In the program window the delta E result for each selected spot color is displayed in the dE column The delta E of a selected spot color is also displayed on the Color Definition tab Green indicates in gamut Red indicates out of gamut eer ee PANTONE RED 032 C Internal PANTONE RUBINE RED C Internal PANTONE RHODAMINE REL Internal PANTONE PURPLE C Internal PANTONE VIOLET C Internal PANTONE BLUE 072 C Internal PANTONE REFLEX BLUE C Internal PANTONE PROCESS BLUE C Internal PANTONE GREEN C Internal PANTONE BLACK C Internal PANTONE PROCESS YELLOV Internal PANTONE PROCESS MAGED Internal DANTOME DONTESE VAN CIntarnal m w 2 amp e ol File Edit Help Applied to 0 workflow s kl Q E Spot color name Description PANTONE RHODAMINE RED C f lor Name UER Color Definition Characterization Gradation T Use as alias for Apply as DIC Color System Wane None Pantone Color System a PANTONE YELLOW C Internal Transparency 100 PANTONE YELLOW 012C Internal aad S PANTONE ORANGE 021 Internal Spot color definition at 100 PANTONE WARM RED C Internal Independent Dependent Source Printer ELCH LY 5266 c 78 64 Ht 348 26 Untitled 1 Colors The delta E value indicates how accurately the spot color can be reproduced Result of gamut check
37. e Go to Job Explorer On the Verify tab open the Verify Control Strip pane In the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings On the Verify Control Strip pane click the Verify button Verifier starts The printed job is displayed on the Job List Preview tab On the Job List Preview tab expand the job file and double click the job file File View Hep Show in color space 7 Show in color space dE Color space Tobist Preview 1 job to very L Jb M1 M2 L e b AE Mre 1 5500 3700 1 50 00 1 E g admin Number of Jobs 1 2 6686 2473 37 10 2 G 007215012647_7_Evaluatic 3 7972 1253 2175 3 4 e768 578 11 80 a 5 9148 297 6 96 5 e 4800 7400 300 l 7 60 84 50 59 6 74 7 8 76 42 2578 89 8 g 8618 120 521 9 10 9067 5 90 3 86 10 m s900 500 93 00 T 12 J3034 470 6256 j2 13 9219 347 131 15 13 14 9362 1 62 13 27 14 15 94 34 0 94 542 15 pE m M Open x9 Ca Stop Open Comparison Info PEET Layout FOGRA39_MKCheck11 it8 Edit Method XF Workflow Job Maie Deta E Dota H Measurement 1 Measurement 2 Name FOGRA39_MKCheck11 t8 Name Delta E Tolerance Measured Protocol 12 17 2009 Protocol Average all patches 3 00 i Time 14 57 24 Time Maximum all patches 7 50 Info texts Info texts DetaH No patches 72 No pat
38. e On the menu bar click Workspace and click Delete Workspace The Delete Workspaces dialog box appears 2 Click a workspace name Multiple selections are possible 3 Click Delete The Confirm dialog box appears 4 Click Yes to delete the workspace 5 Click Close to close the Delete Workspaces dialog box Assigning workspaces When you have created a new workspace you can assign it to specific users TO ASSIGN A WORKSPACE 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click a user On the Profile tab open the Workspace pane 2 Select the check box next to the workspace You can deny access to a workspace by clearing a selected check box 3 Save your changes JOB LIST AND PREVIEW WINDOW JOB LIST AND PREVIEW WINDOW The preview window displays the image of a job that is selected in the job list You can make changes to a previewed job before printing Job Explorer 1 Job list 2 Preview window 3 Selector Activating the preview If the workflow is not set up to create previews jobs are displayed as a gray box in the preview window and the Thumbnail column of the job list is empty You can force a preview for a single job or you can change the workflow setting TO SET UP A PREVIEW WORKFLOW 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Workflow tab open the Preview pane 2 On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings 3 Define a resolution fo
39. on page 301 Use Color Editor to optimize a spot color If you are not satisfied with the color quality of a spot color in the printout you can replace it by measuring a truer color representation in another printout For more information see Optimizing L a b spot colors on page 294 Force the use of pure black ink to remove CMY inks You can achieve a more saturated black by removing CMY inks For more information see Black ink on page 176 Remove color impurities that can occur in color management during the conversion from RGB to CMYK For more information see Process and secondary colors on page 176 Make color adjustments by tweeking the percentage of ink for individual ink channels For more information see Tweeking job colors on page 175 IMPROVING PRINT QUALITY RIP and print on the fly By default Fiery XF completes job processing and then starts printing RIPing and printing on the fly means that job processing and printing occur simultaneously As soon as one chunk of job data has been processed it is printed This setting increases the speed at which jobs are output However the printer may pause from time to time which can lead to undesirable lines in the printout TO DEACTIVATE RIP AND PRINT ON THE FLY 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Workflow tab open the Speed pane 2 Clear RIP and print on the fly 3 Save your chang
40. profiles from the list click Add More Profiles to return to the Profile Update Service dialog box 5 Click Download to install the selected media profiles 6 Click Finish To INSTALL MEDIA PROFILES MANUALLY If you have obtained new or updated media profiles from your EFI dealer you can install them manually 1 Copy the media update file to a computer on which the Fiery XF server is installed 2 Exit all programs 3 Double click the media update file 4 Follow the on screen instructions to complete the procedure Uploading standard Fiery XF files from an external source You can upload standard Fiery XF files such as source profiles icc icm spot color tables cxf L a b optimizations 3cc visual color correction files vcc and screening files spt from an external data storage medium or from the desktop Fiery XF Uploader copies the files directly into the correct program folder thus saving you from having to browse manually 1 2 UPDATING FIERY XF AND MEDIA PROFILES TO UPLOAD STANDARD FIERY XF FILES Start Fiery XF On the Tools menu click Fiery XF Uploader The Fiery XF Uploader dialog box appears Select simulation profiles icc spot color tables cfx color optimization files 3cc or visual color correction files vcc to upload File icc cfx 3cc vec spt Click the Standard Files tab Click Choose and browse to the file Make
41. server Network access rights are required for printing via a hotfolder See Printing problems on page 374 Activate Fiery XF Generates and installs a new license file See Licensing the software on page 40 Show Dongle ID Displays the dongle ID of the dongle that is plugged into the computer The dongle ID is required to license the software See Licensing the software on page 40 Show License Information Displays details of which licenses are currently installed and their expiration dates FIERY XF CONTROL Shortcut menu command Description Autostart Fiery XF Control Starts Fiery XF Control automatically every time the Windows computer is started If you do not want to start ck th Options SO pen at Ton Fiery XF Control automatically click the command to clear the check mark Macintosh Server File Maintenance Moves the profile folders and system folders from the default location to a different location As an example you can move media profiles to a different partition to free up disk space on the C drive See Changing the profile folders and system folders on page 367 Exit Windows Exits Fiery XF Control In Windows the Gaeo Fiery XF Control icon disappears from the status area On Macintosh the Fiery XF Control icon turns blue To make Fiery XF Control available again e In Windows click Start point to All Programs click EFI clic
42. 1 On the View menu point to Fit to and click an item The default setting is Window It scales the sheet to fill the preview window You can scale a page to the width or height of the preview window In a nesting you can select multiple pages and scale the selection to fill the preveiw window You can also scale a page to its actual size TO ZOOM IN OR OUT ON A PREVIEWED PAGE 1 Do one of the following e In the job list click a job e In the preview window click a page 100 100 JOB LIST AND PREVIEW WINDOW Do one of the following In the zoom box type or select a scaling factor The drop down list box provides scaling factors from 5 to 4000 On the toolbar click the zoom tool and click the area of the preview that you want to enlarge Each time you click in the preview the size of the preview increases by 100 To zoom out press lt Alt gt and click the zoom tool The zoom tool remains selected until you clear it To clear the zoom tool on the toolbar click Transform Job On the View menu click Zoom in or Zoom Out Each time you zoom in the size of the preview increases by 100 Each time you zoom out the size of the preview decreases by 100 Visual aids for page alignment The following visual aids are available to help you with page alignment on the sheet Rulers Guides Grid Marks Page Frame Overlaps Sheet Margins Some types of visual aid can be given a magnetic property which
43. 1 Start Color Tools and click Visual Correction Correction type Re4inearization Plate compensation Gradation Color mode mK cwy CMYKOG RGB cyan Magenta Yellow Black Orange Red Green Blue Spot color CJ 2 Click the Info button and follow the on screen instructions When you have created a plate compensation file you can select it in Fiery XF CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES TO SELECT A PLATE COMPENSATION FILE IN FIERY XF Make sure that the plate compensation file is located in the Balance folder before proceeding with the following steps You may need to copy the file manually to the Balance folder if it was saved to a different destination For more information see Program structure on page 363 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Color tab open the Color management pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Color tab open the Color management pane 2 Under Plate compensation select the plate compensation file 3 Save your changes UPDATING FIERY XF AND MEDIA PROFILES UPDATING FIERY XF AND MEDIA PROFILES EFI continues to develop its products after product launch to improve functionality or to increase printer support It is therefore recommended that you run the update procedures regularly to make sure that your software and media profiles are alw
44. 1000 If you have an ES 2000 you must select it first in the Preferences dialog box For more information see Measurement device settings on page 282 Connect your measuring device click Measure and follow the on screen instructions to measure a color patch Spot colors that are defined in the L a b color space can be included in the dynamic wedge e Dependent lets you type color values in the color space of the source profile or media profile Select Source or Printer Then from the drop down list box select a spot color type and type color values in the appropriate boxes If your printer supports white ink clear ink or metallic inks you can also define 100 color values and gradients for these ink channels Select Printer as the dependent type and Automatic as the spot color type The additional ink channels are listed as 1 2 and 3 Rest the pointer on 1 2 or 3 to show the respective ink channel For information on adding color gradients see Adding color gradients on page 289 6 Do one of the following e On the toolbar click Save e On the File menu click Save A spot color patch is displayed under My Custom Spot Colors Independent L a b color definitions take preference over CMYK OG RGB printer dependent color definitions 7 Confirm or change the name of the spot color table click Save CXF is the new default file format for spot c
45. 2 Click Advanced 3 Select a halftone printer It is not possible to implement screening files for contone printers 4 Select a resolution 5 Select a dot shape Choose from round diamond square line ellipse Dot CREATOR 6 Select Prevent moir optional Dot Creator assesses the risk of moir patterns and modifies the settings accordingly Moir patterns can occur as a result of an unfavorable combination of print resolution and screen ruling for example if two halftone screens with only slightly different screen rulings are superimposed or if they are rotated by only slightly different angles The screen angles C 15 degrees M 45 degrees K 75 degrees and Y 90 degrees or 0 degrees produce the best results Screened printouts without moir patterns are generally only possible with screen rulings of up to 150 lpi 7 Type a screen ruling and a screen angle for each process color 8 Click Preview to display a preview You can show or hide selected colors from the preview by selecting or clearing the check boxes in the Show column 9 Click Save The screening file is saved to the Screening folder When you have created a screening file you can to incorporate it into a media profile For more information see Incorporating a screening file into a media profile on page 350 Incorporating a screening file into a media profile There are two ways to incorporate a screening file into a media profile
46. 89 x 9 17 inch 16 89 x 9 17 inch 9 59 x 13 27 inch 19 84 x 13 27 inch U 16 89 x 6 61 inch 16 89 x 6 61 inch 16 89 x 6 61 inch 1 Do one of the following e Hold down lt Alt gt and hold down the mouse button on a tile edge Drag the tile edge to the new position and release the mouse button The current pointer position is displayed in the preview window to help you to pinpoint the x or y coordinate of the edge more easily WH e Hold down lt Alt gt and click a tile edge Release the lt Alt gt button On the toolbar type an x or y coordinate for the tile edge in the appropriate box TILING General tiling settings TO LOCK A TILE EDGE AT ITS CURRENT POSITION You can lock a tile edge at a fixed position in the image By locking tile edges you can avoid joins in obtrusive places 1 Do one of the following al e Click a tile edge On the toolbar click the padlock button e Right click a tile edge and click Lock Tile Edge TO SELECT MULTIPLE TILES 1 Do one of the following e To select non adjacent tiles hold down lt Ctrl gt and click individual tiles e To select adjacent tiles hold down lt Shift gt and click the first tile that you want to select Then click the last tile that you want to select All the tiles in the rows in between are selected too TO MERGE TILES 1 Select two or more adjacent tiles 2 Right click the selected tiles and click Merge Tiles The tiles are merged However
47. CUT CONTOURS FOR KNOWN SPOT COLORS Job with cut contours 1 Default cut contour 2 Undefined cut contours Follow these steps if e The cut contour is a known spot color The cut contour is not a default cut contour For a list of default cut contour names see Cut contours in the graphics program on page 228 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Finishing tab open the Cut pane The contour colors table shows the job s cut contours Contour cutting Material Generic Printer Profile Thickness 0 000000 Inch Width 78 756 Inch Height 3937 008 Inch v Extract contour path from EPS PDF Contour colors Mode 2 PANTONE 287 CVC Cut Standard 4 2 PANTONE Black 6 C Cut Standard 4 PANTONE Cool Gray 6 Cut Standard 4 O AEM cutcontour Cut standard 2 CutContour is a default contour color that is detected in Fiery XF The other three cut contours are recognized spot colors but they have not been defined as cut contours in Fiery XF If the table displays an unknown spot color you must define the unknown spot color For more information see To select cut contours for unknown spot colors on page 242 Under Contour cutting click Extract contour path from EPS PDF If you do not extract the contour path from EPS PDF jobs or if the job does not contain a contour path the bounding box is automatically used as the cut contour
48. Computer and click Properties Click Advanced system settings The System Properties dialog box appears The Advanced tab is selected Click the Settings button for performance Click the Data Execution Prevention tab Select Turn on DEP for all programs and services except those I select Then click Add and browse to the Client folder Select all the application files with the extension exe and add them to the list of programs that are not affected by DEP Then click Add and brows to the Server folder Add all the application files that are located in the Server folder in the same way TROUBLESHOOTING License problems Fiery XF cannot find the license Cause Remedy Cause Remedy There may be licenses for different dongle IDs in the FlexLM folder Make sure that the dongle for which the software is licensed is currently plugged in The base license s may have been removed from the FlexLM folder If you have upgraded the software from an older version you still require the original licenses of the previous versions Make sure that the license for the predecessor version s as well as for the upgrade license are correctly installed in the FlexLM folder The license file downloaded from the activation website cannot be installed Cause Remedy The downloaded license file may have the wrong file extension Check the file extension of the license file Licenses with the extension txt are not
49. FOTOBA marks it is a good idea to save each group of settings as a preset A preset is a template for a group of settings that are saved under a unique name You can create presets in the pane bar menu The next time you set up FOTOBA marks you need only to select the preset name CUTTING OPTIONS CUTTING OPTIONS The following cutting licenses are available e Cut Marks Option You can set up grommet marks For more information see Grommet marks on page 223 You can set up FOTOBA marks For more information see FOTOBA crop marks on page 226 You can set up many different types of cutting marks including i cut level 1 and level 2 and EuroSystems OptiSCOUT Design 7 for SUMMA F series You can set up a connection to the Ziind Cut Center and print the cutting information to ZCC format e Print amp Cut Option This option provides support for a wide range of print and cut devices e Cut Server Option This option outputs jobs to a wide range of additional cutters and routing tables that are not supported directly in Fiery XF For all three options you require also the Spot Color Option The Spot Color Option enables in RIP separation which ensures that the cut contour can be exported as a separated file Cut contours To process jobs with cut contours e The cut contour must be created properly in the graphics program The name of the cut contour must be defined in Fiery XF Cut contou
50. Fiery XF provides for users with administrator rights a set of tools for improving the color reproduction of your output device e Color Tools is a standard component of Fiery XF You can use it to optimize existing media profiles or to integrate third party media profiles e Color Profiler Suite provides additional tools for creating and editing your own media profiles simulation reference profiles and device link profiles Color Profiler Suite requires an additional license Each media profile that you select in Fiery XF has a base linearization file connected to it The base linearization file was created for a specific output device However no two output devices are the same and even mass produced printers of the same model display slightly different color properties Your output device will undoubtedly have different color properties from the output device for which the media profile was created You can improve the color output as follows You can redefine the ink limits for the base linearization file to ensure that the color reproduction of your printer matches that of the reference printer for which the media profile was originally created e You can create a new base linearization file and media profile for your specific output device This method is more precise and achieves overall better color results The system configuration During program installation a default linearization workflow and a default linearization d
51. Grommet marks are often used in the production market to mount advertising banners and flags by feeding a rod through the grommet marks Grommet marks 1 Circle 2 Ring 3 Crosshair TO SET UP GROMMET MARKS 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Finishing tab open the Grommet Marks pane Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Finishing tab open the Grommet Marks pane 2 On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings 3 Select Page Marks or Sheet Marks Multiple selections are possible Grommet marks for sheets are available for nestings only 4 Select a grommet marks type Choose between Circle Ring and Crosshair GROMMET MARKS 5 Define the appearance of the grommet marks You can specify the diameter and the line thickness Line thickness is not available for circle grommet marks The default color is black By clicking the black box you can select a different color 6 Define a margin By default grommet marks are positioned along the edge of the image You can reposition grommet marks relative to the edge of the image by defining a margin width and selecting Inside or Outside Margin 1 No margin default 2 Inside margin 3 Outside margin 7 Do one of the following Define the number of grommet marks along each edge Each edge can have a different number o
52. HR Connected Q ailbrste Logged in succesfully to localhost Measuring method Multi Measuring device none Ugra Fogra MediaWedge V30a Illuminant D50 Delta E format dE CIE76 _ Legend Description 1 Displays the first set of color values in the color measurement table M1 2 Displays the second set of color values in the color measurement table M2 3 The delta E warning indicator displays the amount of deviation from the reference in terms of delta E Delta E is the mathematical difference between two colors in the L a b color space 4 The 2D view represents a cross section of the L a b color space Point to a node to highlight the corresponding color value and the delta E value in the appropriate tables 5 Changes the cutting plane in the 2D view Use the slide bar to show the a b dimensions for a particular L value VERIFIER 315 Legend Description 6 Displays the 3D view of the color gamut For more information see 3D Viewer on page 325 7 Opens the 2D or 3D Viewer The Viewer windows are an enlarged view of the displayed 2D or 3D view Comprehensive settings are available in 3D Viewer For more information see 3D Viewer on page 325 8 The results area shows whether the measured values for delta E and paper white are within the defined tolerances Additional tabs show whether the measured values for delta E and paper white are within the toleran
53. It ensures that the dynamic wedge is composed only of colors that are within the printer gamut and can therefore be realistically reproduced by the printer Select this setting to check how well the media profile can reproduce the printer gamut Clear this setting to measure if the printout is color consistent with the original job In Job Explorer you can see the effect of this setting on the Control Strips pane A warning message is displayed next to colors that are not within the color gamut of the printer If you select In gamut colors only a new dynamic wedge is created with colors that fit into the printer gamut 8 Save your changes A preview is always created for jobs with a dynamic wedge even if the preview setting is cleared The preview displays a generic media wedge The colors that have been extracted from the job are visible in the printout and in Job Explorer on the Control Strips pane Footer layout You can change the footer layout as follows e You can place the job ticket and control strips on separate lines e You can change the horizontal and vertical distance between footer and page edge e You can change the width and height of the job ticket You can change the font size of the job ticket e You can realign the footer in relation to the sheet TO PLACE THE JOB TICKET AND CONTROL STRIPS ON SEPARATE LINES 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow e Go to
54. Job Explorer In the job list click the job In a nesting the job ticket and control strips are automatically placed on separate lines under each page 2 On the Layout tab open the Job Ticket pane 3 On the Job Ticket for Page or Job Ticket for Nesting tab click Must not exceed page size 4 Save your changes For nestings you may need to update the preview FOOTER 134 TO CHANGE THE DISTANCE BETWEEN FOOTER AND PAGE 1 2 3 4 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Layout tab open the Job Ticket pane Type in the horizontal or vertical distance between footer and page The vertical setting changes the distance between the bottom edge of the page and the footer The horizontal setting indents the footer in relation to the left edge of the page Page footers for nested pages cannot be indented Save your changes For nestings you may need to update the preview TO CHANGE THE WIDTH AND HEIGHT OF THE JOB TICKET 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Layout tab open the Job Ticket pane Type in a maximum width for the job ticket The default width of a job ticket is the width of the page minus the width of selected control strips Type in a maximum height for the job t
55. New User rc Description Password Confirm password 7 User must change password at next logon _ User cannot change password _ Password never expires Account is disabled Hep PRINTING THROUGH A HOTFOLDER Type a user name Define a password Then confirm the password by re typing it in the appropriate box Make sure to use the same user name and password for both computers Clear all the check boxes relating to the password Click Create TO ASSIGN ADMINISTRATOR STATUS TO A WINDOWS USER 1 In Control Panel click User Accounts and click Manage User Accounts The User Accounts dialog box appears Click the Advanced tab Under Advanced user management click Advanced In the Local Users and Groups Local column click Users In the Name column right click the user and click Properties The Properties dialog box appears Click the Member Of tab and click Add Under Enter the object names to select type Administrators and click Check Names The name is displayed as follows IP address Administrators or Computername Administrators Click OK and close all dialog boxes PRINTING THROUGH UNIDRIVER PRINTING THROUGH UNIDRIVER Unidriver is a special printer driver that was developed by EFI Like a virtual printer Unidriver enables you to print directly to a Fiery XF server on Windows or Macintosh from any graphics program However
56. OF IMPURITIES 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Color tab open the Color Management pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Color tab open the Color Management pane On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings Under Color optimization select one of the following Setting Description Clean colors Cleans process colors excluding black and secondary colors of impure color Clean colors and black text as inkjet black Cleans process colors including Clean colors black text and images as inkjet black black and secondary colors of impure color These settings are a combination of Clean colors and Black as inkjet black Under Threshold select Automatic cleaning or Manual cleaning In automatic cleaning mode Fiery XF provides optimal values that are based on the selected printer media and profiles In manual cleaning mode you can define the percentage at which impure color is removed It is recommended that you use automatic cleaning Save your changes MAKING COLOR ADJUSTMENTS Converting to grayscale You can convert jobs to grayscale Five different tints are available from a yellowish tint warm gray to a bluish tint cold gray ad sD N p e gt x J TO CONVERT JOBS TO GRAYSCALE 1 Do one of the following e Go to S
57. PDF If you do not extract the contour path from EPS PDF jobs or if the job does not contain a contour path the bounding box is automatically used as the cut contour e To cut the job Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Output tab open the Special Printer Settings pane Under Contour cutting select the mode Cut only On the toolbar click Print amp Cut Alternatively right click the job in the job list and click Print amp Cut Cut Server The Cut Server Option increases productivity by seamlessly connecting job output and finishing processes One license entitles you to install the software on up to four different computers and to set up a maximum of two different cutters for each in Fiery XF Therefore you can drive up to eight cutting devices in parallel Cut Server enables you to cut register marks with a wide range of cutters and routing tables thus eliminating the need to work with different software applications for each cutter TO INSTALL CUT SERVER You can install Cut Server on any Windows computer The Fiery XF server does not have to be installed on the same computer 1 Insert the software DVD into the DVD ROM drive of a Windows computer In the Welcome screen click Install Fiery XF 2 Display the contents of the DVD in Windows Explorer CUTTING OPTIONS Open the EFI Cut Server folder and double click the AUTORUN application file Follow the
58. Server Login dialog box appears 2 From the drop down list box select the IP address of the computer on which the Cut Server license is installed 3 Click Select The Add Setup dialog box appears CUTTING OPTIONS 4 Follow the on screen instructions to set up your cut device Afterwards the program window appears File Edit Setup Help wi Job 7 EE Folna veraWVLEC sep Joblome sma Sender Omersions Copi o EEE Free 1 77 GB Free 47 3 B Total 2 00 GB a i 94 t i 5 On the Edit menu click Preferences and make sure that a hotfolder is set up The hotfolder must match the export folder in Fiery XF Browse to the export folder that you defined in Fiery XF Then click OK Although Cut Server must be installed on a Windows computer you can send jobs from an Fiery XF server that is installed on either Windows or Macintosh For more information on using Cut Server see the Cut Server help Managing cut contours To process a job with cut contours correctly in Fiery XF the following criteria must be met e In the graphics program the cut contour must be created in a spot color For more information see Cut contours in the graphics program on page 228 The spot color must be defined in Fiery XF It is a good idea to load cut contour jobs as hold jobs That way you can check the cut contour settings before job processing starts CUTTING OPTIONS TO DEFINE NON DEFAULT
59. Step 3 of 5 Device connection Connection type Print via IP network Print to system printer no port available Print via IP network IP address 127 0 0 1 Used TCP IP protocol is RAW on port LPR queue 9100 gt Print via port na port available 10 Select one of the following connection types e Select Print to system printer to print to a Windows printer that has already been set up as a system printer on the computer that is running the Fiery XF server software Then select the printer from the drop down list box This setting is available for Windows only and the system printer must be a printer that is supported by Fiery XF e Select Print via IP network to print to a network printer Type the IP address of the network printer Then do one of the following For all output devices except Fiery Command WorkStation Select the type of TCP IP protocol that your printer uses for data transfer Most printers support the RAW protocol and print to port 9100 The LPR protocol is normally reserved for Unix systems or print servers with multiple interfaces In most cases you can leave the box empty Refer to your printer manual or ask your system administrator if you are unsure For Fiery Command WorkStation Select a queue name Print Hold or Direct e Select Print via port to print to a printer that is connected
60. The following are general tips to help you to achieve the best possible print quality Make sure that the printer is properly calibrated Some printers have an internal calibration feature that you can activate from the Special tab in System Manager Use a high quality media that is suitable for the job For example use a proofing media for CMYK proofing jobs and use photo paper for vivid output of photographic images Make sure that you select profiles and rendering intents that are suitable for your job For more information see Selecting profiles and rendering intents on page 136 Relinearize the printer By performing a relinearization you adjust the ink densities to those of the reference printer on which the media profile was created A relinearization helps to ensure that the printer s color reproduction properties remain constant For more information see Relinearizing the printer on page 161 Optimize the media profile to ensure that you get the best possible color results from your printer For more information see Optimizing a media profile on page 153 For verify jobs with the status Verification failed it may be possible to get within the tolerances by performing a job specific optimization This process optimizes the job s color management by creating a correction profile that is a better match for the color gamut of the simulation profile For more information see Verify workflows in Fiery XF
61. Thus RGB images show much more detail and appear more saturated in the printout In the case of non PDF jobs it means jobs are converted directly to the color space of the media profile 7 Under Simulation profile select Use PDF output intent if available optional This setting is applied to PDF X jobs with an embedded output intent Embedded output intents override the simulation profile that is selected on this pane This setting takes the selected working color space into account For more information see Applying a working color space on page 99 PDF X 3 B 3 Tagged profile A e g SOcoated_v2 la Fe Tagged profile e g eciRGB _v2 la IA Output Intent e g ISOcoated v2 SELECTING PROFILES AND RENDERING INTENTS 8 Do one of the following e Under Source profiles select a rendering intent for CMYK jobs a rendering intent for RGB jobs and a rendering intent for grayscale jobs The table shows which rendering intent is most suitable for which type of job For more information see Rendering intents on page 141 Rendering intent Absolute colorimetric paper white Suitable for printing Proofs with paper white simulation Perceptual Photographs Saturated Business graphics in bright saturated colors Perceptual absolute Photographs that need to be converted from a large source color space RGB to a smaller destination color space
62. Under Monitor gamma move the slider as required Move the slider to the left to increase the brightness Move the slider to the right to decrease the brightness 3 Click OK General settings You can select a color space and a delta E format for displaying color values You can also select a light source The light source has a great impact on the way colors are perceived by the human eye TO CHANGE THE COLOR SPACE You can change the color space in which the measured readings are displayed 1 Do one of the following e On the View menu point to Color space and click an item e Right click anywhere in a color measurement table point to Color space and click an item VERIFIER 332 You can choose between RGB L a b XYZ CIELCH or Density L a b ist the default color space For more information on the available color spaces see Glossary on page 382 Density is available only if color values are already displayed In a color accurate proof the displayed density values are comparable with the density values that are obtained during a production run However be aware that the density values of individual inkjet inks are not the same as the density vlaues of printing inks This is because the composition of inks on an offset printing machine is different from the inks on an inkjet printer TO CHANGE THE DELTA E FORMAT Color accuracy is measured in terms of delta E Delta E is the mathematical difference between
63. Update Downloads and install Fiery XF updates from a computer with Internet access See Updating Fiery XF on page 166 Fiery XF Profiles Online Update Downloads and installs new or updated media profiles from a computer with Internet access See Updating media profiles on page 168 FIERY XF CONTROL Shortcut menu command Fiery XF Server Stop Description Stops the Fiery XF server You must stop the Fiery XF server to activate Server File Maintenance If you are currently not working with Fiery XF you can free up additional RAM by stopping the Fiery XF server temporarily The Fiery XF Control icon turns red when the Fiery XF server is not running Fiery XF Server Start Starts the Fiery XF server if the Fiery XF server is not running The Fiery XF server is not running if the Fiery XF Control icon is red Fiery XF Server Restart Stops and then restarts the Fiery XF server Some processes can be accelerated by restarting the Fiery XF server For example new profiles are often detected quicker if you restart the server Fiery XF Client Start Starts the Fiery XF client This command is available only if the server and the client are installed on the same computer Fiery XF Server Configuration Windows only The Fiery XF server runs as a service Use this command to start or stop the service You can also use this command to assign network access rights to the
64. Windows taskbar is not displayed by default 1 Move the pointer to the bottom of the screen 2 Right click the taskbar and then click Properties 3 In the Taskbar and Start Menu Properties dialog box click the Taskbar tab 4 Under Taskbar appearance select Lock the taskbar and clear Auto hide the taskbar 5 Click OK FIERY XF CONTROL TO DISPLAY THE FIERY XF CONTROL ICON If the Fiery XF Control icon is not visible in the taskbar Windows or in the Dock Macintosh try the following In Windows 7 or Windows 8 make sure that Fiery XF Control is not a hidden icon In the status area of the taskbar move the pointer to the bottom of the screen In the status area of the taskbar click the up arrow and click Customize The Notification Area Icons dialog box appears For EFI_XF_Control exe select the behavior Show icon and notifications and click OK Windows taskbar 1 Up arrow to show hidden icons 2 Customize settings to show hidden icons Beet 8 31 2012 jij e In Windows click Start point to All Programs click EFI click Fiery XF and then click Fiery XF Control e On Macintosh go to Applications Fiery XF Server and drag the Fiery XF Control application to the Dock TO START A PROCESS FROM FIERY XF CONTROL 1 Right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click an item You can use Fiery XF Control for the following tasks Shortcut menu command Description Fiery XF Online
65. You must first define the spot color and then select the cut contour 1 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Color tab open the Spot Colors pane The spot color table shows the unknown spot color Source Map to PANTONE 208 PANTONE PANTONE 208 C PANTONE 433 PANTONE PANTONE 433C PANTONE254 PANTONE PANTONE 254C PANTONE2617 PANTONE PANTONE 2617 C PANTONE 234 PANTONE PANTONE 234 C PANTONE2755 PANTONE PANTONE 2755 C Kiss Cut Unknown 2 Define the unknown spot color For more information see To define spot colors for a loaded job on page 266 CUTTING OPTIONS C 3 Save your changes Source Map to PANTONE 208 PANTONE PANTONE 208 C PANTONE 433 PANTONE PANTONE 433C PANTONE 254 PANTONE PANTONE 254 C PANTONE2617 PANTONE PANTONE 2617 C PANTONE 234 PANTONE PANTONE 234 C PANTONE 2755 PANTONE PANTONE 2755 C PANTONE WARM RED C 4 On the Finishing tab open the Cut pane The contour colors table shows the job s cut contours 5 Select Extract contour path from EPS PDF 6 Select the check box next to each required cut contour 7 Save your changes Contour cutting Material Generic Printer Profile Thickness 0 000000 Inch Width 78 756 Inch Height 3937 008 Inch V Extract contour path from EPS PDF Contour colors Mode Standard PANTONE 2755 C Cut Standard PANTONE 2617 C Cut Standard PANTONE 208 C Cut Standard PAN
66. activate the snap to feature on page 77 To create a guide drag the pointer from the horizontal or vertical ruler You can lock guides at their current position On the View menu click Lock Guides To unlock guides click Lock Guides again to remove the check mark To move a guide rest the pointer on a guide The pointer changes into a split line Drag the guide to a new position It is not possible to move locked guides To remove a guide rest the pointer on a guide The pointer changes into a split line Drag horizontal guides to the horizontal ruler and vertical guides to the vertical ruler To remove all guides on the View menu click Clear Guides Guides are automatically deleted when you exit Fiery XF JOB LIST AND PREVIEW WINDOW Grid The grid is a set of evenly spaced non printable horizontal and vertical lines The grid spacing is fixed but adapts automatically according to the selected zoom factor By activating the snap to feature the grid markings can be given a magnetic property which causes pages in their proximity to snap to them For more information see To activate the snap to feature on page 77 JOB LIST AND PREVIEW WINDOW Marks If you have set up your job with crop marks or cut marks you can hide them from the preview The position of the page on the sheet does not change JOB LIST AND PREVIEW WINDOW Page Frame You can preview each page with a black border
67. address of the computer Under Name type a unique name that is easily identifiable This is the name of the printer that you select in the graphics program It is a good idea to include the word Unidriver in the name Under Use select Other A new dialog box appears Browse to the EFI_UD_XF ppd file The PPD is located at Library Printers PPDs contents Resources en lproj Select the PPD and click Open You return to the Advanced tab Click Add eoo Print amp Scan _ ee Printers ip 10 130 86 136 Open Print Queue Options amp Supplies Location Kind Fiery XF Unidriver Status Idle _ Share this printer on the network Sharing Preferences beat Default printer Last Printer Used D Default paper size A4 A M Click the lock to prevent further changes va The Fiery XF server is added as a printer PRINTING THROUGH UNIDRIVER TO PRINT A JOB By default jobs are printed according to the workflow settings in Fiery XF In Unidriver you can apply job settings that override the workflow settings The actual steps that you need to perform may vary slightly from the description below depending on the graphics program that you are using 1 In the graphics program open the job file and select the print command 2 Inthe print dialog box select the IP address of the Fiery XF server 3 From the drop down list box sel
68. amount of ink is applied for example 0 color instead of 100 color or 70 color instead of 30 color With the clever use of an inverted setting you can simulate the final print run on any colored substrate SPOT COLORS 4 Inthe Apply as column of the table select a printer specific color optional If your printer supports white ink clear ink or metallic inks you can assign any of these additional printer inks in addition to the original spot color definition The additional inks are printed either behind or on top of the original spot color This feature enables you to create many interesting special effects particularly if your printer supports multi pass multi layer printing Be aware that to create such special effects printer specific settings are required on the Special Printer Settings pane EFI provides articles on how to incorporate printer inks into a Fiery XF workflow Visit our website at http w3 efi com services proofing services knowledge center 5 Save your changes A spot color table is created and the preview is updated This process can take a short while Spot Colors pane 1 Selected spot color table on ae Sy OAL Jiga J RERA i i ae ee Samta Jerene tate i me tats aeee om mme P nue towns amin res OO r 1 ameen ite amen The spot color table is a preset of all the spot colors that are contained in the current j
69. as a protocol as a label or as a screenshot TO SET UP A PRINTER 1 Do one of the following e In Windows on the File menu click Select printer e On Macintosh on the Verifier menu click Page Setup 2 In the Print Setup dialog box select your printer 3 Click OK TO PRINT OUT VERIFICATION RESULTS 1 On the File menu point to Print and click an item Screenshot You can print an image of the current program window e Protocol The printed protocol includes ISO 12647 7 and ISO 12647 8 compliant information It also displays CMYK gradation curve diagrams depicting all reference and measured points along the curve 150 12647 7 Contract Proof Media Wedge efi 1S0 12687 7 Contract Proof Media Wedga efi ome een eae tegewemeneeye sio rene weer sn Trin Porter Coo HAHH zi Coa pii UT 60 CAN Comma Pee Aas gr 9 ne Se mas ee D IEAS mastaa VERIFIER 328 Before printing complete the Protocol Properties dialog box with job specific information By clicking Save properties you can save the information to the defined data folder and load it again later as a template for future jobs e Label The label includes all the criteria that is required to verify ISO 12647 7 and 12647 8 compliancy amp Print preview ISO 12647 7 Contract Proof Media Wedge Approved by Proof profile Reference data Proofing system Reference profile Measuring device EFI ES 1000
70. automatically Proof Photo Production Please enter an EPL name 7 Generate name from settings Please select a media or key in Target inch 356 x 540 Normat Error Diffusion SE1 Actual inch Color mode 3 Click the Info button and follow the on screen instructions to complete your base linearization You can save your base linearization file at any time and complete it at a later date On the File menu click Save Base Linearization To complete an unfinished base linearization file see To edit a base linearization file on page 152 When you have finished creating your base linearization file do one of the following e Go on to create a media profile For more information see Creating a media profile on page 152 e Connect the base linearization file to an existing media profile For more information see Profile Connector on page 158 CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES e Select the base linearization file in Fiery XF Selecting a base linearization file that is not connected to a media profile enables you to print without applying color management In this way you can check the color reproduction properties of the printer For more information see Media profiles on page 137 TO EDIT A BASE LINEARIZATION FILE You can complete an unfinished base linearization file or you can edit any custom or default base line
71. available to all users with administrator rights They can be assigned manually to other users For more information see To assign a workspace on page 71 TO CREATE A WORKSPACE IN WORKSPACE MANAGER 1 Do one of the following e On the tab bar click the menu button point to Workspace and click Workspace Manager e On the menu bar click Workspace and click Workspace Manager PRODUCTION PROOFING WORKSPACES 70 2 Do one of the following e Click New A new workspace corresponds to the default workspace FULL It provides access to Fiery XF s full range of licensed features e In the left hand column click an existing workspace default or custom and click Duplicate to copy the workspace settings New and duplicated workspaces are created with a default name You can overwrite the default name with a unique name Click the default name once Then click the default name again The file name changes into an editable box Overwrite the default name and press lt Enter gt 3 In the right hand column select the panes to be included in the workspace Select or clear the check boxes as required The currently applied settings from each pane are saved to the workspace not the default settings 4 Do one of the following e Click Apply to save your settings Then click Close e Click Close The Confirm dialog box appears Click Yes to save your settings and to exit Works
72. base linearization file to a media profile or to a device link profile Furthermore Profile Connector enables you to make quick changes to an existing base linearization file For example e You can incorporate a screening file that was created in Dot Creator for v2 screening For more information see Dot Creator on page 343 e You can change the print direction e You can change the total ink limit CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES e You can correct inconsistencies in the length of printed jobs For more information see Correcting the length of printed jobs on page 360 TO CONNECT A BASE LINEARIZATION FILE TO A MEDIA PROFILE OR TO A DEVICE LINK PROFILE 1 Start Color Tools and click Profile Connector Pot Se Eee Printer linearization EFI linearization EPL Media length correction Target Actual 19 685 inch 19 685 E inch Media name E Print unidirectional Total ink limit JE Printer model o Dot Size Resolution eat Print configuration set Color mode oo Media Ink type Ink limit Dot Creator Screening Screening file Connect to profiles V Media profile E Device Link Select media profile fle Select Device Link fle 2 Click the Info button and follow the on screen instructions to modify your base linearization file On completion the base linearization file is saved automatically to the Media Profiles folder When you have modified yo
73. box PRINTING THROUGH A VIRTUAL PRINTER PRINTING THROUGH A VIRTUAL PRINTER You can set up Fiery XF as a virtual printer By setting up a virtual printer you can print directly to Fiery XF from the print command of the graphics program Setting up the virtual printer in Fiery XF To print straight from a graphics program you must first make certain settings in Fiery XF TO SET UP FIERY XF AS A VIRTUAL PRINTER 1 2 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow Set the workflow offline by clicking on the green arrow at workflow entry On the File tab open the Job Detection pane Create a hotfolder For more information see Creating a hotfolder in Fiery XF on page 183 On Macintosh make sure that the hotfolder has write access for everyone If the hotfolder is a subfolder all parent folders must also have read access To check the access rights right click the folder and click Get Info Under Sharing amp Permissions change the privilege settings if required Click Create virtual printer Type a printer name optional This is the name that will be displayed in the print dialog box of the graphics program You can use the default printer name or you can type a custom printer name If you type a custom printer name it is recommended that you do not use a name that contains special characters Save your changes Set the workflow online by clicking on the red rectangle at workflow e
74. by default on all Macintosh computers that are running Mac OS X 10 6 4 or higher 1 Start your web browser and type http localhost 631 admin and press lt Enter gt CUPS starts If an error message informs you that the web interface is currently disabled start Terminal Type the following line of text and press lt Enter gt cupsctl WebInterface yes You can disable the web interface by typing cupsctl WebInterface no if required PRINTING THROUGH A VIRTUAL PRINTER 2 In the CUPS window click the Administration tab 3 Under Server Settings select Allow printing from the Internet 4 Click Change Settings PRINTING TO FILE PRINTING TO FILE If you have a license for the File Output Option you can output jobs to TIFF or PDF format One license lets you set up a maximum of five output devices that print to file TO SET UP THE OUTPUT DEVICE TO PRINT TO FILE 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the output device On the Device tab open the Information pane Under Manufacturer select EFI Under Device type select a print to file format On the Device tab open the Connection pane and complete your settings For more information on individual settings see the context sensitive help In the layout area connect the output device to a workflow For more information see Setting system configurations online offline on page 61 Save your changes PRINTING T
75. colorimetric value for dot gain unlike the dot gain commonly referred to in printing houses which is composed of an optical part light trapping and a mechanical part dot spread Dot gain can only be measured using pure primary colors For example if the full tone color Cyan is output on an inkjet printer to simulate offset printing it will not have the CMYK value 100 0 0 0 but will also contain a percentage of magenta yellow and black Device link profile Dot gain A Device Link profile represents a fixed combination of printer and media type Device Link profiles can be created with Color Profiler Suite They must be connected to a base linearization file and a media profile using Profile Connector Profile Connector is available in Color Tools See Tone value GLOSSARY 385 Final Page Gamma Many TIFF IT files and Scitex CT LW files are created with a final page A final page file contains information that is extracted from the CT and LW files and ensures that e CT and LW files are clearly recognizable as belonging to the same job e Photos are always correctly positioned at the right coordinates in the final output file A final page is essential if you are printing a job with a photo that is not positioned in the top left corner of the page The ratio of the contrast range between original and reproduction A gamma value of 1 means that the original and copy proof have the same contrast range Halftone screen
76. consists of a user a workflow and an output device It handles all work y g P processes from file input to file output GLOSSARY 388 TIFF IT When image data is saved to TIFF IT format the pixel data of a job is saved to two different files The CT continuous tone file describes low resolution and half tone data e g photos A CT file may also be created for each separated spot color e The LW line work file describes high resolution text or line graphics In order for the job to be output these files have to be combined back together See also Final Page Total ink limit The total ink limit describes the point at which a printer attains its maximum color density Most inkjet printers do not increase color density in a linear fashion In many cases the maximum color density is achieved at approx 50 as illustrated in the graph A ETT t E t a a t ett te 0 10 20 30 4 5 amp 70 80 90 100 Input value in Ideal linear behavior Nor linearized ink jet printer Tone value The amount that an ink halftone dot expands when applied to the surface of a media causing darker tones or stronger colors This is usually a factor of the type of press and the absorbency of the media For example screen printing increases density by about 15 so an image with a 50 black fill would appear as approximately 65 black after printing GLOSSARY 389 White point XYZ In printing the w
77. created custom tiles it is a good idea to save the settings as a preset before modifying the job A preset is a template for a group of settings that are saved under a unique name You can create presets in the pane bar menu The next time you set up a tiling you need only to select the preset name TO RESIZE ROWS AND COLUMNS You can resize rows and columns of tiles to avoid awkward joins in your image such as down the middle of a face 28 29 x 9 50 inch 16 89 x 9 50 inch 5 g g g 23 29 x 9 50 inch ol 112 28 29 x 9 50 Inch Changing the size of one row or column causes the adjacent row or column to stretch or shrink accordingly It is not possible to create tiles that exceed the size of the selected media TILING 119 1 Do one of the following e Hold down the mouse button on a tile edge Drag the tile edge to the new position and release the mouse button The current pointer position is displayed in the preview window to help you to pinpoint the x or y coordinate of the edge more easily WH e Click a tile edge On the toolbar type an x or y coordinate for the tile edge in the appropriate box e Click a tile On the toolbar type a new width or height in the appropriate boxes TO RESIZE INDIVIDUAL TILES You can resize individual tiles to avoid awkward joins in your image such as down the middle of a face 16 89 x 9 69 Inch 16 89 x 9 69 Inch 16 89 x 9 69 inch u 5 l6 16 89 x 9 17 inch 16
78. e A default workspace FULL provides access to Fiery XF s full range of licensed features PRODUCTION provides access to all settings that are required in a production workflow but hides those settings that are specifically aimed at a proofing environment PROOFING provides access to all settings that are required in a proofing workflow but hides those settings that are specifically aimed at a production environment Depending on your user settings you may not have access to some or all of the default workspaces e A custom workspace if available If you have administrator rights you can create your own custom workspaces For more information see Creating workspaces on page 68 WORKSPACES 68 Customizing workspaces You can simplify a workspace by hiding tabs and panes that you do not need Reducing the number of visible features makes it easier to find your way around the software A customized workspace is displayed as Custom on the tab bar menu Be aware that workspace customizations in System Manager and in Job Explorer must be made independently For example if you hide the Color tab in Job Explorer it remains visible in System Manager To hide the tab in both program windows you must perform the steps two times once in Job Explorer and once in System Manager In this way you can create different workspaces for workflow settings and job settings TO SHOW HIDE A TAB 1 Do one of the following
79. format instead by selecting EFI PDF Output To print to file you require the File Output Option 4 On the Device tab open the Connection pane 5 Under Connection type select an item The usual setting is print to file However you can print to an IP network printer instead if required To output to a Fiery Command WorkStation type the IP address of the Fiery output device Then click LPR queue and type a queue name Print Hold or Direct Some versions of Fiery Command WorkStation also support printing via port 9100 6 On the Connection pane complete your settings For more information on individual settings see the context sensitive help PRINTING TO A FIERY OUTPUT DEVICE 7 In the layout area connect the output device to a workflow For more information see Setting system configurations online offline on page 61 8 Save your changes PRINTING TO A VUTEK PRINTER PRINTING TO A VUTEK PRINTER If you have a license for the VUTEK Printer Option you can set up one printer This section describes how to set up a connection to a VUTEk printer For more information on setting up a connection to printers of different manufacturers see To create a new output device on page 57 Setting up Fiery XF It is recommended that you do not change the print resolution when printing to a VUTEk printer Considerable discrepancies can result as the print resolution is alread
80. its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of The University of Michigan not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission This software is supplied as is without expressed or implied warranties of any kind Research Systems Unix Group The University of Michigan clo Mike Clark 535 W William Street Ann Arbor Michigan 1 313 763 0525 netatalk itd umich edu First published March 2013 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 14 Program architecture 14 System requirements 15 Windows 15 Macintosh 16 Online help 17 Conventions 17 FIERY XF CONTROL 18 STARTING FIERY XF 22 Starting the Fiery XF server 22 Starting the Fiery XF client 22 Logging on to a Fiery XF server 23 GETTING TO KNOW FIERY XF 27 User interface 27 Job Explorer 27 System Manager 29 Property inspector 30 Global settings 31 General Fiery XF operations 31 Job processing 31 Logging off and exiting Fiery XF 35 Keyboard shortcuts 35 LICENSING 40 Licensing the software 40 Regenerating a license file 45 Viewing license information 47 CREATING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 48 Creating a system configuration in Setup Wizard Assistan
81. job list click the job On the Colors tab open the Spot Colors pane In the spot color definition table undefined spot colors are listed as Unknown Spot Colors pane oeenn 1 Unknown spot colors SPOT COLORS 2 Inthe Source column of the table click the down arrow next to an unknown spot color and click the type of spot color that you want to define Spot Colors Input handling Active setting Automatic Default Spot color library None Zi emk x i Lea b P internai b Source File Color Editor Unknown spot colors E Print unknown spot colors as warning color c Ms Y K Reset e You can define a spot color by mapping it to a color from the internal spot color library The internal spot color library contains thousands of different spot colors from major spot color manufacturers Select PANTONE HKS TOYO or DIC You can define a spot color by entering color values in the selected color space Select CMYK CMYKOG CMYKRGB or L a b You can define a spot color by creating an alias to another spot color in the spot color table Select Alias e You can assign a spot color to a printer ink channel such as one that contains a spot color white ink clear ink or metallic ink Select PRINTER SPOT COLORS 3 In the Map to column of the table define unknow
82. jobs oa ia LES I E You can merge any two jobs The only prerequisites are efi efi a amp E LES E E Seanpoman efi efi ae im oa Ti Fee nwa Reems e The content and master jobs must have the same page size A size difference of plus or minus 0 1 inch is permitted e The background color of the content job must be defined as 100 transparent e Master and content jobs must have the same file extension If the content job is a multi page document the master job is applied to all pages of the document If page layout settings rotation scaling etc or crop marks are applied to the content job the settings are also applied to the merged job However color management settings are not transferred To SET UP A WORKFLOW FOR AUTOMATIC JOB MERGE 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow 2 On the File tab open the Job Merge pane 3 On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings 4 c 5 JOB MERGE 126 In the appropriate boxes type the file names of your master background and content jobs The file names must contain a keyword that is common to both master and content jobs The table below gives some examples of job merge job names File names for master and Common keywords Master file Content file content jobs identified by identified by 2013_Master_Customer pdf 2013 Customer Master Conte
83. measured an ECI2002 random chart you can evaluate it against a visually arranged IT8 7 4 chart by reorganizing the IT8 7 4 color patches Right click on one of the tables and click Sort as reference data When you resort reference data the following happens Visually arranged IT8 7 4 color patches are reorganized so that they match the order of the random chart All non ECI2002 values are ignored By sorting as reference data you can compare any combination of IT8 7 4 chart and Ugra Fogra media wedge that is selected as the control strip because only the Ugra Fogra media wedge data is taken into account Similarly this setting lets you use the test form 1SO12647_7_Evaluation_A pdf to verify printing conditions whose characteristic data is available only as ECI2002 and not as IT8 7 4 data e 2D Viewer In the 2D Viewer Show whole gamut displays a cross section of the L a b color space at a specific L value Use the slide bar to move the cutting plane to show the a b dimensions for the desired L value 2D Viewer Color space Joblist Preview 1 Show 2D view i View 2 Enlarge 2D view Iv Show whole gamut 3 Cutting plane at L 50 a ag L 50 VERIFIER 325 3D Viewer 1 Show 3D view 2 Enlarge 3D view 3D Viewer The 3D Viewer shows the full color gamuts of both sets of measurement data You can drag the 3D model to rotate it By viewing the 3D model from all sides you can see where th
84. not satisfied with your job changes you can return the page to its original state 1 In the job list click the job 2 Do one of the following e On the Edit menu click Reset Page T e On the toolbar click Reset e In the job list right click the job and click Reset Page TO DELETE A JOB 1 In the job list click the job 2 Do one of the following x On the toolbar click Delete Job e In the job list right click the job and click Delete The job is deleted from the job list TO CANCEL JOB PROCESSING By canceling job processing you can prevent a job from being printed unnecessarily if additional job settings are required 1 In the job list click the job 2 Do one of the following e On the toolbar click Cancel Printing t e On the File menu click Cancel e In the job list right click the job and click Cancel Job processing stops The job remains in the job list You can restart job processing by selecting the print command TO SET UP A VIRTUAL SHEET SIZE By default jobs are arranged on the media size that is set up for the output device You can set up a media size that overrides the default setting if required It can be useful to set up a virtual sheet size to process the following types of jobs e Nestings Nestings can be difficult to manage if the output device is set up for oversize media or roll media Defining a more convenient sheet size gives you better control over the layout of nested pages GE
85. on the sheet NESTINGS 107 TO SET UP A NESTING WORKFLOW In a nesting workflow job processing starts automatically when one of the following criteria has been met e The defined percentage of the sheet area has been filled The defined percentage of a line has been filled e The defined length of time has elapsed since the last job was loaded This setting overrides the other two settings In other words a nesting is processed after the set period of time even if the minimum percentage of the sheet or line has not been filled 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Layout tab open the Nesting pane 2 On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings 3 On the Nesting pane complete your settings Use the settings to define e A criterion for creating a nesting The layout scaling orientation rotation spacing of nested pages For more information on individual settings see the context sensitive help 4 Save the workflow Fiery XF automatically adds all jobs to the current nesting and outputs them according to the workflow settings TO CREATE A MANUAL NESTING You can create a nesting from jobs that are already loaded in Fiery XF You can nest multiple copies of a job by selecting the number of print copies For more information see To define the number of printed copies on page 181 It is a good idea to load jobs as hold jobs so that job processing d
86. output directly to an i cut cutter to a Ziind Cut Center or to any supported print and cut device Furthermore if you have a license for the Cut Server Option you can process register marks from a wide range of additional cutters and routing tables from many different manufacturers i cut cutter i cut marks enable you to save to file complex irregular cutting paths that have been defined in any popular graphics program i cut marks act as an orientation guide for a built in or auxilliary cutter or for a print and cut plotter Fiery XF supports i cut marks level 1 level 2 level 3 and level 5 I cut marks level 4 barcodes are not supported ie 0 e i cut level 1 converts the bounding box into a rectangular cut path The i cut marks define the position of the substrate on the table They are automatically placed around the job You can adjust the position of the cut marks by editing the bleed value It is not possible to add delete or change the position of individual marks CUTTING OPTIONS e i cut level 2 enables Fiery XF to extract and save to file i cut marks and complex irregular cut contours from EPS and PDF jobs e i cut level 3 enables i cut layer names to be extracted from EPS and PDF jobs e i cut level 5 enables the insertion of i cut register marks inside bounding boxes TO SET UP I CUT MARKS 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow The workflow template Contour cuttin
87. pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Output tab open the Advanced Print Options pane 2 Under Separations select an item e You can merge all separations into one composite job e You can print out each separation in color e You can print out each separation in grayscales SEPARATED JOBS 3 Select Invert colors optional This setting is used to create a color negative You can invert the colors of composite jobs or of separated color and grayscale jobs A 4 Save your changes By default all the separations are printed when you click Print However you can omit one or more separations from the print job if required For more information see Excluding spot colors from the job on page 272 si 2s You can use the buttons on the toolbar to scroll through the separations in the preview NESTINGS 106 NESTINGS The nesting feature outputs multiple files collectively as a single job fones imame fian mmis _J aioma am eee m raaa beet 8 Bi i I i LILT Setting up a nesting You can create e A nesting workflow In a nesting workflow all jobs are printed as part of a nesting Fiery XF arranges the pages on the nesting sheet in accordance with the workflow settings Jobs are processed when a defined state has been reached e A manual nesting In a manually created nesting you have full control over which jobs are nested and how they are arranged
88. problems when measuring Therefore Make sure that you use media of at least A3 size 11 x 17 inches Make sure that the linearization workflow is not set up to scale jobs Creating or editing a base linearization file A base linearization file forms the basis for a media profile It contains details of the quantities of ink that that are necessary to achieve the maximum density of color for a specific combination of output device and media type while at the same time using as little ink as possible CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES TO CREATE A NEW BASE LINEARIZATION FILE 1 Connect your measuring device 2 Start Color Tools and click Create Base Linearization You can also start the Create Base Linearization tool directly by transferring the settings from the output device to the linearization device If you start the Create Base Linearization tool in this way many of the printer settings are already made for you For more information see Setting up the linearization device on page 148 Light norm ink build Physical Ink Limit Gray Balance Black Point Definition Advanced Limits Medium Light Inks Quality Control Measuring device settinas Measuring device Linearization intent Linearization Name Printer settings Printer Ink type Media settings Media Media length correction Output settings Resolution Print mode EFLES 1000 Linearization will be done
89. required on the Special Printer Settings pane EFI provides articles on how to incorporate printer inks into a Fiery XF workflow Visit our website at http w3 efi com services proofing services knowledge center You can use the available settings to simulate the final production run on a white or colored substrate Interesting special effects can be achieved for use in the packaging industry if your printer supports the appropriate ink colors TO ASSIGN A SPOT COLOR TO A PRINTER INK CHANNEL 1 Start Color Editor For more information see Starting Color Editor on page 277 2 Under My Custom Spot Colors select a spot color COLOR EDITOR 3 Under Apply as click the button The Apply As dialog box appears Apply As forEFl Blue Color Name PRINTER Color System BARCODE CLEAR_INK Internal CLEAR_INK2 Internal CLEAR_INK2_INV Internal CLEAR_INK3 Internal CLEARING INV Internal CLEAR_INK_INV Internal 9 metauc ink Internal METALLIC_INK_INV Internal PRINTER_SPOT_1_INK Internal PRINTER_SPOT_1_INKINV Internal PRINTER_SPOT_2_INK Internal PRINTER_SPOT_2INKINV Internal PRINTER_SPOT_3_INK Internal PRINTER_SPOT_3_INKINV Internal PRINTER_SPOT_4_INK Internal PRINTER_SPOT 4 INK INV Internal WHITE_INK Internal WHITE_INK2 Internal uli Use Selection Clearalias cancer 4 In the table select the printer ink channel that you want to use to print the spot color To sear
90. resolution before loading in Fiery XF In a production workflow select a workflow template that has been especially designed for fast job output For more information see To create a workflow on page 56 Deactivate in RIP separation to print separated files as a composite job using the printer s CMYK inks If necessary you can select Simulate overprinting in composite jobs instead which is faster to process For more information see In RIP separation on page 96 and Overprinting in composite jobs on page 100 If you do apply in RIP separation do not set the search priority to look for spot colors in the source files Instructing Fiery XF to scan source files for spot color definitions adds to the overall processing time For more information see Changing the search order on page 273 Do not rotate jobs or select minimal media consumption For more information see Rotating a job on page 85 Avoid applying color adjustments unless they are absolutely necessary For more information see Making color adjustments on page 175 INCREASING JOB SPEED e Avoid simulating final run characteristics For more information see Simulating distinctive print characteristics on page 360 e Install the profile folders and system folders on a separate hard drive For more information see Changing the profile folders and system folders on page 367 RIP and print on the fly By default Fie
91. right click a user point to Connected Workflows and click an item that has a check mark next to it In the layout area click a user On the Edit menu point to User point to Connected Workflows and click an item that has a check mark next to it In the layout area right click a workflow point to Connected Workflows and click an item that has a check mark next to it In the layout area click a workflow On the Edit menu point to Workflow point to Connected Users and click an item that has a check mark next to it To disconnect one user from all workflows In the layout area right click a user and click Disconnect from All Workflows In the layout area click a user On the Edit menu point to User and click disconnect from All Workflows To disconnect all users from all workflows On the Edit menu point to System and click Disconnect All Users from All Workflows To disconnect one workflow from one output device In the layout area right click a workflow point to Connected Output Device and click an item that has a check mark next to it In the layout area click a workflow On the Edit menu point to Workflow point to Connected Output Device and click an item that has a check mark next to it To disconnect one output device from one workflow In the layout area right click an output device point to Connected Workflows and click an item that has a check mark next to it
92. set up and print through Unidriver for Macintosh After installation the next step is to add Unidriver as a printer You perform this step on the computer on which Unidriver is installed The instructions vary depending on whether the Fiery XF server is installed in the same subnet as Unidriver or in a different subnet Follow the appropriate set of instruction below TO INSTALL UNIDRIVER 1 2 Insert the software DVD into the DVD ROM drive of the computer on which the graphics program is installed The Welcome screen appears Double click Fiery Tools double click UniDriver click Install Fiery Unidriver and follow the on screen instructions PRINTING THROUGH UNIDRIVER TO ADD UNIDRIVER AS A PRINTER IN THE SAME SUBNET Make sure that Fiery XF is running before you perform the following steps 1 In System Preferences click Print amp Scan e00 Print amp Scan No printers are available Click Add to set up a printer Be Default printer Last Printer Used s Default paper size A4 gt w Click the lock to prevent further changes PRINTING THROUGH UNIDRIVER 2 Click Add If a menu opens click Add Printer or Scanner Kind Del 1130n Laser Printer DELO0159981188E Bonjour Dell Laser Printer M5200 Bonjour EpsonStylusPro4900 26812C Bonjour Phaser 7800GX Bonjour EFl_eXpress Marcel Vervoort s MacPro Quad Bonjour Shared Epson Stylus on PC H
93. settings as a preset A preset is a template for a group of settings that is saved under a unique name The next time you set up a job ticket you need only to select the preset name Click OK Control strips and media wedges Control strips and media wedges are made up of rows of color patches You can use a spectrophotometer color measuring device and any color checker program such as Verifier to measure the color patches and verify color consistency between printouts If you have a license for the Verifier Option you can measure the colors of a printout against a reference for example Fogra MK 11 to verify ISO 12647 7 compliancy You can select the following e A control strip or media wedge that is shipped with Fiery XF e Your own control strip Control strip files must be saved to the ControlStrip folder Fiery XF can process all supported file formats except separated files There is no size restriction e A dynamic wedge A dynamic wedge is made up of the job s most prominent colors Each dynamic wedge is therefore unique to that job TO SELECT A CONTROL STRIP OR A MEDIA WEDGE 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job To select a control strip for a nesting click the nesting job not a nested page On the Verify tab open the Control Strips pane Nesting footer 1 Page footer 2 Sheet footer FOOTER 131
94. simulation reference profile you can select it in Fiery XF For more information see Source profiles and simulation reference profiles on page 138 Only simulation reference profiles that are located in the Reference folder can be selected in Fiery XF For more information see Program structure on page 363 Creating a monitor profile Monitor profiles are used to simulate and verify color accuracy on a computer screen This is known as soft proofing However in the same way that the color output of each printer can vary greatly so each monitor displays color slightly differently To overcome this problem it is important that the monitor is regularly calibrated to a certain standard CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES TO CREATE A MONITOR PROFILE 1 Start Color Tools and click Create Monitor Profile Welcome Creating a monitor profile has never been easier Easy Use native settings Advanced Choose the luminance gamma and white point settings that most dosely match your viewing conditions Luminance Native Gamma Native White point Native Click Next to measure patches 2 Click the Info button and follow the on screen instructions to complete your monitor profile When you have created your monitor profile you can select it in Fiery XF For more information see Monitor profiles on page 146 Profile Connector You can use Profile Connector to connect a
95. software DVD into the DVD ROM drive 2 Double click the drive icon to mount the DVD 3 Open the Uninstallers folder and double click the program that you want to uninstall To remove Fiery XF you must also uninstall Color Profiler Suite 4 Follow the on screen instructions to complete the procedure After uninstalling make sure that you restart your computer before reinstalling the software GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 382 This glossary gives a brief explanation of the terms used in this manual Base linearization Printers do not work in a linear fashion and achieve their maximum color density at approximately 50 As a result test charts for creating profiles do not have differentiated color patches for the upper chromatic values A base linearization makes the density curve of the printer linear input value output value thus creating an important basis for ICC compatible color management Color temperatur of 6 774 Kelvin which corresponds to daylight Calibration set The calibration set defines a set of print conditions and ensures that the printer s behavior is adjusted optimally to the media Chromaticness difference CIELAB CIELCH See Delta Ch A color model that is based on the model proposed by the Commission Internationale d Eclairage CIE in 1931 as an international standard for color measurement In 1976 this model was refined and named CIELAB L a b color is designed to be device independent and perceptua
96. space of the selected printer Make the required color adjustments by editing the color values Save your changes You can also edit spot color tables in Color Editor To open the selected spot color table click Color Editor For more information see Color Editor on page 276 Outputting undefined spot colors If you load a job with undefined spot colors the job is displayed as a gray box in the preview window Job processing is aborted with an error message If you want to output jobs without first defining unknown spot colors you can replace all unknown spot colors with a warning color that is easily recognizable in the printout TO PRINT JOBS WITH UNKNOWN SPOT COLORS 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Colors tab open the Spot Colors pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job that contains unknown spot colors On the Colors tab open the Spot Colors pane 2 Under Print unknown spot colors select the check box The default warning color is orange but you can define your own warning color by typing new CMYK values in the appropriate boxes You can reselect the default warning color by clicking Reset 3 Save your changes SPOT COLORS Excluding spot colors from the job You can exclude spot colors from the job The advantages of excluding spot colors are e You can print each color as a separated file e You can print jobs wi
97. sure that the data storage medium is connected to the computer if necessary Select the file and click Open Click Upload A message confirms that the file has been correctly uploaded Click OK THIRD PARTY MEDIA PROFILES THIRD PARTY MEDIA PROFILES You can implement third party media profiles in Fiery XF Third party CMYK 0G media profiles You can use any third party CMYK OG media profile in Fiery XF by connecting it to an existing base linearization file TO UPLOAD A THIRD PARTY CMYK OG MEDIA PROFILE 1 On the Tools menu click Fiery XF Uploader The Fiery XF Uploader dialog box appears 2 Click the Media Profiles tab R eow O Standard Files Media Profiles Choose a media profile and the corresponding printer linearization EPL file to upload Printer linearization EPL Upload Close 3 Under Media profile click Choose and browse to the third party media profile 4 Select the file and click Open 5 Under Printer linearization EPL click Choose and browse to the EFI Media Profiles folder For more information on the program structure of Fiery XF see Default folders on page 363 6 Open the folder for your printer and open the subfolder for the media type and resolution that most closely matches the properties of the third party media profile 7 Select the base linearization file and click Open THIRD PARTY MEDIA PROFILES 8 Clic
98. tab open the Media Configuration pane Under Ink type select the type of ink that you used to create the base linearization file Under Media name select the name of the media that you defined when you created the base linearization file Under Calibration set select the base linearization file If multiple files are available and you are unsure which to select click Catalog to view the file properties The correct base linearization file does not have a media profile connected to it Go to Job Explorer Load the profiling chart from the third party software in the Linearization workflow and print the chart The job is printed with the base linearization file applied No color management is applied In the third party software measure the printed chart and go on to create a media profile The media profile that you create is based on the base linearization file Start Color Tools and click Profile Connector Connect the media profile with the base linearization file For more information see Profile Connector on page 158 The media profile is copied to the same folder as the base linearization file You can now select the media profile in Fiery XF For more information see To select a media profile on page 137 MAKING COLOR ADJUSTMENTS MAKING COLOR ADJUSTMENTS Tweeking job colors If you have a license for the Production Option easy to use color adjustment tools are available to help
99. the PS EPS PDF pane 2 Clear Stop job processing if font is missing 3 Save your changes Loading multi page jobs as single pages By default multi page PDF files are loaded in Fiery XF as single jobs If you make changes the job settings are applied to all pages However you may not always achieve the desired result For example if you crop an area of one page the setting is applied to all pages Similar problems can also arise if you apply crop marks to a PDF that contains pages of different sizes You can overcome potential problems by loading each page separately TO LOAD MULTI PAGE JOBS AS SINGLE PAGES 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane 2 Select Divide multi page PDF files into single page jobs 3 Save your changes TIFF IT AND SCITEX JOBS TIFF IT AND SCITEX JOBS TIFF IT and Scitex CT LW jobs are composed of a CT image data an LW text data file and possibly a final page Settings are available to ensure that the files are all detected as being part of the same job TO ENSURE THAT TIFF IT FILES AND SCITEX FILES ARE DETECTED CORRECTLY 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the File tab open the TIFF IT Scitex CT LW pane 2 Under Give priority to select an item If you give priority to TIFF IT files Fiery XF waits until both files are detected before processing the job
100. the measurements lie outside the specified range of tolerance Verifier indicates a result of Not passed Pointing the mouse in the Results area highlights the corresponding color patch in the tables Results Delta E DeltaH DeltaT DeltaCh DeltaL Delta E Tolerance Measured Average all patches 3 00 0 16 Maximum all patches 6 00 0 36 Delta H Maximum CMYK patches 2 50 0 11 Average Gray patches 2 50 0 16 Delta T tone value difference Maximum CMYK patches 10 00 0 24 PASSED A green check mark indicates that the overall measurement is within the tolerance limit A red cross warns you if a measurement exceeded the maximum tolerance values The remaining tabs contain a detailed breakdown of the results The number of tabs depends on the tolerance limits that you defined For example if you selected an ISO 12647 7 media wedge or G7 delta T values are not evaluated Results Delta E Delta H i Delta T Delta Ch Delta L Primary color maximum delta E Average outer gamut patches Tolerance Measured Tolerance Measured Cyan 5 00 0 17 v E J Magenta 5 00 0 07 U Yellow 5 00 0 11 Black 5 00 0 29 Y T White 3 00 0 12 CMYK 5 00 0 16 Y Delta E table You can use the drop down list box in the table heading to display the color deviation in delta E delta H delta T or delta Ch depending on the selected reference VERIFIER 324 e Sorting reference data If you have
101. to a different folder if you do not want to use the default folder e Click IP address to submit the cut contour files directly to a Z nd Cut Center Type the IP address of the Ziind Cut Center Then type the IP port The IP port could be 50000 For more information see the Ziind Cut Center documentation You can check whether the connection to the Ziind Cut Center has been properly established by clicking Test To test the connection the ZCC software must be started If you receive an error message contact your system administrator for advice A zcc file is created during job processing 8J 8 Under Contour cutting click Extract contour path from EPS PDF If you do not extract the contour path from EPS PDF jobs or if the job does not contain a contour path the bounding box is automatically used as the cut contour 13 14 CUTTING OPTIONS Define non default cut contours optional If your jobs regularly contain cut contours that are saved under a non default name you can define them here The cut contours you define in System Manager are automatically applied to all workflows e Under the table click Add A new row is added to the contour colors table e In the Contour source column overwrite Enter spot color name with the exact name of the cut contour from the graphics program Then press lt Enter gt In the Method column double click the selected item Then cl
102. to define a 100 colorant and gradients or to measure the white point of a media Click Settings to make device specific settings e Light conditions Define how spectrophotometric values are converted to L a b Select a light illuminant source D 50 horizon light D 65 artificial daylight at noon and C daylight Select an observer angle Two degrees is the default setting but the larger viewing angle of ten degrees is sometimes used in the packaging or textile industry e Monitor profile Monitor profiles are used to simulate and verify color accuracy on a computer screen Windows and Macintosh computers provide standard monitor profiles as part of the operating system software You can select a monitor profile that is provided with the operating system or you can select a custom monitor profile To select a custom monitor profile click Choose and browse to the profile COLOR EDITOR Gradation tab If you have a spot color with different gradients and find that one gradient is too bright or too pale in the printout you can modify the brightness by adding or subtracting color along the gradation curve To modify a point along the curve drag the point upward to add color or downward to subtract color Alternatively you can type the required coordinates directly in the table Adding spot colors in Color Editor This section describes the basic procedure for defining spot colors in Color Editor For more specifi
103. to other content jobs FOOTER FOOTER 128 You can output a footer at the bottom of each page or sheet A footer can contain e A job ticket with information pertinent to the job It tells you what settings were applied to achieve the print result e Up to two control strips or media wedges You can use control strips and media wedges to check the color consistency of proofing jobs a me ra By default the job ticket is printed on the left of the footer with one or two control strips on the right next to it Job ticket and control strips are automatically placed on separate lines for all nested jobs or if the sheet is not wide enough Job ticket FOOTER 129 The job ticket can consist of an image and up to six lines of text TO CREATE A JOB TICKET 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job To create a job ticket for a nesting click the nesting job not a nested page On the Layout tab open the Job Ticket pane On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings Select Job Ticket for Page or Job Ticket for Nesting e For single jobs select Job Ticket for Page e For nestings select Job Ticket for Nesting to create a job ticket for the whole nesting Select Job Ticket for Page to create a job ticket for each page of the nesting A nesting can have both types of job tick
104. two colors in the L a b color space For more information see Glossary on page 382 1 Select a tolerancing system for measuring color deviation Do one of the following e On the View menu point to Delta E format and click an item e Right click anywhere in the delta E table and click an item You can choose between dE CIE L a b dE CMC dE 94 and dE 2000 For more information on the available color spaces see Glossary on page 382 TO SPECIFY THE LIGHT SOURCE AND OBSERVER ANGLE FOR SPECTRAL DATA CONVERSION Different light sources make colors appear differently To convert spectral data to the L a b color space Verifier takes the light illuminant setting and the observer angle into account 1 Open the Preferences dialog box and click the General tab For more information see To open the Preferences dialog box on page 315 2 Under General click the required light source for spectral data conversion D 50 5003 K is the international norm for horizon sunlight on a clear morning evening D 65 6504 K represents midday light noon and C 6774 K stands for average daylight but excludes ultraviolet radiation 3 Under General click the required observer angle for spectral data conversion The angle of view affects the color sensitivity of the eye Colors are perceived most precisely if they strike the area of the fovea in the eye which is most sensitive to color The standard viewing angle is 2
105. up down Scroll to top bottom of sheet lt Home gt lt End gt Scroll to left right edge of sheet lt Shift gt lt Home gt lt End gt GETTING TO KNOW FIERY XF Nesting jobs Function Key combination Select all jobs lt Ctrl gt lt A gt e lt Apple lt A gt Add page to selection lt Shift gt click on page Select jobs in a cropped area Mouse click and drag lasso Remove page from selection lt Shift gt click on page Move selected pages Drag cursor to clipboard unplace page Remove selected page s and copy e lt Ctrl gt lt X gt e Apple lt X gt Delete selected page s lt Ctrl gt lt Backspace gt Copy selected page s e lt Ctrl gt lt C gt e lt Apple gt lt C gt Paste selected page s from the clipboard e lt Ctrl gt lt V gt e lt Apple gt lt V gt Refresh nesting e lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt lt R gt e lt Apple gt lt Alt gt lt R gt Add sheet e lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt lt gt e lt Apple gt lt Alt gt lt gt Lock page e lt Ctrl gt lt L gt e lt Apple gt lt L gt Unlock page e lt Cul gt lt Alt gt lt L gt e lt Apple gt lt Alt gt lt L gt Zoom Function Key combination Zoom in out e lt Ctrl gt 4 lt gt lt gt e lt Apple gt lt gt lt gt e lt Alt gt Scroll wheel Fit sheet to window e lt Ctrl gt lt 0 gt e lt Apple gt lt 0 gt
106. wedge you can define only general delta E tolerances Other values are not permitted due to the unique composition of color patches for each job VERIFIER e Custom tolerances 320 You can define your own tolerance limits house standard Custom tolerances provide also an easy way to adapt quickly to the latest norms The Normative and Informative buttons affect job verification as follows Predefined preset Normative Description Normative values are evaluated If any of the measurements lie outside the specified range of tolerance Verifier will indicate that the result is not satisfactory and the job will fail the verification Informative Informative values are evaluated for reference purposes only and have no effect on whether the job passes or fails the verification Only normative tolerances are taken into account It means that a job can be successfully verified even if an informative value exceeds the defined tolerance limits Off If you select Off the tolerance limit is not evaluated and it is not included in the evaluation When you have defined the required tolerance limits you can save them as a preset Click Save and define a unique name You can transfer custom tolerance presets to Fiery XF and apply them to any verify workflow To make a preset available in Fiery XF select Show preset in Fiery XF client To create a preset for a dynamic wedge select Use for
107. workflow Then connect the workflow to the output device Users workflows and output devices must be visibly joined by a black line You can connect a user to an unlimited number of workflows but a workflow can be connected to only one output device Drag the mouse from the margin area of an object user workflow or output device across to the second object Make sure to drag from the margin area If you drag from the center it rearranges the order in which objects are displayed Connecting objects in a system gt enaa oana bens configuration 1 Margin area SETTING SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS ONLINE OFFLINE You can also use the following menu items Action Description To connect one user to e In the layout area right click a user point to Connected one workflow Workflows and click an item that does not have a check mark next to it e In the layout area click a user On the Edit menu point to User point to Connected Workflows and click an item that does not have a check mark next to it In the layout area right click a workflow point to Connected Users and click an item that does not have a check mark next to it e In the layout area click a workflow On the Edit menu point to Workflow point to Connected Users and click an item that does not have a check mark next to it To connect one user toall In the layout area right click a user and click Connect to workflows All Wor
108. 1 Start your web browser type the IP address or the computer name of the Fiery XF server and press lt Enter gt Use the following syntax xx xxx xxx xxx or computername The View remote printers window appears and the virtual printer is displayed If the printer is not found make sure that it is correctly set up to be listed in the directory For more information see Setting up the virtual printer in Fiery XF on page 201 2 Double click the virtual printer You can now print to the virtual printer from your graphics program Be aware of the following Windows creates just one driver for either a 64 bit or for a 32 bit operating system If the Fiery XF server and the graphics program are installed on computers that are running Windows in different modes additional steps are necessary For more information see To set up a Fiery XF virtual printer on a mixture of Windows 64 bit and Windows 32 bit operating system on page 204 TO SET UP A CONNECTION TO A REMOTE FIERY XF VIRTUAL PRINTER DOES NOT REQUIRE INTERNET ACCESS If the Fiery XF server and the graphics program are installed on different computers you have to add the virtual printer as a new printer Perform the following steps on the computer on which the graphics program is installed Use this method if the computer that is running the graphics program does not have Internet access 1 Click Start click Devices and Printers and click Add a printer The Add Pr
109. A VUTEK PRINTER On the Connection pane complete your settings For more information on individual settings see the context sensitive help On the Media tab open the Print Configuration pane and complete your settings For more information on individual settings see the context sensitive help Fiery XF provides generic profiles for use with VUTEk printers However you can create your own profiles if preferred The Color Profiler Option provides a full set of tools with which to create media profiles Media profiles must be saved to the EFI Media Profiles folder For more information see Creating and optimizing profiles on page 147 On the Media tab open the Media Setting pane and complete your settings For more information on individual settings see the context sensitive help On the Special tab open the Special Printer Settings pane Select Print head control bar optional A control bar is made up of stripes for each of the available printer inks By printing a control bar with each job it ensures that ink keeps flowing through all the ink nozzles and thus helps to prevent blockages Settings are available for defining the appearance of the control bar and its position in relation to the job Under Resolution select a resolution You can specify a printer resolution The bigger the job that you are printing the fewer ink droplets per inch you need because the printed image will be viewed from a g
110. ANTONE PROCESS BLUEC Internal PANTONE GREEN C Internal DANTONE mare r Internal Untitled 2 Colors C p SSS m J Cleat Alias 4 In the table select the spot color for which you want to create an alias You can select an existing custom spot color or a spot color from the internal spot color library To search for a spot color type the name of the spot color in the Search box The Search box has a filter function that ensures that only the spot colors that meet the search criterion are displayed Click Use Selection The color values of the original spot color are transferred to the alias Any additional changes that you make to the original spot color are automatically applied to the alias also To remove the link to an alias spot color click Clear Alias If you remove the alias the spot color receives the default color values of a new spot color COLOR EDITOR Assigning a spot color to a printer ink channel If your printer supports white ink clear ink or metallic inks you can assign any of these additional printer inks in addition to the original spot color definition The additional inks are printed either behind or on top of the original spot color This feature enables you to create many interesting special effects particularly if your printer supports multi pass multi layer printing Be aware that to create such special effects printer specific settings are
111. By default a job is verified as color accurate only if all color measurements are within the defined tolerance limits However by enabling measurement approval in Verifier you can gain full control over whether a job passes or fails verification For example you can force a pass result if some delta E values are marginally exceeded For more information see To set up Verifier on page 316 If a job fails verification you may be able to improve on the result by performing a job specific optimization This process optimizes the job s color management by creating a correction profile that is a better match for the color gamut of the simulation reference profile Afterwards you must reprint the job and repeat the verify procedure VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY IN A FIERY XF WORKFLOW It is not possible to optimize jobs if any of the following have been applied e Color adjustments e Clean colors e Perceptual or Saturated rendering intent e Dynamic rendering intent 9 Click Optimize and reprint the job The Optimize button optimizes one control strip only If your job has two control strips and you want to optimize them simultaneously right click the job in the job list and click Optimize And Print 10 Repeat the verification procedure until no further optimization is possible Achieving an ISO 12647 7 compliant proof To achieve an ISO 12647 7 compliant proof the following requirements must be met The workflow must be se
112. By displaying page borders you can check ifa page has white space around it that is overlapping other pages in a nesting x 133 36 cm y 27 55 cm JOB LIST AND PREVIEW WINDOW Overlaps You can display pages that are overlapping the sheet border or overlapping other pages Overlapping pages are displayed with a red border JOB LIST AND PREVIEW WINDOW Sheet margins You can display the non printable margins as defined by the printer s firmware By ensuring that pages are placed within the non printable margins you can avoid unwanted cropping in the printout EDITING JOBS EDITING JOBS The preview window displays the image of the job that is selected in the job list You can make manual changes to a job before printing If the workflow is not set up to create job previews automatically jobs are displayed as a gray box in the preview window In this case you must to activate the preview before you can make manual job changes For more information see Activating the preview on page 72 Depending on the workflow settings job processing may start automatically as soon as the job is loaded in the job list The following options are available to you to stop the job from being unnecessarily processed and printed before you have made changes You can cancel job processing For more information see To cancel job processing on page 33 You can load jobs as hold jobs For more inf
113. Copyright EFI 2006 2013 This manual may not be copied or reproduced in any form whether by printing photocopying or any other method of reproduction without written permission EFI accepts no liability with regard to the use of this program or any errors or omissions in this manual The information in this manual represents the state of the software at the time of printing EFI reserves the right to make technical changes at any time The products named in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers Acrobat Adobe and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries HKS is a registered trademark of HKS Trademark Association PANTONE is a registered trademark of Pantone Inc Additional third party copyrights and notices Portions Copyright c 1990 1994 Regents of The University of Michigan All Rights Reserved Portions Copyright c 1983 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation an
114. E Color space f Joblist Preview 1 job to verity L a b M1 M2 L a b AE Jobs to measure 5500 37 00 50 00 1 E g admin Number of Jobs 1 6686 2473 37 10 2 gt 0085 15012647_7_Evaluatic 1 aa i je 3 7a72 1253 2175 B3 4 eres 578 11 80 4 5 948 29 69 5 g Em E 7 al 3 4800 74 00 300 60 84 5059 6 74 76 42 2578 8 amp 9 8 8618 120 521 3 10 967 590 386 1 es00 500 93 00 m 12 9034 470 6256 i2 13 19219 1947 ES 13 14 9362 162 1327 9434 094 542 Measure Open tomai aM i r Layout FOGRA39_MKCheck11 t8 Mise Edit Method 1S0 12647 7 Contract Proof Media Wedge Bs oa Madea Fiesuts Deta E Deta H Measurement 1 Measurement 2 Name FOGRA39_MKCheck11 it8 Name Delta E Tolerance Measured Protocol 12 17 2009 Protocol Average all patches 3 00 Time 14 57 24 Time Maximum all patches 6 00 m Info text Info text DeltaH No patches 72 No patches Maximum CMYK patches 2 50 Average Gray patches 1 50 Printer Epson Stylus Pro 9900 9910 P Reference profile ISOcoated_v2_eciicc Time after print Rens device 7 min 39 sec E Feew Ca Logged in succesfully to localhost Measuring method Multi Measuring device EFIES 1000 Ugra Fogra MediaWedge V3 0 ES10
115. FI XF Fiery XF Printer Click Start point to Devices and Printers and click Add a printer The Add Printer dialog box appears Click Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer and click Next Click The printer that I want isn t listed and click Next Select Select a shared printer by name and type the IP address or the computer name of the Fiery XF server computer followed by the name of the virtual printer Use the following synatx xxx xxx xxx xxx virtualprintername or computernamel virtualprintername If you do not know the computer name you can search for it on the computer that is running the Fiery XF server Click Start right click Computer and click Properties Under Computer name domain and workgroup settings look for the computer name Then click Next When you are prompted to search for the driver click Browse browse to the modified inf file on your desktop and click Open Continue to follow the on screen instructions to complete the procedure Printing from Macintosh to a Fiery XF Macintosh server Perform the following steps on the computer on which the graphics program is installed TO SET UP A CONNECTION TO A LOCAL FIERY XF VIRTUAL PRINTER In Macintosh OS X Fiery XF automatically creates a shared printer that can be used like any other shared printer No further steps are necessary and you can now print to the virtual printer from your graphics program For more inform
116. FIERY XF WORKFLOW Reference profile Characterization data PSO_Coated_NPscreen_ISO12647_eci icc Fogra 43 PSO_Uncoated_NPscreen_ISO12647_eci icc Fogra 44 PSO_LWC_Improved_eci icc Fogra 45 PSO_LWC_Standard_eci icc Fogra 46 PSO_Uncoated_ISO12647_eci icc Fogra 47 PSR_LWC_PLUS_V2_PTiicc PSR_LWC_PLUS_V2 PSR_LWC_STD_V2_PTiicc PSR_LWC_STD_V2 PSRgravureME icc PSRgravureMF PSR_SC_STD_V2_PT ice PSR_SC_STD_V2 PSR_SC_PLUS_V2_PT PSR2_SC_PLUS_V2 ISOnewspaper26v4 icc IFRA26 PaC Space_CMYK_gravure_V la icc PaC Space GRACoL_2006_Coated1v2 icc GRACoLCoated1_ISO12647 7_ ControlStrip2009_Ref SWOP2006_Coated3v2 icc SWOPCoated3_ISO12647 7_ ControlStrip2009_Ref SWOP2006_Coated5v2 icc SWOPCoated5_ISO12647 7_ ControlStrip2009_Ref EFIJMPA3 EFIJMPA3 JapanColor2011Coated JapanColor Open measurement file You can verify the color output of a job by using as a reference the color values from a measurement file A measurement file is saved in a remote container RPF and contains the color measurement results of the job from an earlier verification Thus remote containers provide an easy way to check the color accuracy of a job that is printed at different sites For more information see Verifying color consistency across sites on page 337 If the remote container has been created without a measurement file the refere
117. FOOTER 128 Job ticket 129 Control strips and media wedges 130 Footer layout 133 SELECTING PROFILES AND RENDERING INTENTS 136 Media profiles 137 Source profiles and simulation reference profiles 138 Rendering intents 141 Device link profiles 144 Monitor profiles 146 CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES 147 The system configuration 147 Setting up the linearization device 148 Starting Color Tools 148 General tips 150 Creating or editing a base linearization file 150 Creating a media profile 152 Optimizing a media profile 153 Creating a device link profile 155 Creating a simulation reference profile 156 Creating a monitor profile 157 Profile Connector 158 Editing a profile 159 Inspecting a profile 160 Relinearizing the printer 161 Performing visual color corrections 163 Modifying plate characteristics 164 UPDATING FIERY XF AND MEDIA PROFILES 166 Updating Fiery XF 166 Updating media profiles 168 Uploading standard Fiery XF files from an external source 168 THIRD PARTY MEDIA PROFILES 170 Third party CMYK 0G media profiles 170 Third party RGB media profiles 171 Creating a media profile using third party profiling software 174 MAKING COLOR ADJUSTMENTS 175 Tweeking job colors 175 Removing color impurities 176 Black ink 176 Process and secondary colors 176 Converting to grayscale 178 Creating a color negative 178 LOADING AND PRINTING A JOB 179 Load
118. Fiery XF ppd on the DVD and click Open The PPD is located in the Fiery Tools folder Click Add to add the Fiery XF printer to the list of available printers Occasionally problems arise when you try and print to the Fiery XF virtual printer that is located in a different subnet Although the virtual printer can be selected in the graphics program the jobs are not loaded in Fiery XF For more information see To print to a Fiery XF Macintosh server in a different subnet on page 210 Printing from Windows to a Fiery XF Macintosh server Perform the following steps on the computer on which the graphics program is installed TO SET UP A CONNECTION TO A REMOTE FIERY XF VIRTUAL PRINTER If the Fiery XF server and the graphics program are installed on different computers you have to add the virtual printer as a new printer Perform the following steps on the computer on which the graphics program is installed Use this method if the computer that is running the graphics program does not have Internet access 1 Click Start click Devices and Printers and click Add a printer The Add Printer dialog box appears 2 Select Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer Alist of available printers is displayed 3 If the virtual printer is not listed select The printer that I want isn t listed A dialog box for finding a printer by name or by TCP IP address appears PRINTING THROUGH A VIRTUAL PRINTER 4 Select Select a
119. IIl The color values of the selected reference are displayed in the left hand table VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY IN A FIERY XF WORKFLOW 6 Follow the on screen instructions to measure the printed control strip The measured readings are displayed in the right hand table The results of the comparison are displayed in the Results area File View Help Show in color space 7 Show in color space Ld a 55 00 37 00 66 86 24 73 7972 1253 87 68 5 78 9 48 297 48 00 74 00 60 84 50 59 76 42 2578 86 18 120 5 21 jio 3067 590 3 86 89 00 5 00 93 00 90 34 4 70 62 56 9219 347 3115 93 62 1 62 13 27 94 34 0 94 5 42 L Ja 5481 3812 66 34 24 74 7329 1243 8643 1619 8935 311 4705 7306 5942 51 44 7518 2387 84 66 11 29 80 54 87 23 682 ese 611 30 04 383 943 1177 3206 11411 pggmgogggadgg HEI EERI aj 3 5 Measure Open Measure Comparison Info Layout FOGRA3S_MKCheck11 it8 Method XF Workflow Job Measurement 1 Name FOGRA3S_MKCheck11 it8 Protocol 12 17 2003 Time 14 57 24 Info text No patches 72 Printer Epson Stylus Pro 9900 9910 P Reference profile ISOcoated_v2_eciice Time after print Imin 4 sec Jobs to measure E SB admin Number of Jobs 1 gt 0069 1S012647_7_Evaluatic Send Measur
120. JDF connection to a VUTEKk printer Click Connect to set up the connection For more information see Printing to a VUTEk printer on page 215 and JDF integration on page 254 5 On the Media tab open the Print Configuration pane e Select the type of ink that is inserted in the printer e Select the name of the media that you are going to use Fiery XF provides media profiles that have been created for specific combinations of media ink and resolution Furthermore you can implement your own custom media profiles that have been created for your exact printer For more information see Third party media profiles on page 170 e Select a calibration set The calibration set defines a set of print conditions and ensures that the printer s behavior is adjusted optimally to the media Click Catalog to view the print conditions under which each available calibration set was created When you select a media type ink type and calibration set Fiery XF automatically selects the correct media profile for that combination of settings 6 On the Media tab open the Media Setting pane and make media specific settings Select the source of the media roll or sheet Then select the media format Alternatively define a custom size by entering the required dimensions 7 On the Special tab open the Special Printer Settings pane and make printer specific settings optional CREATING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 8 Assign a color
121. Method column double click the selected item Then click the down arrow and click a different cutting method optional Alternatively click User defined to define a custom cutting method If your jobs are often created with different cut contour names you can select them on a job to job basis in Job Explorer For more information see Managing cut contours on page 240 If you work regularly with different types of cut marks it is a good idea to save each group of settings as a preset A preset is a template for a group of settings that are saved under a unique name You can create presets in the pane bar menu The next time you set up cut marks you need only to select the preset name Save your changes Ziind Cut Center The Ziind Cut Center enables you to save more than one cutting path per job When working with the Ziind Cut Center the software dynamically guides you through the cutting process by continually offering best choices that are based on the available cutting tools the material to be cut and quality requirements To SET UP A ZUND CUT CENTER 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow The workflow template Zund Cut Server Connectivity is provided for production applications to help you to set up a workflow for jobs with i cut level cut marks On the Finishing tab open the Cut pane On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings Under Device manufacturer
122. O A FIERY OUTPUT DEVICE PRINTING TO A FIERY OUTPUT DEVICE If you have a license for the Fiery Option you can set up a maximum of five Fiery output devices in Fiery XF It is recommended that you do not perform any job settings at the Fiery Command WorkStation If you make job specific settings at the Fiery Command WorkStation the color management settings from the Fiery Command WorkStation are applied on top of the color management settings from Fiery XF The result is non accurate color output TO SET UP A FIERY OUTPUT DEVICE 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the output device On the Device tab open the Information pane 2 Under Manufacturer select EFI 3 Under Device type select EFI Fiery Fiery XF provides a generic media profile for the Fiery Option However to achieve high quality results it is recommended that you create your own media profiles To create media profiles you require a license for the Color Profiler Option When you define a name for a custom media profile in Color Profiler Suite it is important to ensure that the device is easily identifiable in the name The reason for this is that all Fiery output devices are selected as EFI Fiery on the Setup pane Therefore when you select EFI Fiery the media profiles for all Fiery devices are displayed on the Media pane If you do not want to print directly to a Fiery output device you can save your jobs to PDF
123. O On O You may not have enough valid output licenses Bear in mind that your software may have been shipped with a 30 day license that allows you to set up a connection to up to ten output devices A standard permanent license includes one output option for a medium sized printer up to 18 inches wide To check whether you have enough output licenses proceed as follows Go to System Manager In the layout area disconnect all output devices from all workflows Then click the linearization device On the Device tab open the Information pane Under Manufacturer select Select a manufacturer Save the settings for the linearization device Connect one output device to one workflow In Job Explorer try and load a job If you are still not able to load a job ensure that the amount of used disk space does not exceed 95 If necessary free up additional space on the hard disk During job processing a bco file is created in the default Output folder You can reduce the amount of hard disk space that Fiery XF requires during job processing by defining a different folder as follows Stop the Fiery XF server In the Server folder open the Tickets folder In a text editor open the sys_0000 xml file Search for the line that begins lt Print type and type in a new path The dongle may have become unplugged from the computer while the server is still running Make sure that the dongle is properly inserted
124. Property inspector customizing 30 Q Quality job 358 R Reference data random 324 Relinearization 161 Remote container contents 337 creating 337 Rendering intents 141 selecting 140 Resetting jobs 33 RIP and print on the fly 353 359 RIP resolution 353 359 Rotating jobs 85 S Saving changes 32 Scaling jobs 86 Scitex jobs 103 Scope of delivery 14 394 Screen angles changing 351 custom 349 predefined 348 Screening files creating 348 implementing 350 Screening methods 344 Secondary colors removing impure color 176 Separated jobs 104 Separations job detection 95 Setting up job merge 125 nestings 106 output device printer 57 step and repeat 122 system configuration 48 tilings 116 user 55 virtual printer 201 workflow 56 Sheet margins 84 size 33 Simulation reference profiles creating 156 editing 159 selecting 138 Source profiles embedded 138 forcing the use of 273 multicolor applying 273 selecting 138 Speed job 352 Spot color table applying to workflows 299 deleting 275 editing 270 new 296 opening 297 selecting 269 299 Spot colors adding 266 283 alias creating 268 285 converting to printer color space 294 cut contours 240 defining 265 283 editing 270 excluding from job 272 gamut check 290 gradients 283 289 importing 298 ink sequence 272 internal library 267 275 283 light conditions 282 manufacturers of supported 267 mapping to another spot color 268 285 opt
125. Screening fle none elect Media profie Optimization method TX_540_F4D_FlagCoated icc Create new L a b correction profile gt L a b correction profile Select Paper white settings Default Absolute colormetric x Optimization control The optimization will be done automatically for a cyde count of The optimization will be stopped at a dE average of 2 cles plus one control printout L5 3 Click the Info button and follow the on screen instructions to optimize your media profile You can save your L a b optimization at any time and complete it at a later date On the File menu click Save Optimizing Job To complete an unfinished L a b optimization see To edit an L a b optimization on page 154 You can apply the L a b optimization to the media profile during the final optimization step If you do not want to apply the L a b optimization by default you can select it at any time in Fiery XF For more information see To select an L a b optimization in Fiery XF on page 155 To EDIT AN L A B OPTIMIZATION You can complete an unfinished L a b optimization 1 Connect your measuring device 2 Start Color Tools and click Optimize Profile CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES 3 Do one of the following On the File menu click Load Optimizing Job browse to the optimizing job and click Open Use this setting to load an unfinished optimizing job and continue from where you left off
126. TART THE FIERY XF CLIENT 1 Do one of the following e In Windows double click the program icon on the desktop On Macintosh click the program icon in the Dock a A e Right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Fiery XF Client Start e In Windows click the Start button point to All Programs click EFI click Fiery XF and then click Fiery XF Client STARTING FIERY XF If an error message appears make sure that a valid license is installed For more information see Licensing on page 40 Logging on to a Fiery XF server If a Fiery XF server and client are installed on the same computer the Fiery XF client automatically logs on to that server as the default administrator when you start the software for the first time If the Fiery XF server and client are installed on different computer the Login dialog box appears User name Password Server IP Address The Login dialog box appears also if any of the following apply e The Fiery XF server is not running For more information see Starting the Fiery XF server on page 22 e The dongle is not correctly inserted e The software license cannot be detected For more information see Licensing on page 40 and License problems on page 372 e The previous user logged off when exiting Fiery XF STARTING FIERY XF e The firewall settings are not correctly configured If a firewall is in use in your network make sure that it is c
127. TO LOG ON TO A FIERY XF SERVER Fiery XF is installed with two default users e The user admin password admin is permitted to create set up and manage system configurations in System Manager A minimum system configuration consists one user one workflow and one output device e The user guest password guest is permitted to print and manage his or her own jobs but does not have access to System Manager 1 In the Login dialog box enter a user name and a password If you are starting Fiery XF for the first time log on as the default administrator Logging on as the default administrator enables you to create and set up system configurations If you have previously been set up as a user in Fiery XF you can log on with your own login credentials STARTING FIERY XF 2 Select or type the IP address of the Fiery XF server computer A list of all available Fiery XF servers in the sub network is displayed with their IP address in the drop down list box The Login dialog box appears also if the previous user logged off at the end of the last session If the Fiery XF server and client are installed on the same computer you can enter localhost instead of an IP address Entering localhost is the same as using the IP address 127 0 0 1 3 Click OK The Fiery XF client starts The connected server is displayed at the bottom of the program window Each time you start Fiery XF the client logs on to th
128. TONE 234 C Cut Standard PANTONE 254 C Cut Standard standard YSVNVNNNSN The scissor icon indicates which cut contours will be extracted CUTTING OPTIONS Processing cut contours TO EXCLUDE CUT CONTOURS FROM THE OUTPUT Before printing cut contours check the following e Make sure that in RIP separation is set to Force By forcing in RIP separation you ensure that cut contours are output as separated files For more information see In RIP separation on page 96 e Make sure that the working color space is set to CMYK The RGB working color space converts all spot colors to RGB which prevents the cut contour from being extracted For more information see Applying a working color space on page 99 If you have a license for the Advanced Layout Option you can often reduce media consumption considerably The Advanced Layout Option is a tool with advanced nesting features that take specific job shapes into consideration by nesting jobs according to their contours You can also use the Advanced Layout Option to create cut contours For more information see Advanced Layout on page 248 TO OUTPUT JOBS WITH CUT CONTOURS 1 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job 2 Do one of the following e On the toolbar click Print amp Cut e In the job list right click the job in the job list and click Print amp Cut You can exclude cut contours from a job by ensuring that no cut f
129. TTING TO KNOW FIERY XF e Print to file jobs If you have an appropriate license you can create a print file for an output device that supports different media sizes 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Layout tab open the Virtual Sheet Size pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Layout tab open the Virtual Sheet Size pane 2 Under Sheet size select a sheet size Alternatively select Custom Size and enter the required width and height in the boxes 3 Save your changes TO CREATE A CUSTOM WORKFLOW TEMPLATE Fiery XF provides many default workflow templates Each has been set up with color management settings for a particular workflow scenario such as pre press print production photo printing or contour cutting You can modify the settings from a default template to suit your exact requirements and save them as a custom template Saving workflow settings as a custom template makes it easy to create multiple workflows with the same settings You have to set up identical workflows to print to multiple printers This is necessary since each workflow can be connected to only one printer When you have set up your workflow do the following 1 Go to System Manager In the Layout area click the workflow 2 On the File menu click Save as Template The Save as Template dialog box appears 3 Define a unique name and cli
130. The only prerequisite is that you must use the same measuring device When you have printed the first chart click Import Data Use this setting to load measurement values that were obtained with a third party program The existing measurement values are used as the basis for creating an L a b optimization You can use any measuring device except one that is embedded in the printer 4 Click the Info button and follow the on screen instructions to optimize your media profile You can apply the L a b optimization to the media profile during the final optimization step If you do not want to apply the L a b optimization by default you can select it at any time in Fiery XF For more information see To select an L a b optimization in Fiery XF on page 155 TO SELECT AN L A B OPTIMIZATION IN FIERY XF L a b optimizations must be located in the Profiles Balance folder in order to be selected in Fiery XF If necessary copy the L a b optimization file to the Balance folder before proceeding with the following steps 1 Do one of the following Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Color tab open the Color Management pane Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Color tab open the Color Management pane 2 Under L a b optimization select the L a b optimization 3 Save your changes Creating a device link profile A device link profile combines a sourc
131. Unidriver has the following advantages e You can print to more than one Fiery XF workflow e You can make custom settings that override the equivalent workflow settings in Fiery XF Custom settings can be applied to all jobs including jobs that you submit from other graphics programs You can install Unidriver on an unlimited number of computers Windows This section provides instructions on how to install set up and print through Unidriver for Windows TO INSTALL UNIDRIVER If Unidriver is already installed on one computer you can copy the program files to another computer By default Unidriver is installed in the folder EFI Fiery Unidriver Copy the EFI Unidriver folder to the desktop of another computer Then double click the PrinterInstaller application file and follow the on screen instructions If Unidriver is not already installed on another computer you can install it from the installation DVD as described below 1 Insert the installation DVD into the DVD ROM drive of the computer on which the graphics program is installed The Welcome screen appears 2 Click Fiery Tools and open the UniDriver folder 3 Double click the Install EFI Unidriver application and follow the on screen instructions To SET UP UNIDRIVER Make sure that Fiery XF is running before you perform the following steps 1 Click Start and click Devices and Printers 2 Right click EFI Unidriver and click Printing preferences The EFI U
132. XF Control icon and click Fiery XF Server Stop 2 Right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Server File Maintenance The Server File Maintenance dialog box appears p Profile Folders Reference profile folder C ProgramData EFINEFI F Server Profiles Reference Media profile folder C A ProgramD ata EFI EF Media Profiles System Folders Job folder C ProgramD ata EFINEF XF Server obFolden Choose Output folder C A ProgramData EFI EF XF Server Output Choose Temporary foldet C ProgramDataXEFINEFLF Server T emp Choose 3 Click the appropriate Choose button and browse to the new folder 4 Click OK CLEANING UP FIERY XF CLEANING UP FIERY XF Fiery XF creates different types of files during job processing Some files remain in the server program folders indefinitely after job completion so that an excessive volume of data can build up over time You can clean up Fiery XF by deleting the following types of files when they are no longer needed File type Description Source files For every job that you load in Fiery XF a source file is created in the Server JobFolder folder If you delete the source files the jobs themselves are not removed from the job list Output files An output file print file is created in the Server Output folder when you send a job to the printer Preview files If the preview function is activated a prev
133. a yellow and black to produce other colors Spot colors can be produced in a much more vibrant range of colors than can be created from mixing process colors As a result spot colors are often used to print company logos Many different manufacturers produce spot colors together with a set of swatch books with printed examples of the colors Fiery XF manages the spot colors of major spot color manufacturers in an internal spot color library These colors are automatically detected in Fiery XF If you load a job that contains a spot color whose name is not known in Fiery XF you must define it before the job can be correctly output To define and process jobs with spot colors you require the Spot Color Option Defining spot colors You can define spot colors In Job Explorer Job Explorer provides a quick and easy way to define spot colors for a job that is already loaded in Fiery XF e In Color Editor Color Editor is a comprehensive program for defining measuring and editing spot colors For more information see Color Editor on page 276 Defined spot colors are saved in a spot color table You can select a spot color table for a single P P g job or integrate it into a workflow SPOT COLORS TO DEFINE SPOT COLORS FOR A LOADED JOB If you load a job with undefined spot colors the job is displayed as a gray box in the preview window Job processing is aborted with an error message 1 Go to Job Explorer In the
134. a Wedge as well as the Chart presets are required Predefined preset Description ISO 12647 7 Contract Proof ISO 12647 7 contract proofing Media Wedge ISO 12647 8 Validation Print ISO 12647 8 FograCert validation print Media Wedge CD2 certification G7 ISO12647 7 Proofing System G7 compliant verification of proof jobs Dynamic wedge Verification of a job s key colors including spot colors ISO15311 2 FCR Side by Side Verification of conformance level A B or C of Level A Media Wedge FCR side by side as defined by ISO 15311 2 digital commercial proofing 1SO15311 2 FCR Side by Side Level B Media Wedge ISO15311 2 FCR Side by Side Level C Media Wedge 1SO15311 3 FCR Side by Side Verification of conformance level A B or C of Level A Media Wedge FCR side by side as defined by ISO 15311 3 large format signage printing 1SO15311 3 FCR Side by Side Level B Media Wedge ISO15311 3 FCR Side by Side Level C Media Wedge Note that delta T tolerances can be measured only for the primary colors for example 100 cyan or 50 magenta It is not possible to calculate delta T values for colors that are composed of a mixture of cyan magenta yellow and black Dynamic wedge A dynamic wedge is made up of the job s most prominent colors For example if a job is composed mainly of shades of blue the dynamic wedge will have a high proportion of blue patches For the dynamic
135. a base linearization file in Fiery XF 256 10 JDF jobs in Fiery XF 257 Viewing JDF job information 258 Adding content files 259 Editing JDF jobs in Fiery XF 260 BACKUP AND RESTORE 261 Backing up a system configuration 261 Saving an environment 263 SPOT COLORS 265 Defining spot colors 265 Selecting a spot color table 269 Editing spot color tables 270 Outputting undefined spot colors 271 Excluding spot colors from the job 272 Changing the sequence of inks 272 Changing the search order 273 Forcing the use of a source profile 273 PANTONE PLUS spot color library 275 Deleting a spot color table 275 COLOR EDITOR 276 Starting Color Editor 277 Preferences dialog box 279 Color Definition tab 281 Measurement and Display tab 282 Gradation tab 283 Adding spot colors in Color Editor 283 Creating aliases 285 11 Assigning a spot color to a printer ink channel 287 Adding color gradients 289 Checking the color accuracy of L a b spot colors 290 Converting L a b spot colors to the color space of the printer 294 Optimizing L a b spot colors 294 General operations in Color Editor 295 Creating a new spot color table 296 Opening a spot color table 297 Replacing spot color names 297 Importing spot colors 298 Applying spot color tables to Fiery XF workflows 299 VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY IN A FIERY XF WORKFLOW 301 Verify workflows in Fiery XF 301 Ac
136. a e e h d e Gus Vee nhvcutaws s TARANEE eee ie i agape aah eae ae ap ge ee er Reinet wtih dh pb Ee pects eet Image on a sheet Pages can be in any supported file format In a nesting multiple pages can be positioned on one sheet Portable Document Format A method of formatting documents in such a way that they can be viewed and printed on multiple platforms using the freely available Adobe Reader Print configuration set The print configuration set contains details of the base linearization file that is connected to the media profile Printer relinearization A process to re adjust the color densities and return the printer to the original state that was used to create the base linearization Quantity of color A process to define the maximum quantity of ink for each ink channel and so prevent colors from becoming oversaturated and bleeding Remote container The file format that is used to send the image file and settings from one location to another It is used mainly in conjunction with Verifier The remote container consists of a pdf file print file and a jdf file settings file which are compressed into a single file with the file extension RPE GLOSSARY RGB The additive color system that is used in digital cameras and computer monitors where red green and blue light is captured separately and then combined to create a full color image Separated jobs On a printing press each color of ink that is u
137. a mixture of Windows 64 bit and Windows 32 bit operating system on page 204 TO SET UP A FIERY XF VIRTUAL PRINTER ON A MIXTURE OF WINDOWS 64 BIT AND WINDOWS 32 BIT OPERATING SYSTEM After you have set up a connection to the remote virtual printer you need to perform the following additional steps if the Fiery XF server and the graphics program are installed on computers that are running Windows in different modes for example if the Fiery XF server is installed on a Windows 64 bit operating system and the graphics program is installed on a Windows 32 bit operating system 1 Do the following e On the computer with the Fiery XF server Click Start point to Devices and Printers right click the virtual printer and click Printer properties On the Advanced tab make a note of the driver name The default driver name is EFI XF Fiery XF Printer Click OK Copy the appropriate PPD folder from the Tools folder to the desktop of the computer that is running the graphics program For more information see Default folders on page 363 PRINTING THROUGH A VIRTUAL PRINTER e On the computer with the graphics program On the desktop open the PPD folder that you copied from the Fiery XF server computer In a text program open the EFI setup information file Under EFI overwrite the driver name so that it matches exactly the name that you made a note of For example overwrite EFI Colorproof XF with E
138. added to an existing JDF file The Save As dialog box appears 2 Select the JDF file and click Save The Add data to JDF dialog box appears i z Tan aT Measurement 1 _ Enable to save Measurement 2 iv Enable to save Comment T 3 Select the check box for one or both sets of measurement data 4 Click OK TO COPY MEASUREMENT DATA TO THE CLIPBOARD You can copy measurement results to the clipboard for insertion into a spreadsheet Color values can be copied in the displayed color space RGB L a b XYZ CIELCH or Density or as spectral data Spectral data is calculated directly at the measuring device and is not influenced by light conditions Spectral data can be used to calculate the equivalent L a b XYZ or Density values 1 Right click on the M1 or M2 table point to Copy to clipboard and click Table M1 M2 or Spectral data 2 Insert the data from the clipboard into a spreadsheet program TO LOAD MEASUREMENT DATA You can load measurement data in CSV TXT or JDF format VERIFIER 335 1 Do one of the following e Click Open There are two Open buttons one for the first set of measurement data M1 and one for the second set of measurement data M2 e On the File menu click Open M1 or Open M2 e Right click anywhere in one of the tables and click Load M1 or Load M2 2 Browse to the file and click Open The following dialog box appears The dialog box may look slightly different depe
139. age e Ink ink consumption e Printing time JDF INTEGRATION Adding content files You can add files to JDF containers that were submitted to Fiery XF either with no content files or with multiple content files It is not possible to add further content to JDF jobs that were created from just one content file To add content to JDF jobs use one of the following methods TO ADD A CONTENT FILE TO A JDF JOB 1 In the job list right click the JDF container and click Add Content File The Import Job dialog box appears You can add a file in any format that is supported in Fiery XF Content files that are added in Fiery XF are neither automatically placed nor are they arranged on the media 2 Browse to the job you want to add as content and click Open The job is added to the JDF container 3 In the job list for each content file click Placed If the Placed column is not displayed you can add it For more information see Customizing the job list on page 73 4 On the Layout tab open the Nesting pane 5 Click Apply to arrange the images on the sheet You can also add content files to a JDF job by assigning a JDF ticket TO ASSIGN A JDF TICKET In MIS controlled environments it is often desirable to track jobs regardless of how they are submitted to Fiery XF AJDF ticket is created for each JDF job that is loaded in Fiery XF However occasionally you may need to load a job by another means such a
140. age by adjusting the output dimensions Such inconsistencies can occur as a result of a particular combination of printer and media The file Lineal_01 ps is provided in the Samples folder to help you to adjust the size of the printed image It consists of a set of ruler markings for a length and width of 0 5 m x 0 5 m This setting is independent of the hardware setting that is available at the control panel of some printers TO ADJUST THE LENGTH OF PRINTED JOBS 1 Print out the file Lineal_01 ps and measure the length of the ruler markings If the measurement is not accurate you can compensate for the difference 2 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the output device On the Media tab open the Media Setting pane 3 Under Media size correction type the target length and the actual length 4 Save your changes You can also integrate the media length correction into the base linearization file For more information see Creating or editing a base linearization file on page 150 and Profile Connector on page 158 Simulating distinctive print characteristics You can simulate distinctive print characteristics that are associated with the following printing methods e Gravure printing You can simulate the effect that occurs in gravure printing when ink is not evenly transferred from the cylinder IMPROVING PRINT QUALITY Flexo printing You can define the smallest dot size to be printed
141. ages on the sheet on page 93 TO LOCK A PAGE You can lock a page in its current state and at its current position on the sheet By locking pages you can prevent them from being modified and from being rearranged when you update the preview 1 In the job list click the job 2 Inthe Locked column click the padlock icon If the Locked column is not displayed in the job list right click on any column heading and click Locked TILING TILING If you have a license for the Production Option you can use the tiling feature to print images that would normally exceed your printer s maximum print size Images are printed as tiles and can be pieced together later to produce an oversize poster or banner You can create tiles from single jobs from nestings and from step and repeats conor finnen wmo ioe mesa _ torona camag imtas omas eara See i as TO SET UP A TILING WORKFLOW 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Layout tab open the Tiling pane 2 On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings 3 On the Tiling pane complete your settings For more information on individual settings see the context sensitive help 4 Save the workflow When you load a job Fiery XF automatically creates a tiling according to the workflow settings TILING TO CREATE A MANUAL TILING 1 2 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click th
142. al image Save your changes SELECTING PROFILES AND RENDERING INTENTS Monitor profiles Monitor profiles are used to simulate and verify color accuracy on a computer screen This is known as soft proofing However in the same way that the color output of each printer can vary greatly so each monitor displays color slightly differently To overcome this problem it is important that the monitor is regularly calibrated to a certain standard Monitor calibration consists of two steps e Adjusting the brightness and control settings on the monitor itself to set values e Creating a monitor profile which defines the white point gamma and RGB phosphor settings Windows and Macintosh computers provide standard monitor profiles as part of the operating system software In Fiery XF you can select a monitor profile that you have created yourself or one that is provided with the operating system TO SELECT A MONITOR PROFILE 1 On the Edit menu click Monitor Profile The Monitor Profile dialog box appears r i E E None System Monitor Profile gt Custom Profile 2 Do one of the following e Click System Monitor Profile to select a monitor profile that was provided with the operating system e Click Custom Profile and click Choose to browse to a monitor profile that you have created yourself 3 Click OK CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES
143. amut are mapped to the nearest possible color within the available color gamut The deviation in color is displayed as a delta E value Color Editor applies a default delta E value of 5 0 measured in the delta E 2000 format It effectively increases the color gamut by this value It allows spot colors that lie within the tolerance area around the color gamut to be accepted as in gamut You can change the tolerance limit in the Preferences dialog box if required For more information see Color Definition tab on page 281 COLOR EDITOR TO CHECK THE COLOR ACCURACY OF L A B SPOT COLORS 1 Start Color Editor For more information see Starting Color Editor on page 277 Select one or more L a b spot colors On the lower toolbar click Gamut Check Select a printer Select a print configuration set The print configuration set contains details of the base linearization file that is connected to the media profile If you have created a custom print configuration set you can select it here Otherwise select the default preset The default preset is the print configuration set that is selected for the media Click Next Color Editor checks whether each selected spot color is in gamut for the selected printer and displays the following information e The percentage of in gamut spot colors e The average delta E e The maximum delta E Click Finish Result of gamut check 1 Delta E column 2 Delta E of selected spot
144. anager On the Tools menu make sure that System Information is selected 2 Under General settings select Enable JDF communication and click OK JDF INTEGRATION 3 On the Edit menu click JDF Export Folder By default processed jobs are saved to the JDF Export Folder The printer retrieves them from this folder If your computer configuration permits it it is recommended that you browse to a folder on a different partition to free up disk space on the C drive 4 Inthe layout area click the output device On the Device tab open the Connection pane 5 Under Connection type select Print via JDF port If you have only one VUTEk printer license and the printer is already set up to print to file an error message appears This happens because it is not possible to set up two different output devices To get round the problem disconnect all workflows from all output devices Then set up the output device to print via JDF port For more information see To create a new output device on page 57 Make sure to set up the linearization device to print via the JDF port also 6 Type the IP address of the printer and the IP port The default IP port is 8013 For more information ask your system administrator You can check that the connection has been established by clicking Connect To test the connection the printer must be switched on If you receive an error message contact your sys
145. anced button is not available right click the toolbar and click Customize Toolbar Then drag the Advanced button into the toolbar 5 Under Type select Windows printer via spoolss 6 Under Device select Another Device 7 Under URL type the IP address of the computer on which the Fiery XF server is installed and the name of the Fiery XF virtual printer Use the following syntax smb xxx xxx xxx xxx virtualprintername or smb computername virtualprintername 8 Under Use review the setting e Ifthe Fiery XF client is installed on the computer it means that the appropriate PPD is already available Select Select Printer Software In the list of available printers select the EFI Colorproof XF printer and click OK Click Add to add the Fiery XF printer to the list of available printers e Ifthe Fiery XF client is not installed on the computer it means that the appropriate PPD is not available In this case you need to install it from the Macintosh software DVD Insert the Macintosh software DVD into the DVD ROM drive Then under Use select Other browse to the EFI Fiery XF ppd on the DVD and click Open The PPD is located in the Fiery Tools folder Click Add to add the Fiery XF printer to the list of available printers PRINTING THROUGH A VIRTUAL PRINTER Printing from a graphics program to the Fiery XF virtual printer To print directly to the Fiery XF virtual printer Fier
146. arated jobs Save your changes If you have a license for the Spot Color Option overprinting is incorporated into the settings for in RIP separation Therefore it is recommended that you simulate overprinting in composite jobs only under the following circumstances e Ifyou do not have a license for the Spot Color Option e Ifyou have a license for the Spot Color Option but in RIP separation is disabled Non embedded fonts in PDF jobs By default ifa PDF job contains non embedded fonts the missing fonts are simply replaced with the font Courier However you can instruct Fiery XF to stop job processing if a missing font is detected Stopping job processing gives you an opportunity to embed missing fonts and reload the job before printing TO SET UP A WORKFLOW FOR NON EMBEDDED FONTS 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane Select Stop job processing if font is missing Save your changes POSTSCRIPT AND PDF JOBS If you load a PDF or PostScript job that contains non embedded fonts the missing fonts are listed on the Warning Error pane of the File tab TO PRINT A JOB WITH NON EMBEDDED FONTS If the job stops because non embedded fonts are detected you can override the workflow setting and continue job processing If you continue with job processing the missing fonts are replaced with Courier 1 In the job list click the job On the File tab open
147. arization file 1 Connect your measuring device 2 Start Color Tools and click Create Base Linearization 3 Do one of the following e On the File menu click Load Base Linearization browse to a base linearization file and click Open Use this setting to load an unfinished base linearization file and continue from where you left off The only prerequisite is that you must use the same measuring device e When you have printed the first chart click Import Data Use this setting to load measurement values that were obtained with a third party program The existing measurement values are used as the basis for creating a base linearization file You can use any measuring device except one that is embedded in the printer Alternatively you can make quick changes to an existing base linearization file in Profile Connector For more information see Profile Connector on page 158 Creating a media profile When you create a media profile you create it for a specific combination of printer and media To create a media profile you must first create a base linearization file You cannot create a media profile if the linearization device is set up to print to file CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES TO CREATE A MEDIA PROFILE 1 Start Color Tools and click Create Media Profile 2 Fey Prine oi i eis A Welcome Creating a printer profile has never been easier Select Fiery Server Search for a Fiery server
148. asure chart Result Average dE import data Show patches Re Linearization Re Ink Limiting and Re Linearization 3 Click the Info button and follow the on screen instructions to create a new base linearization file that returns the printer s color reproduction to its original state You can overwrite the current base linearization file or you can create a new base linearization file by saving the results under a new name If you create a new base linearization file you must select it in Fiery XF For more information see Media profiles on page 137 CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES Performing visual color corrections You can use the Visual Correction tool to modify the ink curve of individual ink channels A visual correction is based purely on manual color adjustments and should therefore only be performed as an emergency measure by experienced users TO PERFORM VISUAL COLOR CORRECTIONS 1 Start Color Tools and click Visual Correction Correction type Re Linearization Plate compensation Gradation Color mode m CMYKOG RGB Cyan Magenta Yellow Black Orange Re Green Blue Spot color Global changes Gamma 2 Click the Info button and follow the on screen instructions When you have created a visual correction file you can select it in Fiery XF TO SELECT A VISUAL CORRECTION FILE IN FIERY XF Make sure that the visual correction file is located i
149. at is not connected to a media profile Selecting a base linearization file that is not connected to a media profile enables you to print without applying color management In this way you can check the color reproduction properties of the printer For more information see Creating or editing a base linearization file on page 150 After you have created the base linearization file copy it to the appropriate subfolder of the EFI Media Profiles folder 5 Save your changes SELECTING PROFILES AND RENDERING INTENTS Source profiles and simulation reference profiles Source profiles describe the color characteristics of the job The color characteristics are defined in the graphics program or by the input device Source profiles provide a reliable way to predict the color results of a production run on a traditional printer RGB source profiles ensure high quality output in vivid colors They do this by maintaining the larger RGB color gamut during job processing Simulation reference profiles describe the color reproduction properties of the printing machine that you are simulating on your inkjet printer A set of generic profiles is provided with Fiery XF If you do not want to make your own color management settings you can select a preset You can select a preset in the pane bar menu Color management presets for proofing production photo business graphics and convert to grayscale are provided with Fiery XF They contain pres
150. ation see Printing from a graphics program to the Fiery XF virtual printer on page 210 TO SET UP A CONNECTION TO A REMOTE FIERY XF VIRTUAL PRINTER IN THE SAME SUBNET If the Fiery XF server and the graphics program are installed on different computers you have to add the virtual printer as a new printer 1 In System Preferences click Print amp Scan 2 Click Add If a menu opens click Add Printer or Scanner 3 On the Default tab from the list of printer names select the Fiery XF virtual printer PRINTING THROUGH A VIRTUAL PRINTER 4 Under Use review the setting e Ifthe Fiery XF client is installed on the computer EFI Colorproof XF is selected It means that the appropriate PPD is available Click Add to add the Fiery XF printer to the list of available printers e Ifthe Fiery XF client is not installed on the computer Generic PostScript Printer is selected It means that the appropriate PPD is not available In this case you need to install it from the Macintosh software DVD Insert the Macintosh software DVD into the DVD ROM drive Then under Use select Other browse to the EFI Fiery XF ppd on the DVD and click Open The PPD is located in the Fiery Tools folder Click Add to add the Fiery XF printer to the list of available printers TO SET UP A CONNECTION TO A REMOTE FIERY XF VIRTUAL PRINTER IN A DIFFERENT SUBNET If the Fiery XF server and the graphics program are installed on
151. ays up to date Updating Fiery XF During the update procedure all new and changed files for the Fiery XF server are installed in the appropriate program folders If a Fiery XF client is installed on the same computer the client and options are updated at the same time Remote Fiery XF clients and options are updated the next time they log on to the Fiery XF server To update Fiery XF automatically you need a Fiery XF server computer with Internet access If the Fiery XF server is installed on a computer with no Internet access you can obtain software updates and install them manually You can obtain the update files from your EFI dealer or you can copy them from a different Fiery XF server computer that does have Internet access TO UPDATE FIERY XF AUTOMATICALLY 1 2 Exit all Fiery XF programs Right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Fiery XF Online Update The Updater dialog box appears Select the check box if you want to save a copy of the updated files You can use the copy to update a second Fiery XF server on a computer with no Internet access The copy is saved in a separate folder on the desktop For more information see To update Fiery XF manually on page 167 Click Next A dialog box with a list of currently available software updates appears It indicates which update files are available and also gives information about file size and version number Select the check boxes of the updates you wan
152. bit versions are supported but not recommended Use a 32 bit version only if required by your printer Client Windows 7 Home Premium Professional Ultimate 32 or 64 bit Windows Server 2008 R2 32 or 64 bit Windows 8 8 N 8 Pro 8 Pro N 32 or 64 bit e Hardware Fiery XF component Server System requirements Quad core CPU with 2 GHz or more 8 GB RAM 300 GB HDD 10 100 Megabit network controller 2 available USB ports Client Dual core CPU with 2 GHz or more 2 GB RAM 10 100 Megabit network controller 1 available USB port A monitor resolution of min 1280 x 1024 pixels INTRODUCTION Macintosh e Operating systems Fiery XF component System requirements Server e Mac OS X 10 6 10 7 10 8 Client e Mac OS X 10 6 10 7 10 8 e Hardware Fiery XF component System requirements Server e Intel Macintosh native Quad core CPU with 2 GHz or more 8 GB RAM 300 GB HDD e 10 100 Megabit network controller e 2 available USB ports Client e Dual core CPU with 2 GHz or more e 2GBRAM e 10 100 Megabit network controller e 1 available USB port e A monitor resolution of min 1280 x 1024 pixels INTRODUCTION Online help Fiery XF includes a comprehensive help system e The online help provides detailed information on how to set up and use each feature of Fiery XF From the Help menu click Help e The context sensitiv
153. by workflows that are set up on one or more installations of Fiery XF With load balancing jobs that are placed in the hotfolder are diverted automatically to the first idle workflow that becomes available Load balancing ensures that all the available system resources are used as efficiently as possible As an example if one workflow is busy processing a large volume job or if one Fiery XF server encounters a problem job processing can continue via a different workflow When a job starts being processed it is automatically moved to the JobFolder to prevent it from being processed multiple times or by two workflows simultaneously INCREASING JOB SPEED The following diagrams illustrate two possible scenarios for using load balancing Example of load balancing using different Fiery XF servers a amp LX AIR Example of load balancing using different workflows o ge P Ja So W Note the following Workflows that monitor the same hotfolder may not necessarily be configured identically This can result in unsatisfactory color results if the workflow settings are different or if a different printer is connected This setting cannot be applied to jobs in a multi file format for example one bit DCS Scitex TIFF IT or delta lists INCREASING JOB SPEED To SET UP LOAD BALANCING 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the File tab open the Job Detection pane 2 Set up a hotfolder
154. c settings see the appropriate sections of this documentation TO ADD SPOT COLORS 1 Start Color Editor For more information see Starting Color Editor on page 277 Do one of the following e To add a new spot color On the lower toolbar click Add Right click an existing spot color and click Add e To duplicate an existing spot color You can duplicate a custom spot color or you can duplicate a spot color from the internal spot color library The internal spot color library contains spot colors from major spot color manufacturers On the lower toolbar click Duplicate Right click an existing spot color and click Duplicate Drag a spot color from the internal spot color library to the custom spot color section Under Spot color name type a name The name must match exactly the spot color name from the job Under Transparency move the slider to define the degree of transparency opacity optional A transparency setting of 100 means that if the spot color overlaps another color the colors underneath will shine through By contrast if you define a spot color with a transparency value of 0 colors that are overlapped by the spot color are not visible COLOR EDITOR 5 Under Spot color definition at 100 select one or both of the following e Independent lets you measure a 100 colorant in the independent CIE L a b or CIE LCH color space The default measuring device is ES
155. causes pages in their proximity to snap to them TO SHOW VISUAL AIDS On the View menu point to Visual Aids and then click an item To show all visual aids click All To hide a visual aid click an item that has a check mark next to it To clear all visual aids click None TO ACTIVATE THE SNAP TO FEATURE 1 On the View menu point to Snap to and click an item The snap to feature is available for guides and grid In a nesting you can also make objects snap to each other JOB LIST AND PREVIEW WINDOW Rulers You can display rulers along the top and left edges of the preview window The rulers are displayed in the system of measurement that is set up for Fiery XF Rulers 1 Default 0 0 coordinates 2 Ruler intersection area for changing or resetting the 0 0 coordinates By default the 0 0 coordinates are positioned at the top left corner of the sheet To set the 0 0 coordinates at a different position for example the corner of a page drag the pointer from the ruler intersection area of the preview window to the required position To reset the 0 0 coordinates double click the ruler intersection area of the preview window Guides 1 Intersecting guides JOB LIST AND PREVIEW WINDOW Guides Guides are non printable lines By activating the snap to feature guides can be given a magnetic property which causes pages in their proximity to snap to them For more information see To
156. ces defined for each color channel 9 Sets up a connection to the measuring device 10 Opens the Preferences dialog box You can customize the appearance of Verifier For more information see Customizing the Verifier user interface on page 328 Setting up Verifier Verifier can be used for the following purposes You can verify a proof or print against a simulation reference profile or characterization data You can verify any house standard You can verify color consistency between two prints You can measure single color patches You set up Verifier in the Preferences dialog box TO OPEN THE PREFERENCES DIALOG BOX 1 Do one of the following Click Edit In Windows on the File menu click Preferences On Macintosh on the Verifier menu click Preferences TO SELECT A MEASURING DEVICE Each control strip and media wedge is designed for use with a specific measuring device When you select a measuring device the control strips and media wedges for that measuring device become available for selection You cannot measure a control strip or a media wedge if it is not compatible with the selected measuring device VERIFIER 316 1 Connect your measuring device 2 Open the Preferences dialog box and click the General tab 3 Under Measuring device make sure that your measuring device is selected This setting acts as a filter and ensures that only those charts control strips and m
157. ch for a printer ink channel type the name in the Search box The Search box has a filter function that ensures that only the printer ink channels that meet the search criterion are displayed Some settings have an inverted equivalent They can be recognized by the letters INV in their name If you select an inverted setting the inversely proportional amount of ink is applied for example 0 color instead of 100 color or 70 color instead of 30 color With the clever use of an inverted setting you can simulate the final print run on any colored substrate 5 Click Use Selection COLOR EDITOR Adding color gradients You can define up to 99 color gradients for each spot color Color gradients that are defined in the L a b or LCH color space can be included in the dynamic wedge TO ADD COLOR GRADIENTS 1 Start Color Editor For more information see Starting Color Editor on page 277 2 Unter My Custom Spot Colors select a spot color 3 Click the Characterization tab By default the diagram shows the 0 and 100 color values of one ink 100 represents the full tone color that you defined on the Color Definition tab 0 represents the color of the media By default 0 equals the unmeasured value for pure white If your media is not pure white you can change the color value for 0 For more information see Color Definition tab on page 281 Initially the diagram displays the color curve for ju
158. ches Maximum CMYK patches 2 50 lt Average Gray patches 3 00 Printer Epson Stylus Pro 9900 9910 Px H1000 Reference profile SOcoated_v2_eciicc Time after print Time after print ba papel sues 2min 7sec 37 min 49 sec Mesa Calibrate Logged in succesfully to localhost Measuring method Multi Measuring device EFI ES 1000 Ugra Fogra MediaWedge V3 0a ES10 Illuminant D50 Delta E format dE CIE76 The measured values from the remote container are displayed on the left VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY ACROSS SITES 6 Follow the on screen instructions to measure the printed control strip The measured color values are displayed in the table on the right The results of the comparison are displayed in the Results area For more information on evaluating the results see Analyzing verification results on page 322 Show in color space Color space Jobiist L er Jobs to measure 5500 37 00 50 00 38 b E Sf admin Number of Jobs 1 66 86 2473 3710 2488 3 7 G 007215012647 _7_Evaluatic 7972 1253 21 75 8768 11 80 31 48 48 00 60 84 76 42 86 18 se 89 00 30 34 3219 33 62 94 34 k Send_ Enlarge FOGRA39_MKCheck11 t8 Method XF Workflow Job Results DeltaE Delta H Measurement 1 Name FOGRA3S_MKCheck11 it8 Name Measurement 2 Delta E Tolerance Measured Protoco
159. ck Do Not Print STEP AND REPEAT STEP AND REPEAT You can use the step and repeat feature to clone multiple copies of a job The available settings make it possible to achieve many different and interesting wallpaper patterns You can create a step and repeat from single or multi page jobs If the job has multiple pages each page forms one page of the step and repeat The settings are applied identically to all pages In this way you can output a step and repeat job on a duplex printer for double sided printing By default step and repeats are created on the size of the media that is selected for the output device If required you can set up a media size that overrides the default setting For more information see To set up a virtual sheet size on page 33 TO SET UP A STEP AND REPEAT WORKFLOW 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Layout tab open the Step and Repeat pane 2 On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings STEP AND REPEAT 3 On the Step and Repleat pane complete your settings For more information on individual settings see the context sensitive help Some of the settings require a license for the Production Option 4 Save the workflow When you load a job Fiery XF automatically creates a step and repeat according to the workflow settings TO CREATE A MANUAL STEP AND REPEAT It is recommended that you apply job settings such as sca
160. ck Save The next time you create a workflow the new template is available for selection under Custom GETTING TO KNOW FIERY XF Logging off and exiting Fiery XF To EXIT FIERY XF 1 Do one of the following In Windows on the File menu click Exit In Windows click the Close button in the top right hand corner of the program window On Macintosh on the Fiery XF Client menu click Quit Fiery XF Client On Macintosh click the Close button in the top left hand corner of the program window If you have made changes you are prompted to save them before Fiery XF closes The next time Fiery XF is started the program logs on automatically with the same user credentials If multiple users are using the same computer you can prevent subsequent users from logging on to your workflows by logging off before you exit Fiery XF TO LOG OFF AND EXIT FIERY XF Each time you start Fiery XF the client automatically logs on to the server that was last selected If multiple users are using the same computer you can log off from the Fiery XF server when you exit the Fiery XF client This causes the Login window to open the next time the client is started thus ensuring that each user logs on to his own workflows 1 On the File menu click Logoff and Exit If you have made changes you are prompted to save them before Fiery XF closes To log on to a different Fiery XF server see Logging on to a Fiery XF server on pa
161. ck ports 50005 50026 For more information see the Windows help I am working with Windows Although I am able to log on to Fiery XF successfully I cannot see any users workflows or output devices Cause A firewall is set up which is blocking the communication Remedy Unlock ports 50005 50026 For more information see the Windows help TROUBLESHOOTING When I try and log on I get the error message The user admin is unknown Please make sure that you type in the correct name Cause Remedy The usr_0000 xml file may be missing In the Tickets folder search for the usr _0000 xml file If you find the usr_0000 xml file cut and paste it to a destination outside the Tickets folder Then restart the server A new usr_0000 xml file is automatically created If the usr_0000 xml file is missing but you find a usr 0000 bak file restart the server During server restart a new usr_0000 xml is automatically created If you cannot find either a usr 0000 xml or a usr 0000 bak file contact EFI Support for a new usr 0000 xml file When you receive the file copy it to the Tickets folder The start screen appears briefly and then closes Why is this Cause Remedy This behavior occurs because Microsoft Windows uses the Data Execution Prevention DEP feature to help prevent damage from viruses and from other security threats Deactivate Data Execution Prevention for Fiery XF as follows Right click
162. click the job 2 Do one of the following e On the Layout tab open the Layout Options pane Under Mirror select a check box e On the toolbar click Transform Job Click Flip Horizontally or Flip Vertically e In the preview window right click the page point to Rotate and click Flip Horizontally or Flip Vertically Scaling a job You can increase or decrease the output size of a job by applying a scaling factor TO SCALE A JOB FREELY You can scale a job by dragging the previewed image In the preview window rest the pointer on a corner handle of the page The pointer changes into a double headed arrow Drag the image to scale the page By default the page retains its proportions If you change the height the width is adjusted accordingly and vice versa To scale width and height by different factors click the Scale Proportionally button to deactivate proportional scaling When proportional scaling is deactivated the button has a gray background You can activate proportional scaling by hold down lt Shift gt when you drag the image or by clicking the Scale Proportionally button When proportional scaling is activated the button has a blue background EDITING JOBS TO SCALE A JOB RELATIVE TO THE SHEET SIZE The following settings are available Setting Fit to sheet size Description The job width or the job height is scaled to the printable width or height of the media whichever is reached first
163. colors CMYKRGB CMYKRGB CMYKRGB TIFF jobs The color information is read from the file header if available In this case the source profiles are applied as for PostScript jobs If the color information cannot be read from the file header only the number of color channels is important not the colors themselves To process a job with seven ink channels you can use any multicolor source profile with seven colors The job is always processed using the colors of the multicolor profile You can override the default setting and force Fiery XF to apply a specific source profile TO FORCE THE USE OF A SOURCE PROFILE 1 Go to System Manager On the Color tab open the Spot Colors pane 2 Under Input handling click an item e Force CMYK The table below shows the effect of forcing the use of the CMYK source profile Color space of job File format Applied source profile CMYK CMYKOG PostScript CMYK is printed OG OGB RGB are CMYKOGB treated as spot colors CMYKRGB CMYKOG TIFF CMYK is printed The multicolor channels CMYKOGB are lost CMYKRGB SPOT COLORS e Force multicolor The table below shows the effect of forcing the use of the multicolor source profile Color space of job File format Applied source profile multicolor CMYKOG PostScript If the multicolor source profile and the job CMYKOGB TIFF have the same number of ink channels all CMYKRGB colors are printed If ink channels are missi
164. container from jobs with v2 screening The table below compares the two screening methods vi v2 AM screening achievable screen ruling 100 lpi with certain screen settings Up to 150 lpi depending on the printer configuration Screening settings definable for each color in job Yes Spot colors can be linked to one of the screening settings for C M Y or K The default setting is black Yes Spot colors can be linked to one of the screening settings for C M Y or K The default setting is black Output Composite printout in pure Composite printout includes inkjet CMYK screening screening for each color in job Screen dot Pure inkjet dots Color managed dots Use of light inks Color accuracy By overprinting of pure inkjet dots By overprinting of color managed dots Paper white simulation Screened Contone Full tone reproduction Screened Contone Dot CREATOR v1 v2 Contone printer mode support No Yes Linearization profiling New linearization and profiling using the screening file necessary Can be connected to any existing base linearization file as long as the screening resolution is the same as the printer resolution Speed Up to 50 slower than v1 Dot sharpness Slightly less sharp than v1 The differences in output are illustrated in the following diagram v1 screening
165. convert L a b spot colors to the color space of the printer It is easier to edit spot colors that are defined in the ink colors of the printer To CONVERT L A B SPOT COLORS TO THE COLOR SPACE OF THE PRINTER 1 Start Color Editor For more information see Starting Color Editor on page 277 2 Select one or more L a b spot colors mn 3 On the lower toolbar click Gamut Check 4 Select a printer 5 Select a print configuration set The print configuration set contains details of the base linearization file that is connected to the media profile If you have created a custom print configuration set you can select it here Otherwise select the default preset The default preset is the print configuration set that is selected for the media 6 Click Next 7 Click Finish After you have converted the spot color to the color space of the printer you can check whether the spot color is in gamut For more information see Checking the color accuracy of L a b spot colors on page 290 Optimizing L a b spot colors You may be able to reduce the delta E values of spot colors by applying a spot color optimization file A spot color optimization file is a correction profile that provides a better match for the color properties of the selected printer TO OPTIMIZE AN L A B SPOT COLOR 1 Connect your measuring device 2 Start Color Editor For more information see Starting Color Editor on page 277 COLOR EDITOR 3 Sele
166. count in your spot color definitions By including the paper white in the spot color definition spot color values can easily be adjusted for use with different media to ensure that color accuracy is maintained whatever substrate is used COLOR EDITOR e Gamut check settings Check how accurately an L a b spot color can be reproduced using the selected profiles You can also check if an L a b spot color lies within the color gamut of your printer The color gamut describes the full range of colors that the printer can reproduce During job processing spot colors that are out of gamut are mapped to the nearest possible color within the available color gamut The deviation in color is displayed as a delta E value Define the acceptable tolerance limit as a delta E value Delta E is used to measure the mathematical difference between two colors in the L a b color space This setting effectively increases the color gamut by the delta E value that you define here It allows spot colors that lie within the tolerance area around the color gamut to be accepted as in gamut Color Editor applies a default delta E value of 5 0 measured in the delta E 2000 format You can change these values if required For more information see Checking the color accuracy of L a b spot colors on page 290 Measurement and Display tab The following settings are available e Measurement device settings You can use an ES 1000 or ES 2000 measuring device
167. ct On registering you will receive a license file for your particular configuration of Fiery XF to activate the software How would you like to activate Automatically Manually Dongle ID 1965286422 Generate and activate new license Sends your EAC code and dongle ID to the EFI Activation Server then downloads the generated license file and installs it on your computer Enter your EAC code You will find the EAC code inside the product packaging Continue With User Details Download previously created license this option ou just want to download again Download Activated Licenses 4 Select Generate and activate new license 5 Enter the EAC code in the appropriate boxes and click Continue with user details The EAC code is case sensitive 6 Read carefully the information about product registration Then click Next Step 7 Fill out the online form with your user registration details If you are a returning customer the form is filled out automatically if you type your e mail address and click Retrieve 8 Click Install License A license file is created and downloaded to the FlexLM folder on your computer 9 LICENSING 43 Click Finish to exit the Activation Wizard Assistant If problems arise when trying to download a license file using this method you can generate a license file from the activation website instead For more information see To generate a new licen
168. ct between customer and printing house A contract proof is usually the final proof that is created before going to press Contract proof with sharp Select this item to create a quick color accurate screen dots proof The print quality is slightly lower than that of a standard contract proof 8 Save your changes TO CHANGE THE PROOFING METHOD OF A ONE BIT JOB Settings for one bit jobs are made at workflow level In Job Explorer you can change only the proofing method The proofing method affects the print quality and print speed 1 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the File tab open the One bit pane 2 Under Proofing method select an item The available settings are e Imposition proof e Contract proof e Contract proof with sharp dots For more information see the context sensitive help 3 Save your changes JDF INTEGRATION JDF INTEGRATION JDF enables bidirectional communication between Fiery XF and other JDF compliant devices Fiery XF supports JDF compliant devices and programs from EFI and third party manufacturers You can integrate JDF into a Fiery XF workflow e On the job input side Fiery XF can transmit information about the current job status back to the Management Information System print MIS device from which the job was submitted e On the job output side Fiery XF can receive information about media consumption and ink consumption from the prin
169. ct one or more L a b spot colors You can optimize custom spot colors and spot colors from the internal spot color library al 4 On the lower toolbar click Optimize 5 Select your measuring device Click Settings to make device specific settings 6 Select a printer 7 Select a print configuration set The print configuration set contains details of the base linearization file that is connected to the media profile If you have created a custom print configuration set you can select it here Otherwise select the default preset The default preset is the print configuration set that is selected for the media 8 Click Next A optimization job is created in Job Explorer and printed The optimization job consists of a chart of the spot colors to be optimized 9 Follow the on screen instructions to measure the chart 10 Click Next The results of the optimization are displayed Color Editor displays the achieved average delta E and the maximum delta E 11 Do one of the following e Click Iterate to repeat the optimization procedure until no further optimization is possible In the optimization table click the best set of results and then click Finish and save your optimization e Click Verifier to start Verifier e Click Finish and save your optimization The spot color optimization file is applied to all workflows that are using that spot color table The spot color optimization file is saved to the Spotcolors folder and selec
170. custom permissions create multiple shares and set other 3 Click Advanced Sharing The Advanced Sharing dialog box appears 4 Select Share this folder 5 Click Permissions The Permissions dialog box appears 6 7 8 PRINTING THROUGH A HOTFOLDER Select the group or user names to have access to the shared folder If the group or user is not listed click Add and add a new object Select Users Computers Service Accounts or Groups a acacia aria oll e a p Users Groups or Built in security principals efi intemal Enter the object names to select examples Check Names lt ji Do the following Type the Windows user name and click Check Names to confirm that the object exists e In the list click the user name and click OK The object is added to the list of groups Assign full read change privileges to the group or user Click OK and close all dialog boxes To SET UP THE HOTFOLDER AS A SHARED FOLDER MACINTOSH 1 2 3 Browse to the folder that contains the hotfolder for example Macintosh HD folder Right click the folder and click Get Info Under General select Shared folder Under Sharing amp Permissions change the privilege rights to grant read and write access to a user or group of users If the user or group of users is not listed create a new user Do the following e Under Sharing amp Permissions
171. d Printer or Scanner PRINTING THROUGH UNIDRIVER 3 Click Advanced e900 Add Type EFI Unidriver Device Another Device URL udspooler Name Location Ei If the Advanced button is not available right click the toolbar and click Customize Toolbar Then drag the Advanced button into the toolbar e00 Add bs v Icon and Text ga Icon Only Text Only Name B Hide Toolbar E Kind ry Canon iPF6350 6A5F41 Bonjour Dell 1130n Laser Printer Use Small Size Bonjour Dell Laser Printer M5200 z Bonjour epera EEEa Customize Toolbar monica Phaser 7800GX EEE Bonjour _EFl_eXpress Marcel Vervoort s MacPro Quad Bonjour Shared Epson Stylus on PC Holger D Marcel Vervoort s MacPro Quad Bonjour Shared _XF 10 130 84 106 Unidriver EFI Unidriver XF 10 130 84 108 Unidriver EFI Unidriver XF 10 130 84 110 Unidriver EFI Unidriver _XF 10 130 84 112 Unidriver EFI Unidriver XF 10 130 84 116 Unidriver EFI Unidriver Name No Selection Location No Selection Use __ Add 4 Under Type select Fiery Unidriver n 5 Under Device select Another Device 10 11 PRINTING THROUGH UNIDRIVER Under URL type the IP address of the computer on which the Fiery XF server is installed The URL must follow the following syntax udspooler ip xxx xxx xxx xxx xf where xxx xxx xxx xxx stands for the IP
172. d distribute all pages in the nesting NESTINGS 113 2 Align the selected pages using one of the following methods po e On the toolbar click Align and click an alignment type e Right click anywhere in the preview and click an alignment type e On the Edit menu point to Align and click an alignment type You can align pages relative to each other on a sheet Pages can be aligned according to their upper lower left or right edges or according to their vertical or horizontal centers E m B a 3 Distribute aligned pages evenly on the sheet using one of the following methods 7 e On the toolbar click Align and click a distribution type e Right click anywhere in the preview and click a distribution type e On the Edit menu point to Align and click a distribution type You can distribute pages relative to each other on a sheet Pages can be distributed according to their upper lower left or right edges or according to their vertical or horizontal centers The pages are rearranged and horizontal centers distributed NESTINGS 114 TO CHANGE THE LAYER ORDER OF OVERLAPPING PAGES re You can nest overlapping pages Overlapping pages must be locked on the sheet to ensure that they are not rearranged when you update the preview for more information see To lock a page on page 115 1 In the preview select an overlapping page Overlapping pages are identified by a red border 2 Move the page
173. d from mixing process colors As a result spot colors are often used to print company logos Many different manufacturers produce spot colors together with a set of swatch books with printed examples of the colors Fiery XF manages the spot colors of major spot color manufacturers in an internal spot color library These colors are automatically detected in Fiery XF If you load a job that contains a spot color whose name is not known in Fiery XF you must define it before the job can be correctly output To define and process jobs with spot colors you require the Spot Color Option You can define spot colors e In Job Explorer Job Explorer provides a quick and easy way to define spot colors for a job that is already loaded in Fiery XF For more information see Spot colors on page 265 e In Color Editor Color Editor is a comprehensive program for defining measuring and editing spot colors Defined spot colors are saved in a spot color table You can select a spot color table for a single P P g job or integrate it into a workflow COLOR EDITOR Starting Color Editor Color Editor 1 2 3 Custom spot colors Definition of the selected custom spot color Internal spot color library ae Color Editor a x le Edit A Ss eB Em amp AR Ye ara Applied to 0 workflow s E Q sear Spot color name Description aaa IOl Auto Generated Color Name Typ
174. d from a supplier Why can I not select it in Fiery XF Cause Remedy The media profile is not connected to a base linearization file The media profile must always be connected to a base linearization file in order to be available for selection in Fiery XF Make sure that the media profile has been connected to a base linearization file For more information see Third party media profiles on page 170 I have created a media profile but why can I not select it in Fiery XF Cause Remedy Cause Remedy The profile may not be saved under a unique name which makes it difficult to find in the list of available media profiles It is recommended that you create a calibration set for a unique media name so that the profile can be found more easily in Fiery XF You can create a new calibration set by creating a base linearization file and connecting it to an existing media profile For more information see Creating or editing a base linearization file on page 150 and Profile Connector on page 158 The base linearization file is not saved in the Profiles folder Make sure that the base linearization file and the ICC profile are saved in the EFI Media Profiles folder Why do I receive the error message Selected profile is invalid Cause Remedy The media profile may not be correctly connected to the base linearization file Only media that are linked to a base linearization file are listed
175. d on If you receive an error message contact your system administrator for advice Select the type of TCP IP protocol that your printer uses for data transfer Most printers support the RAW protocol and print to port 9100 The LPR protocol is normally reserved for Unix systems or print servers with multiple interfaces In most cases you can leave the box blank Refer to your printer manual or ask your system administrator if you are unsure Additional settings are required to print to a Fiery Command WorkStation For more information see Printing to a Fiery output device on page 213 e Select Print via port to print to a printer that is connected via USB to the server computer The printer must be switched on when you start Fiery XF Otherwise the printer cannot be detected CREATING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION e Select Print to file to print to PDF TIFF format to create a softproof on a Caddon can view output device or to output to a Fiery output device Check the export path Click Choose and browse to a different folder if required Complete the rest of your settings The available settings depend on the type of file output For more information see the context sensitive help e Select Print via JDF port to set up a JDF connection to a VUTEk printer For more information see Printing to a VUTEk printer on page 215 See also the context senstive help e Select Print via JDF port to set up a
176. d or other materials provided with the distribution All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission This software is provided by the regents and contributors as is and any express or implied warranties including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed In no event shall the regents or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract strict liability or tort including negligence or otherwise arising in any way out of the use of this software even if advised of the possibility of such damage Copyright c 1983 Regents of the University of California Copyright c 1990 1991 Regents of The University of Michigan Portions Copyright c 1990 1991 Regents of The University of Michigan All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and
177. detected in Fiery XF Change the file extension from txt to lic If the file extension is not visible open Control Panel and search for Show hidden files and folders On the View tab make sure that the advanced setting Show hidden files folders and drives is selected There is no valid license Cause Remedy Cause Remedy Fiery XF Control may not be running Make sure that Fiery XF Control is online before trying to log on to the client Right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Fiery XF Server Start One or more Windows services required by Fiery XF may not be running Right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Fiery XF Server Configuration Check that the following services are started e EFI License Manager EFI XF Server e DebugLog If necessary select the service that is currently not running and click Retart the service TROUBLESHOOTING Cause Remedy Cause Remedy Cause Remedy Cause Remedy The dongle is not detected Connect the dongle to a different USB port To check whether the dongle is detected right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Show Dongle ID If the dongle is not detected reinstall the dongle driver You can download the latest dongle driver from http www aladdin com support hasp aspx In the section for end user downloads select the HASP HL device driver The license file may have been generated for an incorr
178. different computers you have to add the virtual printer as a new printer 1 In System Preferences click Print amp Scan 2 Click Add If a menu opens click Add Printer or Scanner 3 Click Advanced If the Advanced button is not available right click the toolbar and click Customize Toolbar Then drag the Advanced button into the toolbar 4 Under Type select Internet Printing Protocol http 5 Under Device select Another Device 6 Under URL type the IP address or the computer name of the computer on which the Fiery XF server is installed followed by the name of the virtual printer Use the following syntax http xxx xxx xxx xxx 63 1 printers virtualprintername or http computername 63 1 printers virtualprintername PRINTING THROUGH A VIRTUAL PRINTER 7 Under Use review the setting e Ifthe Fiery XF client is installed on the computer it means that the appropriate PPD is already available Select Select Printer Software In the list of available printers select the EFI Colorproof XF printer and click OK Click Add to add the Fiery XF printer to the list of available printers e Ifthe Fiery XF client is not installed on the computer it means that the appropriate PPD is not available In this case you need to install it from the Macintosh software DVD Insert the Macintosh software DVD into the DVD ROM drive Then under Use select Other browse to the EFI
179. dynamic wedge 7 Click OK Achieving an ISO 12647 7 compliant proof The procedures require you to print out and measure media wedges Verifier supports the use of Ugra Fogra media wedges and IT8 7 4 profiling charts The following examples show how to use Verifier to create an ISO 12647 7 compliant proof VERIFIER 321 To create a compliant proof the following criteria must be met e The job ticket printed on the proof must contain the following information The name of the proofing software Colorant Type of substrate Printing condition to be simulated Color profiles used Time and date of printout e The delta E and delta H values of the Ugra Fogra media wedge must be within the defined tolerances To VERIFY ISO 12647 7 COMPLIANCY BY MEASUREMENT 1 2 Make sure that you have a printout of an ISO 12647 7 compliant media wedge Connect your measuring device to your computer Start Verifier Open the Preferences dialog box and make the following settings On the General tab e Under Measuring device select your measuring device e Under Chart or wedge selection select the media wedge that you printed On the Comparison Settings tab e Under Tolerance limits select ISO 12647 7 Contract Proof Media Wedge Click OK to close the Preferences dialog box For the first set of measurement values M1 From the Fogra_MKCheck11 folder load a Fogra characterization data set for
180. e Media tab open the Print Configuration pane and make the correct ink type setting I have set up a hotfolder in a network but submitted jobs do not appear in the job list What is the problem Cause The Fiery XF server runs on Windows as a service By default the login rights are defined for the local computer It means that Fiery XF cannot communicate with folders that are located in a network environment This may present problems if you wish to print jobs via a hotfolder Remedy Assign network access rights for the Fiery XF server as follows 1 Right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Fiery XF Server Configuration TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Right click EFI XF Server click Properties and click the Log On tab General Log on as Local System account E Allow service to interact with desktop This account Password Confirm password eovccececcccece Help me configure user account log on options 3 Click This account and assign network access rights for the Fiery XF server 4 Click OK Color management problems Initialization of CMM failed Cause There could be a wrong setting on the Color Management pane or the media profile may be corrupt Remedy Check the color management settings for the workflow Check also the quality settings for the output device TROUBLESHOOTING Media profile problems I am trying to use a media profile that I receive
181. e TUTA P El My Custom Spot Colors mee Color Definition Characterization Gradation farbe2 CMYK Use as alias for Apply as o sf CMYK D pone Ga Mre E Transparent CMYK Transparency 100 farbel CMYK Opaque aa tarbe6 CMYK Spot color definition at 100 tatbes owe El Independent 7 Dependent EE HKS Color System Source Spot color type E TOYO Color System Printer cm gt E DIC Color System G Tp STG CE tab v E Pantone Color System G 0 00 4 PRINTER Color System W Ei m EEE 100 00 a r EE so br k 000 JA ESE mm 2otColorlable_80_00 0 6 Colors To START COLOR EDITOR IF A SPOT COLOR JOB IS LOADED Use this method to edit a spot color table for a loaded job Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Colors tab open the Spot Colors pane Click Color Editor Color Editor starts The spot colors from the loaded job are displayed You can also define and edit spot colors for a loaded job without starting Color Editor For more information see To define spot colors for a loaded job on page 266 However Color Editor provides a much wider range of settings To START COLOR EDITOR IF NO SPOT COLOR JOB IS LOADED z Use this method to create or edit a spot color table if no spot color job is loaded Do one of the following e On the toolbar click Color Editor e On the Tools menu cl
182. e You can create a new base linearization file and a new media profile For more information see Creating or editing a base linearization file on page 150 e You can connect a screening file to an existing media profile For more information see Profile Connector on page 158 The following prerequisites apply The screening file and the base linearization file must have been created for the same printer resolution The base linearization file must have been created for the halftoning method Error diffusion SE1 or Stochastic screening SE2 When incorporated into the media profile your jobs are output at the screen angles that are defined in the screening file If you have a license for the Spot Color Option you can change the screen angles for individual jobs For more information see Changing screen angles on page 351 Screen angles cannot be applied to one bit files Dot CREATOR Changing screen angles If you have a license for the Spot Color Option you can change the screen angles for a loaded job This setting can be useful if you are printing separated gray films on a transparent media By default all spot colors are screened using the screen angle for black TO CHANGE THE SCREEN ANGLES 1 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Color tab open the Spot Colors pane Spot Colors Input handling Active setting Automatic Default Spot color library
183. e color space media profile and a destination color space simulation reference profile into one profile Device link profiles tend to produce more accurate results than when two separate profiles are applied For more information see Device link profiles on page 144 CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES TO CREATE A DEVICE LINK PROFILE 1 Start Color Tools and click Create Device Link Profile Select destination profile 2 Click the Info button and follow the on screen instructions to complete your device link profile When you have created your device link profile you need to connect it to a base linearization file For more information see Profile Connector on page 158 Creating a simulation reference profile Simulation reference profiles describe the color reproduction properties of the printing machine that you are simulating on your inkjet printer CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES TO CREATE A SIMULATION REFERENCE PROFILE 1 Start Color Tools and click Create Reference Profile Print settings Instrument EFLES 2000 Patch Layout Print multiple sets to average measurements Daa 1 patch page will be printed Patches are tiled to fit your paper size Click Next to save patch ID and print patches 2 Click the Info button and follow the on screen instructions to complete your simulation reference profile When you have created your
184. e help gives a brief description of the settings on each pane You can access the context sensitive help via the menu buttons in property inspector Right click a menu button and click Help Property inspector 1 Menu button Basic Information i lt i O F High priority workflow F Print bi directional _ RIP and print on the fly RIP Resolution pi High quality Standard Multiple You are using low res fonts PS and PDF files will be processed at a maximum of 1200 dpi Conventions The screen captures in this manual have been created from a mixture of the Windows 7 and Macintosh OS X 10 8 2 platforms Depending on which platform and version of operating system you are using the images on your screen may look slightly different from the images that you see in this documentation FIERY XF CONTROL FIERY XF CONTROL Fiery XF Control is used to e Control the Fiery XF server status e License the Fiery XF software e Download and install software updates and media profiles e Define new locations for profile folders and system folders Fiery XF Control is located in the status area of the taskbar Windows or in the Dock Macintosh of the computer that is running the server software If you cannot see the Fiery XF Control icon follow the steps below to display the taskbar Windows only and to display the Fiery XF Control icon TO DISPLAY THE WINDOWS TASKBAR AT ALL TIMES The
185. e job On the Layout tab open the Tiling pane On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings On the Tiling pane complete your settings For more information on individual settings see the context sensitive help Click Apply A tiling is creating If you selected standard tiling the default tile size is equal to the media size that is set up for the output device Tilings user interface Te m i Vos matga y Legend Description 1 A selected tile is displayed in turquoise 2 Individual tiles can be printed or omitted from the job 3 A selected tile edge is displayed in red Tile edges can be locked in a fixed position Locked tile edges are displayed in gray 4 Tiles can be output with overlapping to make it easier to piece them together after printing 5 Apply button Click to create a tiling or to update the preview in accordance with the settings made on the Tiling pane TILING Modifying tilings TO MAKE CHANGES TO THE ORIGINAL JOB It is not possible to modify the layout options scaling orientation rotation alignment of a page in a tiled state To modify the layout options you must first deactivate tiling by clearing the check box on the pane bar After you have made your changes reselect the check box on the pane bar Then click Apply to update the tiling Each time you update a tiling the default settings are applied Therefore if you have
186. e jobs Jobs that have either no content files or multiple content files are loaded as nestings Job names are retained If a JDF job is submitted without a job name it receives a default job name You can rename it if required JDF INTEGRATION In the job list the job status is displayed in the JDF Status column If the column is not displayed you can add it For more information see Customizing the job list on page 73 The following statuses are possible Status Meaning Submitting The JDF job is being loaded Received The JDF job is ready for printing Not complete The loaded JDF job has no content You must add a content file before job processing can start For more information see To add a content file to a JDF job on page 259 Completed Job processing has been completed Viewing JDF job information The following job information must be entered in the JDF compliant program before submitting the job e Job ID e Customer ID name info The following information is optional e Content or URL to the content Job name e Job description e Media size e Orientation e Number of printouts To view JDF JOB INFORMATION IN FIERY XF 1 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the File tab open the Job Ticket pane 2 Click Details The JDF Job Properties dialog box appears It displays details of the following e Job e Media media consumption media wast
187. e level A B or C of FCR side by side as defined by ISO 15311 3 large format signage printing G7 Grayscale Compliance G7 grayscale compliant output Japan Color Contract Proof Japan Color compliant contract proofing Softproofing FograCert Softproof Softproof verification on screen Note that delta T tolerances can be measured only for the primary colors for example 100 cyan or 50 magenta It is not possible to calculate delta T values for colors that are composed of a mixture of cyan magenta yellow and black Dynamic wedge A dynamic wedge is made up of the job s most prominent colors For example if a job is composed mainly of shades of blue the dynamic wedge will have a high proportion of blue patches For the dynamic wedge you can define only general delta E tolerances Other values are not permitted due to the unique composition of color patches for each job For more information see To select a dynamic wedge on page 132 VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY IN A FIERY XF WORKFLOW Custom You can define your own tolerance limits house standard by editing the values in the Tolerance column Custom tolerances provide an easy way to adapt quickly to the latest norms Custom tolerances are applied to the current workflow only You cannot save custom tolerances as a preset on the Verify Control Strip panes However if you want to save custom tolerances you ca
188. e measured color values do not fit into the color gamut of the reference Color space View Oa 3 Da The enlarged 3D view provides additional viewing settings measurement data amp EFI 3D Viewer Smm Transparency IV Visible B Background color I Color disk Smooth V Enable projection Projection Point Set defaults Reset rotation poe 3D Viewer 1 Out of gamut color mapped to edge of available color gamut VERIFIER 326 You can use the enlarged 3D view to see how any L a b color would be reproduced in the available color gamut Out of gamut colors are mapped to their nearest point on the edge of the available color gamut Select Enable projection click Projection Point and type an L a b value in the dialog box Select whether you want the color to be mapped to the M1 or M2 color gamut a Enter L a b L 0 a 0 b 0 Select gamut M1 The following diagram applies some of the settings that are available in 3D Viewer and shows how an out of gamut color is mapped to the edge of the available color gamut amp EFI 3D Viewer Transparency IV Visible a Background color Color disk Full color gamut M Smooth M Enable projection Projection Point Set defaults Reset rotation Close VERIFIER 327 Printing verification results You can print out verification results
189. e server that was last connected TO LOG ON TO A DIFFERENT FIERY XF SERVER You can log on to a different Fiery XF server from a current session 1 On the File menu click Login The Login dialog box appears 2 Enter a user name and password 3 Select or type the IP address of the Fiery XF server computer 4 Click OK For more information see To log on to a Fiery XF server on page 25 GETTING TO KNOW FIERY XF GETTING TO KNOW FIERY XF User interface Fiery XF has two program windows Job Explorer and System Manager e Job Explorer is where you load organize and preview jobs and make job settings e System Manager is where you create and configure system configurations You can display each window by clicking the appropriate tab Job Explorer System Manager Ame Szo Oo Job Explorer Job Explorer is where you load organize and preview jobs and make job settings GETTING TO KNOW FIERY XF Legend Description 1 The job list provides an overview of loaded jobs It contains job specific information such as job status and file name You can customize the information that is displayed in the job list For more information see Customizing the job list on page 73 2 A selected job is previewed in the preview window 3 In property inspector you can make job settings for a job that is selected in the job list 4 The selector acts as filter It lists jobs according to workflow
190. e sheet on page 93 Visual aids and a snap to feature are also available to help you to align pages exactly on the sheet For more information see Visual aids for page alignment on page 77 If you work regularly with different step and repeat settings it is a good idea to save the settings as a preset A preset is a template for a group of settings that are saved under a unique name You can create presets in the pane bar menu The next time you set up a step and repeat you need only to select the preset name STEP AND REPEAT Renaming a step and repeat New step and repeats are created with a default name You can overwrite the default name with a unique name TO RENAME A STEP AND REPEAT 1 Do one of the following e In the job list right click the file name StepAndRepeat and click Rename e In the job list click the file name StepAndRepeat Then click the left mouse button again The file name changes into an edit box 2 Overwrite StepAndRepeat with a new name Copy Paste Cut and Delete commands are available if you right click on the name of the step and repeat 3 Click anywhere outside the box to apply the change JOB MERGE Job merge 1 Master file 2 Multi page content file imported into Fiery XF as a nesting 3 Merged files JOB MERGE 125 You can use the job merge feature to superimpose one job on top of another The master job forms the background image for your content
191. each spot color definition in a specified search order The default search order depends on the type of workflow template that is applied the search order for a proofing workflow is different from that for a production workflow Fiery XF applies the first instance of each spot color it detects according to the specified search order It can be useful to change the default search order if a spot color name exists multiple times but each has different color values for example if you have redefined a spot color that is embedded in the source file with your own CMYK color values The printed result can be very different depending on which spot color definition is used In the above example using the default search order Fiery XF would apply the CMYK color definition By changing the search order you can force Fiery XF to apply the spot color definition from the source file TO CHANGE THE SEARCH ORDER 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Colors tab open the Spot Colors pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Colors tab open the Spot Colors pane 2 Under Search priority define the order in which Fiery XF looks for spot colors You do not have to include all four types of spot color definitions in the search order You can also select None to reduce the number of possible spot color sources that are searched If you select None
192. ect EFI Unidriver Print dialog box 1 Select IP address of Fiery XF server Primer ip 10 130 84 136 a lames 2 Select EFI Unidriver Praats Defaut Series 2 Copies 1 Pages 2 All From 1 to 1 Paper Size M 210 by 297 am Orientation MOY Te EFL Unidriver Change Settings T LIOF 2 _ Hide Detats J 4 Under User and Password enter your Fiery XF login credentials PRINTING THROUGH UNIDRIVER 5 Do one of the following e Ifyou do not need to make job settings in Unidriver print your job If an error message informs you that the login failed make sure that the Fiery XF server is running Then log on to Fiery XF e To view or to make changes to settings before printing click Change Settings The Unidriver Preferences window appears e200 i Preferences n Workflow ISO Coated v2 Offset 1 aj SUARE Color Device Connection Media Set Media Size ke C Use original image size from Adobe Photoshop Scale No Scaling 3 F f 100 00 a 100 00 a f Rotate Minimal Media Consumption gt _ Mirror Horizontally f Mirror Vertically Align Align horizontally Blue 296 1 mm Align vertically al Top gt 2 96 G mm C Use my settings Cancel o Select a different workflow or change settings as required You can revert to the Fiery XF workflow settings by clearing the Use my settings check
193. ect dongle ID Make sure that the right dongle ID is shown in the license file s of the purchased options To check the dongle ID right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Show Dongle ID To verify the dongle ID of the license open the license file in a text editor for example Wordpad Check that the license file contains the following information e The name of the server computer The dongle ID If the dongle IDs do not match send an e mail to e eu activation efi com for Europe Asia Australia Africa e activation efi com for North and South America In the e mail provide details of e the EAC code s of the incorrectly generated license s e the correct dongle ID from Fiery XF Control e the incorrectly typed dongle ID that is printed in the license file If you are updating from an earlier version of the software the licenses from the earlier version may have been deleted from the FlexLM folder Fiery XF requires the license files from all earlier versions in addition to the upgrade license If necessary reinstall previously removed licenses To reinstall licenses right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Activate Fiery XF To check which licenses are installed right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Show License Information You must have a license for at least one server one client and one Output Option M The system date and time may not be set up correctly Check the BIOS se
194. ed For more information see Fiery XF Server Restart on page 20 LICENSING 47 Viewing license information You can display details of currently installed licenses and their expiration dates TO VIEW LICENSE INFORMATION 1 Do one of the following e Right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Show License Information On the Help menu click Fiery XF Server Information CREATING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CREATING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Fiery XF is installed with one default system configuration that consists of two users one workflow and one output device You can view system configurations in System Manager The user admin password admin is permitted to create set up and manage system configurations in System Manager The user guest password guest is permitted to print and manage his or her own jobs in Job Explorer but does not have access to System Manager Guest enables infrequent users of Fiery XF to log on quickly and easily without first having to be defined as a user The workflow EFI Linearization and the output device Linearization device are used primarily in conjunction with Color Tools and Color Profiler Suite for printer linearization and profile creation Only users with administrator rights can print jobs through this system configuration You can set up a system configuration e In the Setup Wizard Assistant The Setup Wizard Assistant leads you l
195. ed below Alternatively you can create a new workflow using the workflow template Remote_In This workflow is set up with all the basic settings that are necessary to process a remote container in a verify workflow You can modify the default workflow settings if required Whichever workflow you use make sure that the selected control strip is compatible with your measuring device For more information on selecting a control strip see Verify workflows in Fiery XF on page 301 If you set up a custom workflow make sure to include the following settings 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow 2 3 VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY ACROSS SITES On the File tab open the Job Detection pane Under Remote job import select to use the color management settings of the remote job This setting ensures that the original color management settings including the simulation reference profile are automatically selected when you load the job On the Verify tab open the Verify Control Strip 1 pane Do the following e On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings e Under Characterization data select Open Measurement File This setting is necessary to verify the color consistency of a job at different sites It ensures that the color values from the remote container are used as the reference If the remote container was created without measurement data the simulation ref
196. ed for comparing profile to proof proof to proof and proof to print applications For more information see Verifying color consistency in a Fiery XF workflow on page 301 VERIFIER Starting Verifier TO START VERIFIER 1 Do one of the following A e On the Tools menu click Verifier On the toolbar click Verifier v Showin coor 2 Color space doci t Preuiev L e p 5558 3910 4793 e760 2507 340 7345 1222 1878 e72 59 1053 9019 304 817 4729 7338 1 59 eooo 5088 7 36 7801 2320 863 8516 1092 4 78 8933 52 373 87 37 667 96 60 8885 617 6170 90 26 390 30 26 9156 1 87 1223 3219 _ 115 1518 86 58 90 06 47 32 60 10 7578 CN 89 52 87 59 89 16 90 43 92 00 92 64 fl ites ae rel S G a ale Measure Open Measure Comparison Info Layout Method ISO 12647 7 Contract Proof Media Wedge Measurement 2 Name Measurement 2 Protocol 11 15 2012 Time 09 04 29 Infa text No patches 72 Measurement 1 Name 15012647_7_Evaluation_A_7 Protocol 11 14 2012 Time 1 33 27 PM Infa test Remote confirmation M1 Strip No patches 72 314 View iv Show whole gamut Ca Ca J0 TEE L 50 Resulte Deta E i Deta H Delta E Average all patches Maximum all patches Delta H Maximum CMYK patches Average Gray patches NOT PASSED Measuring device
197. edia wedges for the selected measuring device are available Device specific settings are also available For example you can select a resolution or specify that you want to measure single color patches If you are using an ES 1000 measuring device and want to measure a control strip as opposed to single color patches you can check the direction of measurement This setting ensures that the color patches are measured in accordance with the movement of the measuring device over the control strip 4 Click OK To SET UP VERIFIER To set up Verifier the following three steps are necessary e Select a color strip or media wedge e Select a reference e Define tolerance values This section deals with the basic steps that are necessary to set up Verifier and verify color accuracy For more information on additional settings see General settings on page 331 and Saving and loading measurement data on page 333 1 Open the Preferences dialog box and click the General tab 2 Under Chart or wedge selection select a control strip or media wedge The control strips have been created for different purposes They vary in layout and the number of color patches The table below shows which type of control strip is suitable for checking against which type of reference Type of control strip Target colors of reference Measurement file SWoP Fogra characterization from remote GRACoL data container JDF EFI Verifier Char
198. eet Alternatively on the Nesting menu point to Go to and click a sheet On the Edit menu click Paste The page is inserted from the clipboard NESTINGS 112 7 Move the page to the required position on the new sheet For more information see Aligning pages on the sheet on page 93 and Visual aids for page alignment on page 77 8 Lock the page at its current position You must lock the page at a fixed position on the sheet to ensure that it is not rearranged and moved to aa different sheet when you update the preview for more information see To lock a page on page 115 TO DELETE A NESTING SHEET 1 Do one of the following e On the Nesting menu click Delete Sheet e Right click an empty area of the preview window and click Delete Sheet The sheet is deleted If the deleted sheet contained pages the pages remain in the job list but are no longer placed You can rearrange the pages by selecting Placed and updating the preview Aligning nested pages You can align nested pages relative to each other on the sheet You can also specify the layer order of overlapping pages TO ALIGN AND DISTRIBUTE NESTED PAGES 1 Select multiple pages in the nesting Do one of the following e In the job list hold down lt Ctrl gt and select the required pages e In the preview hold down lt Shift gt and select the required pages e In the preview right click a page point to Select and click All to align an
199. eferences On the Edit menu click Preferences e On the File menu click New Table In the New Table dialog box click Preferences The Preferences dialog box appears Color Definition Measurement and Display Gradation Overprint settings Ink overprinting characteristics Gamma 50 El o ag Method In L a b color space Overprint brightness of similar colors Default Normal X gt In CMYK color space White point settings Media independent 1D Media defined i iomo a oo bss 000 meant Gamut check settings Spot color is out of gamut if above Delta E Delta E format 8 00 E dE 2000 2 Complete your settings 3 Click Save To reset the settings on all Preferences tabs to their original values click Defaults COLOR EDITOR Color Definition tab The following settings are available e Overprint settings Ink overprinting characteristics Normally when two different colored objects overlap there is a knock out effect They will not print on top of each other Intentionally printing one layer of ink on top of another is known as overprinting The overprint setting defines how two or more spot colors will behave when printed on top of each other A higher setting results in a darker printout For example an overprint value of 100 means that the colors will be completely added to each other something that is not possible on a proper printing pr
200. elected profiles presets base linearization files and spot color tables e The printer setup TO SAVE AN ENVIRONMENT You can save an environment for a workflow or for a job 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the File menu click Save as Environment e Go to System Manager In the layout area right click the workflow and click Save as Environment e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the File menu click Save as Environment e Go to Job Explorer In the job list right click the job and click Save as Environment The Save as Environment dialog box appears If you are saving a workflow environment the workflow settings are displayed For a job environment you can type your own job description Save as Environment Descriptor CMYK source profile ISOcoated_v2_eci icc CMYK source RI absolute colorimetric Job ticket print default Save to C Desktop ISO coated v2 Offset _Office printer 11 Save Cancel 2 Define a backup location By default environment backups are saved to two destinations the Environments folder and the desktop To change the second destination click Choose and browse to a new destination BACKUP AND RESTORE 3 Click Save A dialog box appears when the backup has been successfully saved 4 Click OK to complete the backup procedure TO RESTORE AN ENVIRONMENT Environment
201. elected source profiles and simulation profiles for standard workflows TO SELECT SOURCE PROFILES AND SIMULATION REFERENCE PROFILES 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job 2 On the Color tab open the the Color Management pane 3 On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings 4 Under Source profiles select a profile for CMYK jobs a profile for RGB jobs and a profile for grayscale jobs Commonly used source profiles are preselected for each color space You can use the default profiles or select source profiles that are more appropriate for your jobs You can select a source profile provided with Fiery XF or one that was supplied with your input device Custom source profiles must be copied to the Reference folder Only profiles that are located in the Reference folder can be selected in Fiery XF Fiery XF does not provide multicolor source profiles but you can implement custom multicolor profiles for five six or seven colors if required For more information on processing multicolor jobs see Forcing the use of a source profile on page 273 Fiery XF analyzes each loaded job and applies automatically the source profile for the correct color space If no source profile is selected for the job s color space an error message appears 5 Select Use embedded profiles if available optional
202. elections are possible Sheets marks are available for nestings only 5 Select a type of FOTOBA crop marks Choose between FOTOBA DIGITRIM FOTOBA XL and FOTOBA WR 6 For FOTOBA XL or FOTOBA WR Select Cut fixed media slug 8 mm optional This setting applies a cut slug of 8 mm The cut slug defines the distance between two cutting blades on devices with more than one blade The cut slug is applied on top of the bleed setting In nestings and step and repeats this setting can be applied only to pages FOTOBA CROP MARKS 7 Define the appearance of the FOTOBA crop marks The available settings vary depending on the type of FOTOBA crop marks you have selected For FOTOBA DIGITRIM you can define a line thickness for horizontal crop marks For FOTOBA XL and FOTOBA WR you can make independent settings for horizontal and vertical line thickness By default the vertical line thickness for FOTOBA WR is set to 0 so that only horizontal crop marks top and bottom are visible To add vertical crop marks type a value in the appropriate box 8 Define a color optional The default color is black By clicking the black box you can select a different color 9 Define a bleed setting optional The bleed setting repositions the crop marks in relation to the image By adding a frame around the image you can add white space between image and crop marks 10 Save your changes If you work regularly with different
203. ement 2 Name Measurement 2 Protocol 11 5 2012 Time 13 51 16 Info text Remote proofing measurement No patches 72 Enlarge Results Delta E L Deta H Delta E Average all patches Maximum all patches Delta H Maximum CMYK patches Average Gray patches Measuring device E Connected Calibrate Logged in succesfully to localhost 7 Compare the results Measuring method Multi Measuring device EFI ES 1000 Ugra Fogra MediaWedge V3 0a ES10 Illuminant D50 Delta E format dE CIE76 The Results area shows you whether or not the measured results are within the tolerances For more information on evaluating measurement data see Analyzing verification results on page 322 VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY IN A FIERY XF WORKFLOW 8 Do one of the following e Click Send On the File menu click Save to JDF and send Saving the measurement data to the JDF provides a record of the color accuracy You can save multiple sets of measurement data to one JDF file The measurement results are sent back to Fiery XF The results are displayed in Job Explorer on the appropriate Verify Control Strip pane i Gaa ed If color accuracy is approved the job receives the status Verified In this case the verification procedure is complete If color accuracy could not be approved the job receives the status Verification failed
204. ens ee The program window displays the jobs on the right and an empty layout plate on the left If Advanced Layout is not running when you export jobs from Fiery XF the plate has the same size as the media that is selected for the Fiery XF output device If Advanced Layout is already started the current plate size from Advanced Layout is used You can define a new plate size in Advanced Layout if required All workflow settings from Fiery XF that affect the job s appearance such as scaling and spot color definitions are exported with the job to Advanced Layout In contrast only a minimum of job settings are exported the scaling factor and the defined number of copies After you have created a smart nesting you can send it back to Fiery XF for printing For more information see the Advanced Layout help ONE BIT FILES ONE BIT FILES If you have a license for the OneBit Option you can process one bit files that have been produced by an imagesetter a platesetter or a digital print solution in the pre press industry To create one bit files these output devices have an integrated RIP that converts PostScript and PDF files into screen dots The screen dot information is saved in the form of one bit TIFF files one file for each color separation Since these files have already been RIPed by an external RIP the integrated RIP of Fiery XF is not applied during one bit file processing The necessary scree
205. ensions of the crop area Alternatively you can adjust the margin width between the edge of the image and the crop area Q amp 6 743 Inch O 2 243 Inch O 0 959 Inch E 5 162 Inch J 1 595 Inch O 4 297 Inch To cancel a selected crop area do one of the following Press lt Esc gt On the toolbar click Reset Right click anywhere in the preview window and click Cancel crop When you are satisfied with the size and position of the crop box proceed to the next step to crop the selected area EDITING JOBS Do one of the following e Press lt Enter gt e Double click the mouse button e Right click anywhere in the preview window and click Apply crop In the case of images with crop marks the crop marks are reapplied to the newly cropped area EDITING JOBS Aligning pages on the sheet You can realign and reposition pages on the sheet TO ALIGN PAGES ON THE SHEET 1 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job 2 Do one of the following e Align the page on the sheet On the Layout tab open the Layout Options pane Under Align page to sheet click a cell in the diagram You can align pages vertically and horizontally This setting takes the printer margins into account Vertical page alignment is not possible for roll media e Define job margins On the Layout tab open the Layout Options pane Under Job margin type margin widths in the appropriate boxes This sett
206. ependent spot colors Click OK COLOR EDITOR By selecting a workflow and a calibration set you can use Color Editor for the following purposes You can convert L a b spot colors into the color gamut of the selected printer It is easier to edit spot colors that are defined in the color space of the printer You can reduce delta E values of L a b spot colors by creating and applying a spot color optimization file A spot color optimization file is a correction profile that attempts to improve the color accuracy of the selected spot colors and their gradients The Preferences dialog box provides additional settings to help you to achieve exactly the right color You can open the Preferences dialog box from the New Table dialog box or you can make preference settings later in Color Editor For more information on the available settings see Preferences dialog box on page 279 Select None and click OK Select this setting to define spot colors that are not optimized for a particular printer Color Editor starts If you opened an existing spot color table the spot colors are displayed Preferences dialog box In the Preferences dialog box you can make general settings that are applied to all spot colors that you define in Color Editor The available settings are described in the following sections COLOR EDITOR TO OPEN THE PREFERENCES DIALOG BOX 1 Do one of the following F e On the toolbar click Pr
207. er On the System menu click Setup Wizard Windows or Setup Assistant Macintosh p i gt Introduction The Setup Wizard will guide you through all the settings necessary to print or proof your jobs The wizard is going to set up the 1 Workflow Click the window s cross button or press the Escape key to cancel Click Finish Now at any time to save the settings you have made so far Click Continue to begin CREATING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 Click Continue Soe O Step 1 of 5 Workflow Create a workflow Workfow Template ISO Coated v2 Offset Descripti CMYK source profile ISOcoated_v2_eci icc CMYK source RI absolute colorimetric Job ticket print default CMYK source profile TSOcoated_v2_ed icc CMYK rendering intent Absolute colorimetric paper white RGB source profile eGRGB_v2 icc RGB rendering intent Perceptual Simulation profile TSOcoated_v2_ed icc Simulation rendering intent Absolute colorimetric paper white Use embedded profiles No Working color space CMYK _Frsh now 3 Under Workflow select a workflow environment Proof Photo or Production Alternatively select Custom to create a workflow with no predefined industry specific settings 4 Under Template select the template that best suits your workflow requirements Fiery XF provides many default workflow templates Each has been set up with co
208. er 128 aligning 135 control strips 130 dynamic wedge 132 job ticket 129 layout 133 nestings 115 FOTOBA crop marks 226 G Gamut check spot colors 290 Gravure printing simulating 360 Grayscales converting to 178 Grommet marks 223 in Advanced Layout 248 H Halftone screening 343 files creating 348 Help 17 Hotfolder 183 creating 183 load balancing 355 I i cut marks 230 in Advanced Layout 248 Impure color removing black 176 process and secondary colors 176 In RIP separation 96 Installation folders default 363 Inverting color 178 ISO compliant proof achieving 312 320 J JDF 254 content files 259 job information 258 print MIS 255 ticket 259 391 Job canceling 33 composite overprinting in 100 copying 74 cropping 89 deleting 33 editing 85 high priority 357 JDF 257 loading 32 179 mirroring 86 moving 74 optimizing color accuracy 308 oversized printing 89 PostScript and PDF 94 printed length adjusting 360 printing 32 printing through Fiery XF 181 quality increasing 358 remote 338 resetting 33 rotating 85 scaling 86 separated 104 speed increasing 352 verifying color accuracy 308 Job Explorer 27 customizing 28 Job list customizing 73 display 74 thumbnails 74 Job merge 125 Job ticket 129 K Keyboard shortcuts 35 Knowledge Center 380 L Language 31 Licenses installation folder 367 installed 20 Licensing 40 problems with 372 regenerating a license file 45 Light conditions simulat
209. er of days has elapsed Type the time span in days e From a hotfolder Select the check box to delete source files from a hotfolder The setting you make for source file deletion is automatically applied to output and preview files 3 Under Output preview files specify when output and preview files are deleted Output and preview files can be deleted e Automatically after printing e After a certain number of days has elapsed Type the time span in days If you have previously made a setting to delete source files the same setting is automatically applied to output and preview files An independent setting is possible only if source files are never deleted TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING If you encounter problems while working with Fiery XF try performing the suggested solutions If the problem still persists contact EFI Support Server and logging on problems I cannot see the server user interface How can I log on Cause The server runs as a service so it has no user interface All actions are initiated from the client software Remedy To start the client do one of the following e Click the program icon on the desktop Windows or in the Dock Macintosh e Right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Fiery XF Client Start I am working with Windows The server does not accept any connection from a client What can I do Cause A firewall is set up which is blocking the communication Remedy Unlo
210. erence file is used instead e Under Target tolerance preset define the acceptable deviation for color accuracy Tolerance values define the maximum error margin that is acceptable when verifying the color accuracy of a printout against a reference For example if you define a tolerance limit of 3 a measured delta E of 2 5 would be accepted as color accurate whereas a delta E measurement of 3 2 would not be considered color accurate For more information see To set up a verify workflow on page 302 4 Save your changes TO PROCESS A REMOTE CONTAINER AT THE RECIPIENT SITE ag 2 t 3 The most accurate results are achieved if you use the same printer model and media that were used to create the original Color accuracy is further enhanced if both printers are optimally calibrated Load the remote container You can load a remote container from like any other job If the workflow is set up to print two control strips you can use one or both to verify color accuracy To deactivate a control strip clear the check box in the appropriate pane bar of the Verify tab Print the job After printing the job is automatically submitted to Verifier In the job list the job status changes to Can be verified Connect your measuring device to your computer VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY ACROSS SITES Start Verifier Do one of the following e On the toolbar click Verifier e On the Tools menu click Verifier
211. erent sites Remote containers are created either after the job has been printed or in a verify workflow after the control strip has been measured in Verifier and the results have been transmitted back to Fiery XF A remote container contains the following The job file PDE Image EPS or TIFF one bit only e AJDF file job settings and measurement data if available e Reference profiles e Control strips e Spot color table e L a b optimization optional You can load and process a remote container in any EFI proofing program Creating a remote container You can set up any workflow to create a remote container Alternatively you can create a new workflow using the workflow template Remote_Out_ ISOcoated_v2 This workflow is set up with all the basic settings You can modify the default workflow settings if required Whichever workflow you use make sure that the selected control strip is compatible with your measuring device For more information on selecting a control strip see Verify workflows in Fiery XF on page 301 TO SET UP A WORKFLOW TO CREATE A REMOTE CONTAINER If you set up a custom workflow make sure to include the following settings 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Output tab open the Remote File Output pane VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY ACROSS SITES 2 Set up the workflow to create a remote container automatically or manually e In an automatic work
212. erver folder only Program Files x86 EFI Fiery XF all other program folders Macintosh Applications EFI Fiery XF If you chose not to install Fiery XF at the default location all the program folders including the Server folder are installed in the user defined folder PROGRAM STRUCTURE e Program Files folder The Fiery XF folder contains the following subfolders Folder name Client Subfolder name Contains Program files for Fiery XF including additionally licensed options Documentation HTML Help files and PDF user manual IT8_CharacterizationData IT8 7 4 profiling charts for Fogra Proof Certification MonitorProfile Default and custom monitor profiles Samples e EFI Form_Offset reference test files e Lineal_01 ps for calculating media size correction e Print amp Cut test files e Test files for white ink printing EFI RGB Profile Connector Program files JDE Program files Application3 Program files relating to Verifier and Color Tools The it8 chart and characterization data files are located in subfolders Tools Program file for Fiery XF server information FograCert FograCert test forms for Fogra Proof Certification PPD PPDs Printer PnP Windows only Plug and play files for supported printers USB Measurement Devices Windows only Device drivers for supported
213. es RIP resolution The RIP resolution is the resolution that is used to process a job Afterwards the job is converted to the print resolution The RIP resolution affects the print speed and the print quality The higher the RIP resolution the better the print quality but the longer it takes to print the job Conversely a lower RIP resolution prints faster but results in a draft like print quality It is not possible to process a job at a higher RIP resolution than the print resolution Use this setting when processing one bit files A high RIP resolution ensures sharp dots in the output TO INCREASE THE RIP RESOLUTION 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Workflow tab open the Speed pane 2 Move the slider to High quality 3 Save your changes Bi directional printing You can deactivate bi directional printing for the workflow Bi directional printing is faster than unidirectional printing as the print head prints in both directions However the result may be less accurate Not all printers support bi directional printing IMPROVING PRINT QUALITY TO DEACTIVATE BI DIRECTIONAL PRINTING 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Workflow tab open the Speed pane 2 Clear Print bi directional 3 Save your changes Correcting the length of printed jobs You can compensate for any inconsistency in the length of the printed im
214. ess A lower setting results in lighter printouts because colors appear more opaque and hide parts of other colors For more information see Overprinting in composite jobs on page 100 Gamma Modify the dot gain simulation for overprinting spot colors This setting is applied to areas with a mixture of spot colors and process colors or to areas that consist of more than one spot color It lets you define non linear behavior for overprinting Method Overprinting in the CMYK color space is based on a simple CMYK addition In the L a b color space the default setting is based on the Bradford and ROMM chromatic adaptation transforms CATs CATs are able to predict corresponding colors under different illuminantion sources Fiery XF supports many different chromatic adaptation models including Bradford CAT XYZ Scaling vonKries and Sharp CAT Select a CAT to define the overprint behavior of L a b colors You can accentuate the brightness of overprinted colors that are very similar to each other for example yellow on yellow or magenta on red e White point settings The color tint of the media is known as the white point The white point of the print media affects the color accuracy of the printout Particularly in a proofing workflow it is important to be able to simulate accurately the color tint of the final media Use a measuring device to measure the media white point The measured white point is taken into ac
215. esult by performing a job specific optimization This process optimizes the job s color management by creating a correction profile that is a better match for the color gamut of the simulation reference profile Click Optimize and reprint the job to the Caddon can view cabinet Then repeat the verify procedure For more information see To verify the color accuracy of a job on page 308 You can open and analyze the measurement data in Verifier for example to compare against a simulation reference profile For more information see To verify the color accuracy of a job on page 308 CROP MARKS 221 CROP MARKS Crop marks are lines that are printed at the corners of a page a sheet or a tile to indicate E where to trim Types of crop marks Standard TO SET UP CROP MARKS m 2 Corner 3 Frame 4 Tombo 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Finishing tab open the Crop Marks pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Finishing tab open the Crop Marks pane 2 On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings 3 Select Page Marks Sheet Marks or Tile Marks Multiple selections are possible Sheets marks are available for nestings only Bleed 1 Add frame 2 Cut image ve CROP MARKS 222 4 Select a crop marks type Choose between Standard Corner Frame and
216. et Click Edit to review or edit the default job ticket settings Job Ticket Editor Preset No presets available X Delete Job Ticket Image Fiery_Logo tif M Upload Delete TIFF JPG max 5cm x 5cm y TicketLline1 Document name V File Name E File format E Job ID V Date and time of print Ticket Line 2 VJ ICC profile names V Rendering intents 7 Linearization E Visual correction 6 FOOTER 130 The job ticket settings are arranged on panes You can expand or collapse the settings for each pane by clicking anywhere in the pane bar By default the job ticket includes the Fiery logo You can replace the Fiery logo with your own image file by clicking Upload and browsing to an image file You can upload any image file in JPEG or TIFF format Alternatively if you do not want to include an image select None The maximum permitted image size is 5 x 5 cm If you upload a file that exceeds these dimensions it will be scaled proportionally so that either the width or the height is reduced to 5 cm Images that are smaller than 5 x 5 cm are output in their original size Images are always output color managed providing color management is activated Select the appropriate check boxes to specify the content of lines 1 to 6 Line 6 has room for custom text If you work regularly with different job tickets it is a good idea to save your
217. et Output Print bco files Preview Preview files Profiles Profiles and files that affect the color output Balance Default 3cc files vcc and vpe files Monitor Monitor profiles Reference e Profiles that are in common use in the industry e Device link profiles Reference Additional Additional reference profiles that are in common use around the world Spotcolor Spot color tables SpotColorOptimization Spot color optimization files Remote Remote containers rpf files Screening Screening files spt Tickets Record of all actions taken in Fiery XF Control Important for support cases PROGRAM STRUCTURE e Media profiles Media profiles are installed in the following folders Windows ProgramData EFI EFI Media Profiles Macintosh Library Application Support EFI EFI Media Profiles e License files License files are installed in the following folders Windows Program Files FlexLM Macintosh Applications FlexLM Changing the profile folders and system folders You can redefine the path to important server folders and select a new location for media profiles reference profiles the JobFolder output files and temporary files including CPSI and APPE files As an example you can move media profiles to a different partition to free up disk space on the C drive TO MOVE THE PROFILE FOLDERS AND SYSTEM FOLDERS TO A DIFFERENT LOCATION 1 Right click the Fiery
218. evice On the Device tab open the Connection pane and set up the printer For more information on individual settings see the context sensitive help On the Media tab open the Print Configuration pane and select a media For more information on individual settings see the context sensitive help CUTTING OPTIONS 4 On the Special tab open the Special Printer Settings pane Under Contour cutting select a mode The following settings are available Print mode Description Print Prints the job but does not cut the contour data Print amp Cut Prints the job and cuts the contour data Cut only Cuts the contour data but does not create a printout 5 Save your changes TO PRINT AND CUT IN ONE STEP Perform the following steps to cut the job immediately after printing Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Finishing tab open the Cut pane On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings Under Device manufacturer select None Under Contour cutting click Extract contour path from EPS PDF If you do not extract the contour path from EPS PDF jobs or if the job does not contain a contour path the bounding box is automatically used as the cut contour Define non default cut contours optional The cut contours you define in System Manager are automatically applied to all workflows It is useful to define cut contours i
219. evice are created in System Manager The linearization workflow must be connected to the linearization device Only users with administrator rights can print jobs via this system configuration When you use Color Tools you are required to print charts and to measure the color patches The charts are automatically processed via the linearization workflow and printed out on the linearization device During this process all color management settings profiles and rendering intents from the workflow are ignored since they affect the color output When you create a base linearization file it is important that all color measurements are based solely on the color capabilities of the printer CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES Setting up the linearization device Before you can start Color Tools you must first configure the linearization device The linearization device must be set up with exactly the same settings as the output device whose color reproduction properties you want to optimize If you have already set up an output device you can transfer the settings to the linearization device This is a quick way to set up the linearization device if you want to create a new base linearization file or if you want to optimize an existing media profile Afterwards the appropriate color tool starts automatically You can also set up the linearization device manually like any other output device In this case Color Tools does not start automaticall
220. example Fogra39 it8 for ISOcoated_v2_eci icc For more information see To load measurement data on page 334 For the second set of measurement values M2 Click Measure and measure the media wedge On the File menu click Save optional You can save a record of the measurement data to txt or to csv format The file can be opened in any EFI proofing software For more information see Saving and loading measurement data on page 333 Analyze the results For more information see Analyzing verification results on page 322 VERIFIER 322 To VERIFY ISO 12647 7 COMPLIANCY BY COMPARING MEASUREMENT DATA WITH REFERENCE DATA 1 2 Start Verifier Open the Preferences dialog box On the Comparison Settings tab Select ISO 12647 7 Contract Proof Media Wedge Click OK to close the Preferences dialog box For the first set of measurement values M1 Click Open and load the Ugra Fogra media wedge measurement data For the second set of measurement values M2 Click Open From the Fogra_MKCheck11 folder load a Fogra characterization data set for example Fogra39 it8 for ISOcoated_v2_eci icc Analyze the results For more information see Analyzing verification results on page 322 Analyzing verification results When you have obtained measurement data you can analyze the result Results area The Results tab contains a summary of the overall result If any of
221. f grommet marks If no grommet marks are required along one edge type 0 in the appropriate box e Define the distance between grommet marks along each edge This setting can result in a larger gap between the last grommet mark and the corner of the image if the length of the page or sheet is not exactly divisible by the defined distance 8 Save your changes GROMMET MARKS If you work regularly with different grommet marks it is a good idea to save each group of settings as a preset A preset is a template for a group of settings that are saved under a unique name You can create presets in the pane bar menu The next time you set up grommet marks you need only to select the preset name FOTOBA CROP MARKS FOTOBA CROP MARKS If you have a license for the Cut Marks Option you can print FOTOBA crop marks FOTOBA crop marks are designed to enable precise positioning of the cutting blade on each device The Cut Marks Option provides full support for Digitrim devices as well as for XL and WR roll cutters To seT uP FOTOBA CROP MARKS 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Finishing tab open the Crop Marks pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Finishing tab open the Crop Marks pane 2 On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings 3 Select Page Marks Sheet Marks or Tile Marks 4 Multiple s
222. f your jobs always use the same names e Under the table click Add A new row is added to the contour colors table e In the Contour source column overwrite Enter spot color name with the exact name of the cut contour from the graphics program Then press lt Enter gt If your jobs are often created with different cut contour names you can select them on a job to job basis in Job Explorer For more information see Managing cut contours on page 240 If you work regularly with different types of cut marks it is a good idea to save each group of settings as a preset A preset is a template for a group of settings that are saved under a unique name You can create presets in the pane bar menu The next time you set up cut marks you need only to select the preset name 7 Save your changes CUTTING OPTIONS TO PRINT AND CUT IN TWO STEPS Perform the following steps to cut the job as a separate step For example use this method if you want to laminate your job before cutting e To print the job Go to System Manager In the layout area click the output device and open the Special tab Under Contour cutting select the print mode Print Then click Enable printer cut marks In the layout area click the workflow On the Finishing tab open the Cut pane On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings Under Contour cutting click Extract contour path from EPS
223. flow a remote container is created automatically after printout or in a verify workflow after the control strip has been measured in Verifier and the results have been transmitted back to Fiery XF e Ina manual workflow you can create a remote container in Job Explorer when you are ready For more information on individual settings see the context sensitive help 3 Save your changes TO CREATE A REMOTE CONTAINER MANUALLY Remote containers can be created manually from PDF Image EPS and TIFF jobs only Follow this procedure if the workflow has been set up to create remote containers manually 1 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Output tab open the Remote File Output pane 2 Click Manually Then complete the rest of your settings on this pane For more information on individual settings see the context sensitive help 3 Do one of the following On the Output tab open the File Output pane and click Create Now e In the job list right click the job and click Create Remote Container Processing a remote job at the recipient site You can load a remote container in any EFI proofing product The information that is saved to the remote container enables you to print and verify the color accuracy of the original at different sites TO SET UP THE WORKFLOW AT THE RECIPIENT SITE You can import a remote container into any workflow However in this case a few settings are necessary as describ
224. g is provided for production applications to help you to set up a workflow for jobs with i cut level cut marks On the Finishing tab open the Cut pane On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings Under Device manufacturer select iCut Under Device type select i cut Under Cut marks type select an i cut type Choose from i cut filled i cut reverse or i cut ring Do one of the following Define how many i cut marks are positioned along the horizontal and vertical edges of the image The minimum number of i cut marks is two vertical and two horizontal e Define the distance between two i cut marks along each edge of the image This setting can result in a larger gap between the last i cut mark and the corner of the image if the length of the edge is not exactly divisible by the defined distance Click Print with tinted background optional On some media types the cut marks can be difficult to see This setting overcomes the problem by printing the cut marks on a yellowish background Click Print between layout elements optional This setting prints cut marks between nested pages and step and repeat elements 10 11 12 CUTTING OPTIONS Define a bleed setting optional The bleed setting repositions the i cut marks in relation to the image The i cut marks are an orientation guide for the cutting machine By adding a frame aro
225. g box is automatically used as the cut contour CUTTING OPTIONS 9 Define non default cut contours optional The cut contours you define in System Manager are automatically applied to all workflows It is useful to define cut contours if your jobs always use the same names e Under the table click Add A new row is added to the contour colors table In the Contour source column overwrite Enter spot color name with the exact name of the cut contour from the graphics program Then press lt Enter gt In the Method column double click the selected item Then click the down arrow and click a different cutting method optional If your jobs are often created with different cut contour names you can select them on a job to job basis in Job Explorer For more information see Managing cut contours on page 240 If you work regularly with different types of cut marks it is a good idea to save each group of settings as a preset A preset is a template for a group of settings that are saved under a unique name You can create presets in the pane bar menu The next time you set up cut marks you need only to select the preset name 10 Save your changes TO SET UP CUT SERVER 1 Start Cut Server Do one of the following M e Double click the program icon on the desktop a e Click the Start button point to All Programs click EFI click EFI Cut Server and click EFI Cut Server The EFI Cut
226. ge 23 Keyboard shortcuts Keyboard shortcuts are available for many operations In the main they correspond to the shortcuts that you will already be familiar with from popular graphics programs In the case of key combinations many of the shortcuts that can be applied to individual images can also be applied to multiple job selections on a nesting e Activating options Function Function key Start Color Tools lt F2 gt lt Fn gt lt F2 gt Start Verifier lt F3 gt lt Fn gt lt F3 gt GETTING TO KNOW FIERY XF Function Function key Start Color Editor lt F4 gt lt Fn gt lt F4 gt Start Dot Creator lt F5 gt lt Fn gt lt F5 gt Start EFI XF Uploader lt F7 gt lt Fn gt lt F7 gt Start Media Mapper lt F9 gt lt Fn gt lt F9 gt e Activating toolbars Function Function key Transform toolbar lt T gt Crop toolbar lt C gt Edit tiling toolbar lt E gt Zoom toolbar lt Z gt General Function Key combination Switch between Job Explorer and lt F6 gt System Manager Show server information lt F10 gt lt Fn gt lt F10 gt Show shortcut menu for a selected page Edit menu Right mouse click on a page Show shortcut menu for a selected sheet Nesting menu Right mouse click on a sheet Show shortcut menu View lt Shift gt right mouse click on a sheet menu Select page Click on page
227. ger or you can select it in Job Explorer When defined in System Manager the cut contour becomes globally available for all future jobs if you select a cut contour for a loaded job in Job Explorer it is valid for the current job only Fiery XF must handle all cut contours separately In RIP separation ensures that the cut contour can be exported as a separated file If a cut contour cannot be detected in Fiery XF the layer is processed as if it were a spot color in a composite job For more information on defining cut contours in Fiery XF see i cut cutter on page 230 Ziind Cut Center on page 233 Print and cut device on page 235 and Cut Server on page 237 CUTTING OPTIONS Cut contours around bounding box level 1 cut If a cutter is set up in Fiery XF you can automatically create cut contours around non vector graphics For example if you load a TIFF job Fiery XF creates a cut contour around the document Many different cutting methods are available depending on the selected cutting device To select a cutting method go to System Manager On the Finishing tab open the Cut pane In the Contour source column of the contour colors table select Bounding Box In the Method column double click the selected item Then click the down arrow and click a different cutting method Setting up the cutter in Fiery XF i cut 1 2 i cut level 1 in a nesting i cut level 2 Fiery XF can
228. gle into a USB port on the computer that is running the Fiery XF server software Ensure that only the Fiery XF dongle is plugged into your computer It can lead to problems if multiple dongles are plugged in The dongle can take up to one minute to be detected so wait before performing the next step 2 Right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Show dongle ID TO GENERATE AND INSTALL A NEW LICENSE FILE AUTOMATICALLY REQUIRES INTERNET ACCESS Use this method if the computer that is running the Fiery XF server software has Internet access If you are upgrading from an earlier version of the software make sure that you do NOT delete the existing license files from the FlexLM folder They are required in addition to the new license file s If you are extending an existing configuration of Fiery XF with additional options make sure to exit all client versions of the software before starting the following procedure 1 Make sure that the dongle is correctly plugged into a USB port on the computer 2 Start the Activation Wizard Assistant Do one of the following e Right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Activate Fiery XF e Go to System Manager On the System menu click Activation Wizard SS 0 0tswst 3 Click the Automatically tab La ElActivation wird J Activate Fiery XF Before you can start Fiery XF you need to register the software using the EAC code Entitlement Access Code provided with the produ
229. gt lt gt e lt Apple gt lt gt Override snap to lt Shift gt drag cursor LICENSING LICENSING 40 Fiery XF is a modular based software designed to guarantee that you receive a product tailored to meet your individual workflow needs The license management system ensures that only those options that make up your chosen configuration are visible in the software A so called EAC Entitlement Access Code is provided when you purchase Fiery XF or an additional option The EAC contains information about the product and output options that you have purchased The EAC is printed on the Product Activation Certificate If the Product Activation Certificate is missing from the scope of delivery contact your dealer for assistance A dongle is also shipped with the software Each dongle is unique and can be identified by its electronically integrated ID The licensing procedure uses the dongle ID to create a fixed link between the software and the dongle The number of license files you require depends on the particular software configuration you have purchased If a license file is not detected when you launch Fiery XF that part of the software will not be available If no license files are detected Fiery XF will not start and an error message will appear A license file is generated during product registration To generate a license file you require a computer with Internet access Licensing the softwa
230. h color management to check the accuracy of the media profile If the selected profiles and rendering intents are not applied to the control strip the color patches are printed using the full color gamut of the printer Clear Print with color management to check the color consistency of two printers e Select whether the control strip is printed for each page or for each sheet By default control strips are printed for each page However for nestings you can print control strips for each page of the nesting and or for the whole nesting Dynamic wedges can be created only for pages 8 On the Verify tab open the Verify Control Strip 1 pane 9 On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY IN A FIERY XF WORKFLOW 10 Do the following Select Stop job printing after first job fails verification optional If one job fails verification you can prevent successive jobs in the job list that will also inevitably fail verification from being unnecessarily printed This situation can occur for example if the wrong media is loaded in the printer Select Print label after verification automatically optional Some printers with an integrated measuring device can print out a label with the results of the color verification The label includes all the necessary ISO 12647 7 8 compliant information and is printed regardless of whether the job passes color verification or no
231. he Profile tab open the User Account pane e Define a password Then confirm it by re typing it in the appropriate box You can also change existing user passwords in this way However be aware that if you change the default password of the user admin and if the user admin is the only user with administrator rights you will no longer be able to access System Manager if the password is misplaced e Select a user role Administrators are permitted to create set up and manage system configurations in System Manager and to load jobs and make job specific settings in Job Explorer Users are permitted only to load jobs and make job specific settings in Job Explorer On the Profile tab open the Workspace pane and assign a workspace A workspace is a custom view of Fiery XF It defines the basic areas of Fiery XF that each user can see The predefined workspaces provide access to a specific range of Fiery XF features e FULL provides access to Fiery XF s full range of licensed features e PRODUCTION provides access to all settings that are required in a production workflow but hides those settings that are specifically aimed at a proofing environment e PROOFING provides access to all settings that are required in a proofing workflow but hides those settings that are specifically aimed at a production environment You can also create and assign custom workspaces For more information see Creating workspaces on page 68
232. he device link profile is listed under the name that you defined in Profile Connector Fiery XF displays an appropriate message when a device link profile is selected 3 Save your changes TO SELECT A DEVICE LINK PROFILE TO OUTPUT TO FILE If you have a license for the File Output Option you can output jobs to TIFF or PDF format For more information on setting up an output device to print to file see Printing to file on page 212 To output to a file format the device link profile must be saved to the Reference folder For more information see Program structure on page 363 Go to System Manager In the layout area click an output device On the Device tab open the Connection pane Under Connection type select Use device link profile Under Device link profile select the name of the device link profile The device link profile is listed under the name that you defined in Profile Connector Fiery XF displays an appropriate message when a device link profile is selected Under Profile select a simulation reference profile This profile is applied to jobs if they were created in a different color space from the source profile that is incorporated into the device link profile Select Keep input resolution for non PostScript files optional This setting is useful if you want to convert a set of digital files to a single color space without affecting the resolution size of the origin
233. he perceived differences in lightness dE 2000 varies the weighting of L depending on where in the lightness range the color falls Delta E 94 A tolerancing system that uses three dimensional ellipsoids as containers for color acceptance CIE 94 is similar to CMC but lacks some of the hue lightness adjustments CIE 94 colors have 95 agreement with color differences as our eyes see them CIE 94 is used predominantly in the paint and coatings industry Delta E CIE 76 A color model that is based on the model proposed by the Commission Internationale d Eclairage CIE in 1931 as an international standard for color measurement In 1976 this model was refined and named CIELAB L a b color is designed to be device independent and perceptually uniform L a b color consists of a luminance or lightness component L and two chromatic components the a component from green to red and the b component from blue to yellow Delta E CMC A tolerancing system that is based on CIELCH It portrays colors as three dimensional ellipsoids and represents colors as they are interpreted by the human eye CMC colors have 95 agreement with color differences as our eyes see them CMC is used predominantly in the textile industry Delta H Delta H Delta T GLOSSARY The difference in hue In a color wheel hue is defined by the angle between two colors b 90 a 0 See also Hue The ISO 12647 norm defines delta T purely as a
234. hieving an ISO 12647 7 compliant proof 312 VERIFIER 313 Starting Verifier 314 Setting up Verifier 315 Achieving an ISO 12647 7 compliant proof 320 Analyzing verification results 322 Printing verification results 327 Customizing the Verifier user interface 328 General settings 331 Saving and loading measurement data 333 Logging on to a different Fiery XF server 335 12 VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY ACROSS SITES 337 Creating a remote container 337 Processing a remote job at the recipient site 338 DoT CREATOR 343 Halftone screening 343 Screening methods in Fiery XF 344 Starting Dot Creator 347 Creating screening files 348 Incorporating a screening file into a media profile 350 Changing screen angles 351 INCREASING JOB SPEED 352 General tips 352 RIP and print on the fly 353 RIP resolution 353 Bi directional printing 354 Adobe print engines 354 Multi threaded halftone processing 354 Load balancing 355 High priority printing 357 IMPROVING PRINT QUALITY 358 General tips 358 RIP and print on the fly 359 RIP resolution 359 Bi directional printing 359 Correcting the length of printed jobs 360 Simulating distinctive print characteristics 360 Simulating light conditions 362 PROGRAM STRUCTURE 363 Default folders 363 Changing the profile folders and system folders 367 CLEANING UP FIERY XF 368 TROUBLESHOOTING 370 Server and logging on problem
235. hite point describes the whiteness of the paper In colorimetric terms the white point is defined as the chromaticity of a white light source or other emissive object The white point may be expressed in terms of correlated color temperature or chromaticity coordinates A device independent color model developed by CIE Commission Internationale de l Eclairage in which RGB values are mathematically transformed into a system that uses x y and z as coordinates While x and z values have no specific perceptual correlation the y value represents brightness luminance INDEX A Adobe print engines 94 increasing number of 354 switching between 94 Advanced Layout 248 Aligning footer 135 nested pages 115 pages 77 Alignment tools 77 APPE 94 Backup and restore 261 Base linearization file creating 150 editing 150 158 Bi directional printing activating 354 deactivating 359 Black ink removing color impurities 176 0 Calibration set 137 Canceling jobs 33 Changes saving 32 undoing 33 Color corrections 163 impurities removing 176 inverting 178 Color accuracy optimizing 308 tweeking colors 175 verifying 308 at remote site 338 Color adjustments 175 Color consistency verifying 301 across sites 337 Color Editor settings 279 starting 277 Color gamut 136 comparing 160 Color management 136 presets 138 problems with 377 Color space working 99 Color Tools 148 Composite jobs overprintingin 100 Connecting system configu
236. ialog box By default Unidriver is installed as the default printer If you do not want Unidriver to be the default printer do the following Click Start click Devices and Printers right click the printer that you want to make the default printer and click Set as default printer PRINTING THROUGH UNIDRIVER TO PRINT A JOB Macintosh By default jobs are printed according to the workflow settings in Fiery XF In Unidriver you can apply job settings that override the workflow settings The actual steps that you need to perform may vary slightly from the description below depending on the graphics program that you are using In the graphics program open the job file and select the print command In the print dialog box select the Unidriver printer Do one of the following e Ifyou do not need to make job settings in Unidriver click OK to print your job If an error message informs you that the login failed click OK Make sure that the Fiery XF server is running Then click Connect and log on to Fiery XF e To view or to make changes to Unidriver settings before printing click Preferences Properties or similar The Unidriver Preferences dialog box appears Select a different workflow or change settings as required To apply your changes click Use my settings You can revert to the Fiery XF workflow settings by clearing the Use my settings check box This section provides instructions on how to install
237. ick Color Editor The Spot Color Table dialog box appears COLOR EDITOR 2 Do one of the following e Select a previously created spot color table and click OK Select this setting to add new spot colors to an existing spot color table In most cases it is recommended that you save all spot colors to one spot color table You can open any spot color table in CXF BCT ICC or TAB format e Select Create a new spot color table and click OK Select this setting to define spot colors that are optimized to the color gamut of your printer The New Table dialog box appears Color Editor New Table ICT Create a new spot color table Name Untitled Workflow Select workflow X Printer Calibration set Use default preset EPL name Color space Preferences Type a unique name for the spot color table Select a Fiery XF workflow Color Editor retrieves information about the color space and the color gamut of the printer that is connected to the workflow Color Editor uses this information to check whether new spot colors can be correctly reproduced by the printer There is no need to select a workflow if the spot color table will be used for more than one workflow Select a calibration set The calibration set defines the settings for ink type media name and base linearization file for the selected printer The calibration set is important for defining printer d
238. ick the Automatically tab Activate EFI XF Additionally purchased options must be registered in the Activation Wizard Assistant After installing the license you need to restart the Fiery XF server to activate the additional options Itis not necessary to install any additional software Consult your authorized dealer if you wish to purchase additional options How would you like to activate Automatically Manually Dongle ID 1965286422 Generate and activate new license Sends AC code and dongle ID to the EFI Activation Server then do the erated license file and instal computer Enter your EAC code You will find the EAC code inside the product packaging Continue With User Details Download previously created license Use this option if you just want to download again a previously generated license Download Activated Licenses 4 Select Download previously created license and click Download Activated Licenses A license file is created and downloaded to the FlexLM folder on your computer 5 Click Finish to exit the Activation Wizard Assistant If problems arise when trying to download a license file using this method you can regenerate a license file from the activation website instead For more information see To generate a new license file through the activation website on page 43 You may need to restart the Fiery XF server if the license is not automatically detect
239. ick the down arrow and click a different cutting method optional Advanced settings are available for some cutting methods Click the pen button to open the Advanced contour settings dialog box You can change the line length the bit diameter the grooving angle and the z depth e Inthe Mode column double click Standard Then click the down arrow and click a mode optional The mode affects speed and quality The speed setting ensures that the printout is cut as quickly as possible but it may not be exact With the quality setting the cut is more precise but it takes longer If your jobs are often created with different cut contour names you can select them on a job to job basis in Job Explorer For more information see Managing cut contours on page 240 If you work regularly with different types of cut marks it is a good idea to save each group of settings as a preset A preset is a template for a group of settings that are saved under a unique name You can create presets in the pane bar menu The next time you set up cut marks you need only to select the preset name Save your changes Print and cut device Fiery XF enables you to print and cut register marks with a wide range of different y y P 8 8 print and cut devices Print and cut devices must be set up in Fiery XF as a printer TO SET UP A PRINT AND CUT DEVICE AS A PRINTER 1 2 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the output d
240. icket If the job ticket information can be displayed in less than 5 cm you can reduce the ticket height to prevent unwanted white space between job ticket and a control strip that is below it The default height is 5 cm If a job ticket exceeds the defined ticket height it is cropped Type in a font size You can specify any font size between 6 pt and 72 pt Save your changes For nestings you may need to update the preview FOOTER 135 TO REALIGN THE FOOTER IN RELATION TO THE SHEET Changing the page alignment does not automatically change the footer alignment For example the footer remains left aligned on the sheet even if the page is centered You can apply the alignment setting to both page and footer In this case page and footer are realigned as if they were grouped together 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job 2 On the Layout tab open the Layout Options pane 3 Click Align footer In a nesting this setting is applied to the nesting footer but not to the footers of nested pages 4 Save your changes For nestings you may need to update the preview SELECTING PROFILES AND RENDERING INTENTS SELECTING PROFILES AND RENDERING INTENTS The primary goal of color management is to obtain a good match across color devices no easy feat when you consider that different devices use different color spaces
241. ied to the alias also By creating an alias you can ensure that exactly the same color values are used for both spot colors without renaming the spot color in the graphics application TO CREATE A SPOT COLOR ALIAS 1 Start Color Editor For more information see Starting Color Editor on page 277 2 Under My Custom Spot Colors select a spot color COLOR EDITOR 3 Under Use as alias for click the button The Select Alias dialog box appears a5 Color Editor lela x File Edit Aa EBRD Applied to 0 workflows ia Search E Spot color name Description Company_Color_2 Color Name i E My Custom Spot Colors Color Definition Characterization Gradation Company_Color_1 4 Use as alias for Apply as 7 Company Coro Z K Simek Aar a e None m E HKS Color System 4 TOYO Color System E DIC Color System El Pantone Color System PANTONE YELLOW C Internal Name My Custom Spot Colors 8 PANTONE YELLOW012C Internal Company_Color_1 PANTONE ORANGE 021 Internal E Pantone Color System 4 HKS Color System PANTONE RED 032 C Internal E TOYO Color System E DIC Color System E PRINTER Color System PANTONE WARM RED C Internal PANTONE RUBINE RED C Internal PANTONE RHODAMINE RED Internal PANTONE PURPLE C Internal PANTONE VIOLET C Internal PANTONE BLUE 072 C Internal PANTONE REFLEX BLUE C Internal P
242. iery XF It enables you to post questions that are related to any area of Fiery XF directly to members of the EFI team Furthermore it permits open discussion with other forum members and thus provides an ideal platform for communicating with other users To register as a forum member visit our website at http proofingforums efi com Fiery Global University Fiery Global University is an easy to use self paced Internet based platform that delivers around the clock training content whenever you need it It provides training videos to help you to get to grips with some of the more difficult features of Fiery XF To visit the Fiery Global University visit our website at http w3 efi com en Fiery dm promo fiery global university UNINSTALLING UNINSTALLING This section describes how to uninstall Fiery XF including licensed options and freely available tools and media profiles TO UNINSTALL IN WINDOWS 1 Open Control Panel 2 Do one of the following e Windows 7 8 Under Programs click Uninstall a program e Windows Server 2008 Click Software 3 In the list of installed programs click the program that you want to uninstall 4 Do one of the following e Windows 7 8 Click Uninstall e Windows Server 2008 Click Remove 5 Follow the on screen instructions to complete the procedure After uninstalling make sure that you restart your computer before reinstalling the software TO UNINSTALL ON MACINTOSH 1 Insert the
243. iew file is created in the Server Preview folder Temporary files Various temporary files are created in the Server Temp folder Spot color tables A spot color table is created in the Server Profiles Spotcolor folder when you define a spot color Every time you save changes a new spot color is created with a consecutive number added to its name Spot color tables that are currently in use cannot be cleaned up Job list You can delete all jobs from the job list However the job list cannot be deleted if jobs are currently being processed Log files Log files are created in the Server Log folder They provide a record of all Fiery XF processes and are required by EFI Support to assist with problem solving TO DELETE FILES IMMEDIATELY Follow this procedure to delete output files preview files temporary files spot color tables all jobs from the job list or log files 1 Go to System Manager On the System menu point to Clean Up and click an item Alternatively click All to delete all types of files CLEANING UP FIERY XF TO DELETE FILES AFTER A SPECIFIED CRITERION HAS BEEN MET Follow this procedure to delete source files output files and preview files 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Workflow tab open the Basic Information pane 2 Under Source files specify when sources files are deleted Source files can be deleted e Automatically after printing e After a certain numb
244. ile has also been saved to Server Backup Backup location x VUsers sara Desktop Select Save Cancel 2 Select the check boxes of the items you want to back up The server configuration is saved by default 3 Define a backup location By default system configuration backups are saved to two destinations the Backup folder and the desktop To change the second destination click Select and browse to a new destination 4 Click Save A dialog box appears when the backup has been successfully saved 5 Click OK to complete the backup procedure TO RESTORE A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Restoring a system configuration causes all existing files of the same name to be overwritten All non backed up user workflow and printer setups are reset to their default values 1 Go to System Manager On the File menu click Restore The Restore dialog box appears It displays the contents of the Backup folder 2 Click the backup file If the folder is empty click Choose and browse to the backup file Unless you defined a different destination during the backup procedure the file is located on the desktop Select the backup file and click Open 3 Click OK A dialog box appears when the backup has been successfully restored BACKUP AND RESTORE 4 Click OK and then restart the Fiery XF server to view the restored system configuration Saving an environment An environment backup saves e All workflow settings including s
245. ile is created In this case the separation with the cut contour is printed out composite Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Finishing tab open the Cut pane Under Contour cutting clear Extract contour path from EPS PDF Save your changes Print the job To EXCLUDE THE COLOR SEPARATION WITH THE CUT CONTOUR FROM THE OUTPUT You can output a job that excludes the separation with the cut contour layer 1 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Color tab open the Spot Colors pane CUTTING OPTIONS 2 In the spot color table clear the check box for the cut contour Source Map to PANTONE 208 PANTONE PANTONE 208 C PANTONE 433 PANTONE PANTONE 433 C PANTONE 254 PANTONE PANTONE 254 C PANTONE 2617 PANTONE PANTONE 2617 C PANTONE 234 PANTONE PANTONE 234C PANTONE2755 PANTONE PANTONE 2755C PANTONE WARM RED C 3 Save your changes 4 Print the job The separation with the cut contour is excluded from the output The cut contour is neither extracted from the job nor is it printed composite TO REMOVE VISIBLE CONTOUR MARKINGS FROM THE OUTPUT Normally contour markings are not visible in the printout However occasionally the contour may be seen as a white outline This is because the overprinting attribute of most contours is set to knock out and not to overprint In this case you need to open the file in an external program such as Enfocus PitSto
246. ile that provides a better match for the color gamut of the media profile 6 Click OK Opening a spot color table You can open an existing spot color table to make edits TO OPEN A SPOT COLOR TABLE 1 Start Color Editor For more information see Starting Color Editor on page 277 2 Do one of the following ai e On the toolbar click Open e On the File menu click Open 3 From the list select a spot color table The following file formats are supported CXF BCT ICC and TAB 4 Click Open Replacing spot color names You can rename custom spot colors by replacing all or part of the name TO REPLACE A SPOT COLOR NAME 1 Start Color Editor For more information see Starting Color Editor on page 277 COLOR EDITOR 2 Do one of the following e On the toolbar click Find and replace e On the Edit menu click Find and Replace The Find and Replace dialog box appears 3 Under Find what type the name of the spot color whose name you want to replace You can also search for parts of a name For example if you search for 2013 Color Editor will find all spot colors with 2013 anywhere in their name 4 Under Replace with type the new name Color Editor will replace all instances of the search word 5 Specify your search options optional You can modify your search by taking upper lower case characters into account or by searching for a full name only 6 Click the appropriate b
247. imizing 294 overprint settings 281 printer inks using 268 287 printing undefined 271 renaming 297 search order 273 undetected 266 white point definition 281 Starting Fiery XF client 22 Fiery XF server 22 Step and repeats 122 editing 123 renaming 124 setting up 122 Support 379 Supported file formats 32 System configuration backup and restore 261 linearization workflow 147 online offline 61 setting up in Setup Wizard Assistant 49 in System Manager 54 System Manager 29 customizing 54 System of measurement 31 System requirements 15 T Thumbnails 74 TIFE IT jobs 103 Tilings 116 editing 118 exporting settings 121 locked tile sizes 120 setting up 116 tile sizes 118 tiles hiding 121 merging 120 printing 121 splitting 120 Troubleshooting 370 U Undoing changes 33 Unidriver printing through 189 Uninstalling 381 Updating Fiery XF 166 media profiles 168 USB devices problems with 379 User forum 380 User interface 27 language 31 system of measurement 31 User setting up 55 V Verification results analyzing 322 approving 318 printing 327 Verifier brightness settings 332 color accuracy across sites 338 delta E format 332 in a remote environment 337 logging on to Fiery XF 335 measurement data loading and saving 333 settings 315 starting 314 Virtual printer printing through 202 setting up in Fiery XF 201 Visual aids 77 Visual color corrections 163 Ww White point definition spot colors 281 Windows
248. ing Hue jdf L a b A process by which a continuous tone image is converted into a pattern of regularly spaced dots The individual dots all have the same density but vary in size The color tone of a printed area is dictated by the size of the printed dots the larger the dots the darker the reproduced color tone The dominant wavelength of a color A color system or model measures color by hue saturation and luminance The hue is the predominant color such as yellow or green the saturation is the color intensity and the luminance is the brightness Job Definition Format A file format used in the graphics industry to standardize communication between the individual pre press print and further processing stages The jdf file contains all the settings made in an EFI proofing product that affect color reproduction including print resolution and media See CIELAB Moir Page pdf GLOSSARY 386 An interference pattern caused by incorrect selection of halftone screen angles relative to each other Moir can be minimized by keeping a 30 degree angle between the separate halftone screens However with a total of four colors and 90 degrees of angle to play with this is not possible To overcome this issue yellow the lightest and least visible color is often positioned only 15 degrees away from cyan and the halftone angles are rotated 7 5 degrees from the vertical axis eiigtiree setter sets oP a a e e e a
249. ing 362 Linearization device setting up 148 Load balancing 355 Loading jobs 32 179 Logging off 35 Logging on 23 M Marks crop 221 FOTOBA 226 grommet 223 i cut 230 Measurement units changing 31 Media profiles creating 152 with third party software 174 installation folder 367 optimizing 153 problems with 378 selecting 137 third party 170 updating 168 Media wedges selecting 130 Mirroring jobs 86 Monitor profiles 146 282 creating 157 Multi threaded halftone processing 354 Multicolor source profiles 138 273 N Nestings 106 creating 106 editing 109 footer 115 in Advanced Layout 248 pages adding 110 aligning 112 115 cloning 110 locking position 115 renaming 114 sheets adding 111 updating preview 109 Non embedded fonts PDF jobs 101 Non printable margins displaying 84 0 Offline system configuration 63 Offset printing simulating 361 One bit files 250 Online help 17 Online system configuration 61 Optimization profile creating 153 selecting 155 Output device setting up 57 Output intent embedded 139 Overprinting composite jobs 100 spot colors 281 Oversized jobs printing 89 P Page alignment 77 frame 82 grid 80 guides 79 marks 81 nested pages 115 on sheet 93 overlapping sheet edge 83 rulers 78 snap to 77 Page size definition PDF jobs 98 PANTONE Plus spot color library 275 Password 55 PDF jobs 94 loading single pages 102 non embedded fonts 101 page size definition 98 PDF print e
250. ing a job 179 Printing a job 181 PRINTING THROUGH A HOTFOLDER 183 Creating a hotfolder in Fiery XF 183 Setting up a Windows user 187 PRINTING THROUGH UNIDRIVER 189 Windows 189 Macintosh 192 PRINTING THROUGH A VIRTUAL PRINTER 201 Setting up the virtual printer in Fiery XF 201 Setting up the computer on which the graphics program is installed 202 Printing from Windows to a Fiery XF Windows server 202 Printing from Macintosh to a Fiery XF Macintosh server 205 Printing from Windows to a Fiery XF Macintosh server 207 Printing from Macintosh to a Fiery XF Windows server 208 Printing from a graphics program to the Fiery XF virtual printer 210 PRINTING TO FILE 212 PRINTING TO A FIERY OUTPUT DEVICE 213 PRINTING TO A VUTEK PRINTER 215 Setting up Fiery XF 215 PRINTING TO A CADDON CAN VIEW CABINET 218 Setting up Fiery XF 218 Setting up the Caddon hardware and software 219 Verifying color accuracy 219 CROP MARKS 221 GROMMET MARKS 223 FOTOBA CROP MARKS 226 CUTTING OPTIONS 228 Cut contours 228 Cut contours in the graphics program 228 Cut contours in Fiery XF 229 Cut contours around bounding box level 1 cut 230 Setting up the cutter in Fiery XF 230 i cut cutter 230 Ziind Cut Center 233 Print and cut device 235 Cut Server 237 Managing cut contours 240 Processing cut contours 245 ADVANCED LAYOUT 248 ONE BIT FILES 250 JDF INTEGRATION 254 Setting up a JDF connection 255 Mapping a print MIS database to
251. ing takes the printer margins into account You can apply identical margins to all four sides by clicking the appropriate button and defining a top margin only If you define margins for a nested page remember to lock the page at its current position so that it is not automatically rearranged when you update the preview e Type in x y coordinates This setting defines the x y coordinates for the top left hand corner of the page on the sheet On the toolbar click Transform Job and type x y coordinates in the appropriate boxes Toolbar es e 1 Transform Job button b oS ae 0 117 Inch E 35 000 Inch 2 Left margin 3 Top margin 0117 Inch 50 667 Inch i The default setting takes the printer margins into account You can instruct Fiery XF to ignore the printer margins by entering values of 0 for the top and left margins Visual aids are also available to help you to position pages exactly on the sheet For more information see Visual aids for page alignment on page 77 POSTSCRIPT AND PDF JOBS POSTSCRIPT AND PDF JOBS Additional settings are available for PostScript and PDF jobs Print engines Fiery XF supports e Adobe PostScript 3 Engine also known as Configurable PostScript Interpreter or CPSI CPSI can process PostScript level 3 jobs and PDF jobs with up to 127 separations During job processing jobs are converted to PostScript format CPSI supports contour cutting CPSI doe
252. ings j Represents the job name c Represents the name of the one bit file f Stands for ignore It is most often used to instruct Fiery XF to ignore consecutive numbers such as film numbers that are automatically added to the file name by some RIP solutions By inserting a number you can define how many characters are ignored for example 4f ONE BIT FILES Example One bit file names Character sequence Description 01_efiflyer_ cyan tif f_ j_ c tif e Fiery XF processes files that use an 02_efiflyer_ magenta tif underscore as the separator 03_efiflyer_ yellow tif 04_efiflyer_ black tif Fiery XF processes files whose color separations are set in parentheses e Fiery XF ignores all characters in the file name to the first underscore when read from right to left 5 Select Analyze file name from left to right optional By default Fiery XF analyzes file names from right to left However in some cases it may be preferable to read file names from the left Example One bit file names Character sequence Description efiflyer cyan 00157 tif j c 5f tif e Fiery XF processes files that use a efiflyer magenta 00158 tif dash as the separator efiflyer yellow 00159 tif efiflyer black 00160 tif Fiery XF processes files whose color separations are set in parentheses efiflyer cyan 01 00 tif efiflyer magenta 02 00 tif efiflyer yel
253. int mode and print direction that were used to create the RGB media profile This information is usually provided either in a separate file with the media profile or it can be downloaded from the manufacturer s website Click Choose and browse to your RGB media profile Select the RGB media profile and click Open Click Install The new RGB media profile is copied to the EFI Media Profiles My Profiles folder and can be selected in Fiery XF For more information see To select a media profile on page 137 THIRD PARTY MEDIA PROFILES Creating a media profile using third party profiling software R If you do not have a license for the Color Profiler Option you can use any third party profiling software to create a media profile for use in Fiery XF TO CREATE A MEDIA PROFILE USING THIRD PARTY PROFILING SOFTWARE 1 Start Color Tools click Create Base Linearization and create a base linearization file For more information see Creating or editing a base linearization file on page 150 The base linearization file is created in the Working folder Move the base linearization file to the My Profiles folder For more information on the folder structure of Fiery XF see Program structure on page 363 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the output device On the Media tab open the Print Configuration pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Output
254. inter dialog box appears 2 Select Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer Alist of available printers is displayed 3 If the virtual printer is not listed select The printer that I want isn t listed A dialog box for finding a printer by name or by TCP IP address appears PRINTING THROUGH A VIRTUAL PRINTER 4 Select Select a shared printer by name and type the name of the virtual printer Use the following syntax computername printername or http computername printers printername printer If you do not know the computer name you can search for it on the computer that is running the Fiery XF server Click Start right click Computer and click Properties Under Computer name domain and workgroup settings look for the computer name Click Next The virtual printer is installed Click Next Set the virtual printer as the default printer optional Print a test page to check that the virtual printer is working properly optional The test page appears in the job list of Fiery XF Click Finish You can now print to the virtual printer from your graphics program Be aware of the following Windows creates just one driver for either a 64 bit or for a 32 bit operating system If the Fiery XF server and the graphics program are installed on computers that are running Windows in different modes additional steps are necessary For more information see To set up a Fiery XF virtual printer on
255. inting plate is made up only of components in one color Color separated files are created in Cyan Magenta Yellow Black plus any spot colors that are included in the job 100 50 Black Gray The example above shows what happens when two elements of 100 black and 50 gray overlap another shape of 40 Cyan POSTSCRIPT AND PDF JOBS When printed the black overprints the cyan This is because the cyan element is not visible through the 100 solid black ink Knocking out the cyan could produce a white gap where the two elements join if there is even a slight misalignment between the printunits of the printing press In the case of the 50 gray a white hole or knockout is left in the cyan for the gray to be placed If the knockout were not performed on the cyan plate the gray ink would mix with the cyan producing an area of darker cyan It is not possible to print overlapping colors as a composite job because overlapping colors will not print on top of each other However in Fiery XF you can simulate the effect of overprinting in composite jobs TO SIMULATE OVERPRINTING IN COMPOSITE JOBS 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane 2 Select Simulate overprinting in composite jobs 3 This setting has no effect on sep
256. k Fiery XF and then click Fiery XF Control For Windows 7 or Windows 8 make sure that you have administrator rights e On Macintosh click the Fiery XF Control icon The icon turns green if the server is running or red if the server is not running If necessary start the Fiery XF server STARTING FIERY XF STARTING FIERY XF Fiery XF is a server client program The server is responsible for processing requests that are submitted by the clients An unlimited number of Fiery XF clients can log on to a Fiery XF server Starting the Fiery XF server The Fiery XF Control icon is located in the status area of the taskbar Windows or in the Dock Macintosh of the computer that is running the server software If the Fiery XF Control icon is not visible see Fiery XF Control on page 18 Normally the Fiery XF server starts automatically when the computer is started If the Fiery XF Control icon is green it indicates that the Fiery XF server is running and clients can log on If the Fiery XF Control icon is red the Fiery XF is not running Start the Fiery XF server TO START THE FIERY XF SERVER 1 Right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Fiery XF Server Start The Fiery XF Control icon turns green to indicate that the Fiery XF server is running Starting the Fiery XF client Make sure that the Fiery XF server is running The Fiery XF client does not work if the Fiery XF server is not running TO S
257. k Upload A message confirms that the file has been correctly uploaded 9 Click OK The media profile is uploaded to the My Profiles folder and can be selected in Fiery XF For more information see Selecting profiles and rendering intents on page 136 Third party RGB media profiles If you have an RGB printer you can use RGB media profiles from your printer manufacturer or paper manufacturer However you must connect the profile to a specific media in Fiery XF first A special tool called RGB Profile Connector is provided for this purpose If you did not install RGB Profile Connector when you installed Fiery XF you can do it now To INSTALL RGB PROFILE CONNECTOR 1 Insert the software DVD into the computer s DVD ROM drive 2 In the welcome screen click Install Fiery XF and follow the on screen instructions until you come to the Select Features dialog box 3 Click Custom 4 Under Tools select RGB Profile Connector 5 Continue to follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation For more information see the Quick Start Guide TO CONNECT AN RGB MEDIA PROFILE To use RGB Profile Connector you must set up an output device for an RGB printer For more information see To create a new output device on page 57 THIRD PARTY MEDIA PROFILES 1 Do one of the following e In Windows click the Start button point to All Programs click EFI click Fiery XF and click RGB Profile Connector
258. kflows e In the layout area click a user On the Edit menu point to User and click Connect to All Workflows To connect all users to all On the Edit menu point to System and click Connect All workflows Users to All Workflows To connect one workflow In the layout area right click a workflow point to to one output device Connected Output Device and click an item that does not have a check mark next to it e In the layout area click a workflow On the Edit menu point to Workflow point to Connected Output Device and click an item that does not have a check mark next to it To connect one output e In the layout area right click an output device point to device to one workflow Connected Workflows and click an item that does not have a check mark next to it e In the layout area click an output device On the Edit menu point to Output Device point to Connected workflows and click an item that does not have a check mark next to it To connect one output e In the layout area right click an output device and click device to all workflows Connect Output Device to All Workflows In the layout area click an output device On the Edit menu point to Output Device and click Connect Output Device to All Workflows Setting a system configuration online 1 Online 2 Offline SETTING SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS ONLINE OFFLINE Make sure that the system configuration is fully online
259. l 12 17 2009 Protocol 11 14 2012 Average all patches 3 00 3 33 Time 14 57 24 Time 14 04 22 Maximum all patches 7 50 830 Info test Info text Remote proofing measurement DeltaH NOT PASSED No patches 72 No patches 72 Maximum CMYK patches 2 50 3 89 Average Gray patches 3 00 0 32 Printer Epson Stylus Pro 9300 9910 PX H1000 Reference profile SQcoated_v2_eciicc Time after print Time after print Massara device min 7 sec 10min 11 sec HE Comectes Calibrate Logged in succesfully to localhost Measuring method Multi Measuringdevice EFIES 1000_ Ugra Fogra MediaWedge V3 0a ES10 Muminant D50__ Delta E format dE CIE76 VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY ACROSS SITES 7 Send the results back to Fiery XF Do one of the following e Click Send e On the File menu click Save to JDF and send Saving the measurement data to the JDF provides a record of the color accuracy You can save multiple sets of measurement data to one JDF file The JDF file is saved to the Temp folder The measurement results are sent back to Fiery XF The results are displayed in Job Explorer on the appropriate Verify Control Strip pane Tue ae a ir m aes iata amn If color accuracy is approved the job receives the status Verified In this case the verification procedure is complete If color accuracy could not be approved the job receives the status Verification failed By defa
260. l job You can position pages by defining top or left margins or by entering coordinates For more information see Aligning pages on the sheet on page 93 Visual aids and a snap to feature are also available to help you to align pages exactly on the sheet For more information see Visual aids for page alignment on page 77 When you have made changes update the preview to rearrange pages in accordance with the new settings TO UPDATE THE PREVIEW 1 Inthe job list click the nesting 2 Do one of the following e On the Layout tab open the Nesting pane and click Apply e On the Nesting menu click Apply The pages are rearranged If required you can prevent a page from being rearranged when you update the preview by locking it in its current state and position For more information see To lock a page on page 115 NESTINGS 110 Managing nested pages and sheets A new nesting consists always of one sheet and the pages that you selected when you created the nesting This section informs you how to add new pages and sheets and how to delete pages and sheets that are no longer needed TO NEST A NEW PAGE Be aware that nesting settings override job settings For example if you have set up the nesting for uniform page scaling the scaling factor of a job will change automatically when it is added to the nesting Similarly job rotation may be undone if the nesting is set up to allow rotation of pages in order
261. lack point compensation may give more shadow detail and avoid gamut clipping if the darkest points of the source are darker than the proofing system is able to print Differences in the black point are compensated for by introducing more deviation between target and proof shadow areas so although the result will be visually better the measured color values may not be as good SELECTING PROFILES AND RENDERING INTENTS Device link profiles In a normal workflow situation the color space of the input device is transformed to the color space of the output device via the device independent L a b color space known as the profile connection space This process requires two different profiles a source profile and a destination profile N D CMYK XYZ CMYK L a b SN A device link profile is a special kind of ICC profile that converts the color space of the input device directly into the color space of the output device whereby the output device can be either a physical printer or a file format Unlike ordinary source or destination profiles device link profiles do not describe a specific color space but define the conversion from a source color space to a destination color space The basis for creating a device link profile is therefore always an ordinary ICC profile Device link profiles are most commonly applied to direct CMYK to CMYK transformations because converting via a device independent color space can lead to unde
262. lick the content file In the toolbar click Delete Job e In the job list right click the content file Press lt Del gt BACKUP AND RESTORE BACKUP AND RESTORE By backing up your settings you can restore Fiery XF to an earlier state quickly and easily There are two types of backup e A system configuration backup Back up your system configuration before reinstalling Fiery XF Afterwards by loading the system configuration backup file in the new installation you can quickly and easily restore Fiery XF to its former state e An environment backup Back up your environments if you need to output repeat jobs at regular intervals By saving and restoring environment backups you can be sure that you use exactly the same settings each time You can also use an environment backup to provide customers with exact workflow printer information Backing up a system configuration A system configuration backup saves e The Fiery XF server configuration e All user settings e All workflow settings including workspaces selected presets base linearization files spot color tables and profiles e All printer setups BACKUP AND RESTORE TO BACK UP A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1 Go to System Manager On the File menu click Backup enon EFI XF Backup In addition to the Server configuration add the following v Reference profiles Media sets v Spot color tables A Monitor Profile v 3cc files A All tickets The backup f
263. light source You can process your jobs to simulate different light conditions TO SIMULATE LIGHT CONDITIONS 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Color tab open the Color Management pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Color tab open the Color Management pane 2 On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings 3 Under Light adaptation do one of the following e Select a light source e Enter the L a b values of custom light conditions You can measure a light source using any conventional measuring device 4 Save your changes Sa aac i PROGRAM STRUCTURE The tables below give an overview of the folder structure of Fiery XF to enable you to locate files quickly and easily A direct link to some of the most commonly used folders is also available e In Windows click the Start button point to All Programs click EFI click Fiery XF click Links and then click the folder to open e On Macintosh click the Links icon in the Dock and then click the folder to open Default folders e Installation folder Unless you choose a different location fix program components of Fiery XF are installed by default in the following folder Windows 32 bit on 32 bit OS Program Files EFI Fiery XF 32 bit on 64 bit OS Program Files x86 EFI Fiery XF 64 bit on 64 bit OS Program Files EFI Fiery XF S
264. ling rotation and color adjustments before you create a step and repeat For more information see Editing jobs on page 85 1 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Layout tab open the Step and Repeat pane 2 On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings 3 On the Step and Repleat pane complete your settings For more information on individual settings see the context sensitive help Some of the settings require a license for the Production Option 4 Click Apply A step and repeat is created After you have created a step and repeat the padlock icon in the top right hand corner of the original job indicates that the job cannot be modified To apply job settings you must first delete all the copies For more information see Modifying step and repeats on page 123 Modifying step and repeats After you have created a step and repeat the padlock icon in the top right hand corner of the original job indicates that the job cannot be modified To apply job settings such as color adjustments cropping and mirroring to step and repeat jobs you must first delete all the copies by clearing the check box on the Step and Repeat pane bar After you have made your changes reselect the check box on the pane bar Then click Apply to update the step and repeat You can position pages by defining top or left margins or by entering coordinates For more information see Aligning pages on th
265. lly uniform L a b color consists of a luminance or lightness component L and two chromatic components the a component from green to red and the b component from blue to yellow A color space similar to CIELAB which uses cylindrical coordinates of lightness chroma and hue angle instead of rectangular coordinates Compensation of plate characteristic A function to linearize a non linear plate characteristic of one bit files before they are processed in color management This enables the use of media profiles that are based on linear continuous tone data To produce a color accurate proof from non linear plate characteristics calculated into the one bit files requires a media profile that is based on the IT8 target using the non linear one bit files GLOSSARY 383 Composite job A composite job contains all the color information in one file It can be printed on one page See also Separated jobs csv A file format for saving color measurement results in Verifier A csv file can also be opened and edited in any spreadsheet application Delta Ch Describes the distance between two colors in the CIE a b color space Delta E The mathematically calculated distance in the CIE L a b color space between two colors Delta E is used to check total color tolerances in a color management environment Delta E 2000 The first major revision of the delta E CIE 94 equation Unlike dE 94 which assumes that L correctly reflects t
266. lor Management pane 2 On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings 3 Under Color optimization select Black as inkjet black 4 Under Threshold type the percentage of black ink at which pure black ink is used instead of a mixture of CMYK inks For example for grayscale images a threshold of 40 would mean that 39 black is composed of CMYK inks whereas 40 black is printed with black ink only Text and line diagrams are nearly always defined as 100 black and so are less likely to be affected by a threshold setting 5 Save your changes Process and secondary colors If you have a license for the Production Option you can also remove color impurities that have resulted during the conversion from the RGB to the CMYK color space MAKING COLOR ADJUSTMENTS The printer tries to reproduce color as defined by the simulation reference profile For example sometimes 100 yellow is defined with a greenish tint To achieve this tint cyan ink is added to yellow ink In this case cyan is an impure color You can achieve a more saturated yellow by instructing Fiery XF to ignore the percentage of impure color and to use pure yellow ink instead This setting can be applied most successfully to banners and posters It ensures that jobs are printed in vivid and saturated colors without affecting critical color areas such as grays skin tones and spot colors TO CLEAN PROCESS AND SECONDARY COLORS
267. lor management settings for a particular workflow scenario such as pre press print production photo printing or contour cutting CREATING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 5 Click Continue a gt Step 2 of 5 Output device Select a device Please select device manufacturer Device type 6 Under Select a device select Create a new output device Alternatively select None if you prefer to set up an output device in System Manager 7 Select the manufacturer of your output device Select EFI as the manufacturer to set up an output device for one of the following options File Output Option Fiery Option Softproof Output Option 8 Select your device type When you make a selection the Setup Wizard Assistant displays the number of media profiles that are installed for the output device If no media profiles are installed an error message appears In this case you must cancel the setup and install the appropriate media profiles You can download the latest media profiles from the EFI website For more information see Updating media profiles on page 168 Alternatively you can install media profiles from the media profiles DVD For more information see the Quick Start Guide CREATING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 9 Click Continue The dialog box varies depending on the type of output device you selected sow E e nl Step 3 of 5 Device connection
268. low 03 00 tif efiflyer black 04 00 tif e Fiery XF ignores all characters in the file name after the second dash when read from left to right 6 Select Extract color separation from file header optional If you select this setting the color information is extracted from the file header information contained in the one bit file itself instead of from the file name of the one bit file This setting is useful if the individual color separations cannot be identified in the name of the one bit files some RIP devices do not save the color separation as part of the file name If you are using the Macintosh version of Fiery XF you may find that the file name is truncated at 32 characters which makes it impossible to identify the color separation In this case this setting may provide a convenient way to get round the problem Alternatively you can rename the files before loading in Fiery XF ONE BIT FILES 7 Under Proofing method select an item Proofing method Description Imposition proof Select this item if you want to make a final check before going to press Note that imposition proofs are not color accurate Therefore use this setting only to check the content and completeness of the elements of the printing copy Contract proof Select this item to create a color accurate screen proof Contract proofs are color managed For this reason they are often seen as a binding color contra
269. m Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane 2 Under Image EPS PDFprint engine click an item e Click Native to output a single EPS image that is saved in a PDF frame Only the EPS image is output and not the surrounding PDF frame This setting results in a quicker processing time and better output quality since if the image is an RGB image the selected source profiles are applied This feature was developed mainly for users who print directly from Photoshop e Click Adobe PostScript 3 Engine to output a job with the PDF frame This setting is automatically applied if the job contains more than one EPS image 3 Save your changes EPS job detection You can apply the following settings to EPS jobs e You can change the length of time that Fiery XF waits to receive all job separations By default when you load a separated job Fiery XF waits five seconds before assuming that the job is complete However for large volume separated EPS jobs more time may be necessary to ensure that all color separations are processed as one job Conversely for EPS composite files reducing the waiting time ensures that your jobs are output as quickly as possible e You can change the default input resolution to prevent a white edge from appearing between images in step and repeat jobs
270. measuring devices PROGRAM STRUCTURE e Work folder You will find all work files directly associated with job processing located in the following folders Windows ProgramData EFI EFI XF Macintosh Library Application Support EFI EFI XF If you cannot see the ProgramData folder it may be because it is set up as a hidden folder on your computer Open Control Panel and search for Show hidden files and folders On the View tab make sure that the advanced setting Show hidden files folders and drives is selected The folder EFI Fiery XF contains the following folders and subfolders Folder name Subfolder name Contains Client Working Temporary files Used to Save e Base linearization and profiling files from Color Tools e Remote containers to be created manually Log Log files Important in case of support queries ClientPreview Preview files PROGRAM STRUCTURE Folder name Server Subfolder name Contains Backup Backup files of system configurations ControlCharts it8 files for the checking the measured color values of the control strips ControlStrip Control strips for footer Environments Backup files of environments Export Default folder for print to file jobs JobFolder Temporary job files Log Log files Important in case of support queries Logo Copies of logo files that are selected for job tick
271. mported Applying spot color tables to Fiery XF workflows When you save a new spot color table for the first time you are prompted to select the Fiery XF workflows to which the spot color table will be applied This section describes how to assign spot color tables in Color Editor after the spot color table has been created For more information on assigning spot color tables in Fiery XF see Selecting a spot color table on page 269 TO APPLY A SPOT COLOR TABLE TO A FIERY XF WORKFLOW 1 Start Color Editor For more information see Starting Color Editor on page 277 2 Open a spot color table For more information see Opening a spot color table on page 297 COLOR EDITOR 3 Below the toolbar click the down arrow to open the drop down list box EF EE E Sr Applied to 3 workflow s Applied ta 3 Warkflowis O EFI Linearization M Production Quality 1 Photo Fineart 1 E ISO Coated v2 Offset Verify 1 C ISO Coated v2 300 Offset 1 CMVKLAB Internal 4 Select or clear the check boxes as required p 5 Save your changes VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY IN A FIERY XF WORKFLOW VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY IN A FIERY XF WORKFLOW If you have a license for the Verifier Option you can check the color consistency of your jobs Delta E tolerance values define the acceptable error margin when verifying color accuracy against a reference The Verifier Option s
272. n efi Color Tools Create Media Profile Optimize Profile Re Linearization by Measurement C naran If you set up the linearization device by transferring the settings from a different output device Color Tools by passes the start screen and starts the appropriate tool directly For more information see Setting up the linearization device on page 148 You can return to the start screen at any time by closing an open tool 2 Click the appropriate button to start the tool The table shows the available tools Tool Color Tools Color Profiler Suite Create Base Linearization Yes Yes Create Media Profile No Yes CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES Tool Color Tools Color Profiler Suite Optimize Profile Yes Yes Create Device Link Profile No Yes Create Reference Profile No Yes Create Monitor Profile No Yes Profile Connector Yes Yes Edit Profile No Yes Inspect Profile No Yes Re Linearization by Measurement Yes Yes Visual Correction Yes Yes General tips e Measuring devices Many of the tools require you to print out and measure color patches so make sure that you have a measuring device spectrophotometer available Many different measuring devices including embedded measuring devices are supported e Media settings All linearization charts must be printed in their original size in order to avoid
273. n For more information see Job ticket on page 129 On the Verify tab open the Control Strips pane On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY IN A FIERY XF WORKFLOW 7 Do the following e Select one or two control strips You can select a static control strip or DynamicWedge Each static control strip has been created for a specific measuring device Make sure that you select a static control strip that is compatible with your measuring device A dynamic wedge is made up of the job s most prominent colors Each dynamic wedge is therefore unique to that job For more information see Control strips and media wedges on page 130 The table below shows which type of control strip you can select for each reference The reference defines the standard that you want to achieve Type of control strip Target colors of reference Reference Measurement SWOP Fogra profile file from GRACoL characterization remote data container JDF EFI Verifier Chart Yes Yes No No IDEAlliance ISO 12647 7 Yes Yes Yes No Ugra Fogra MediaWedge Yes Yes Yes Yes Dynamic wedge Yes No No No e Specify whether color management is applied to the control strip If the selected profiles and rendering intents are applied to the control strip the color patches are compressed into the color gamut of the selected reference profile Select Print wit
274. n RIP separation In RIP separations are spot colors that have been defined in an external DTP or in a graphics program and saved as a single job file You can output in RIP information as follows TO MAKE A You can output in RIP information as separated files You can convert in RIP information to the color space of the output device and print it as a composite job SETTING FOR IN RIP SEPARATION 1 Do one of the following Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane POSTSCRIPT AND PDF JOBS 2 Under PS PDF click an item Setting Description Enable PDF jobs with in RIP separations are printed as separated files C M Y K plus spot colors Jobs with no in RIP information are simply printed composite CMYK Disable In RIP information is ignored PDF jobs are printed composite CMYK Note that pre separated files are always printed separated even though they do not contain in RIP information Force In RIP information is applied to PostScript level 3 and PostScript level 2 jobs as well as to PDFs that were created with older versions of Acrobat PostScript files with in RIP separations normally require a special PostScript command to ensure that the in RIP information is interpreted correctly However not all PostScript printers sup
275. n define you own Predefined tolerances Predefined presets are available for recognized standards The predefined tolerance limits are specified for ISO 12647 7 contract proofing ISO 12647 8 validation proofing or G7 compliant verification of proof jobs They can be applied either to daily proof production verification based on an ISO 12647 7 or 12647 8 compliant media wedge or for certification purposes such as FograCert VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY IN A FIERY XF WORKFLOW You can modify the predefined tolerance presets if required For more information see Custom on page 308 Predefined preset ISO 12647 7 Contract Proof Media Wedge Use for ISO 12647 7 contract proofing ISO 12647 8 Validation Print Media Wedge CD2 ISO 12647 8 FograCert validation print certification G7 ISO12647 7 Proofing System G7 compliant verification of proof jobs Dynamic wedge Verification of a job s key colors including spot colors ISO15311 2 FCR Side by Side Level A Media Wedge ISO15311 2 FCR Side by Side Level B Media Wedge ISO15311 2 FCR Side by Side Level C Media Wedge Verification of conformance level A B or C of FCR side by side as defined by ISO 15311 2 digital commercial proofing ISO15311 3 FCR Side by Side Level A Media Wedge ISO15311 3 FCR Side by Side Level B Media Wedge ISO15311 3 FCR Side by Side Level C Media Wedge Verification of conformanc
276. n do so in Verifier Custom presets from Verifier can later be applied to multiple workflows For more information see Setting up Verifier on page 315 11 Save the workflow TO VERIFY THE COLOR ACCURACY OF A JOB 1 Load a job For more information see To load a job on page 32 If the workflow is set up to print two control strips you can use one or both to verify color accuracy To deactivate a control strip clear the check box in the appropriate pane bar of the Verify tab 2 Print the job For more information see To print a job on page 32 After printing the job is automatically submitted to Verifier In the job list the job status changes to Can be verified 3 Connect your measuring device to your computer 4 Start Verifier Do one of the following e On the toolbar click Verifier e On the Tools menu click Verifier e Go to Job Explorer On the Verify tab open the Verify Control Strip pane In the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings On the Verify Control Strip pane click the Verify button Verifier starts The printed job is displayed on the Job List Preview tab VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY IN A FIERY XF WORKFLOW 5 On the Job List Preview tab expand the job file and double click the job Verifier program window 1 Job on Joblist Preview tab View Help Z Show in color space X Show in color space d
277. n spot colors The table below describes how to fill out the Map to column ensure that the printer ink is used If your printer supports white ink clear ink or metallic inks you can assign any of these additional printer inks in addition to the original spot color definition The additional inks are printed either behind or on top of the original spot color The PRINTER setting is useful in the packaging industry where gold or silver metallic colors are often used Color management is by passed for printer inks during job processing Source Description Map to column column CMYK Defines a spot color in the selected Type the required color values in CMYKOG color space the appropriate boxes CMYKRGB L a b PANTONE Selects a color from the internal Scroll through the list and select HKS TOYO spot color library the spot color that you want to use DIC Alias Creates a link between two spot Select Cyan Magenta Yellow colors Any changes that you make Black or any custom spot color to the original color are from the current spot color table automatically applied to the alias color also PRINTER Selects a printer ink channel to Select the printer ink channel that you want to use Some settings have an inverted equivalent They can be recognized by the letters INV in their name If you select an inverted setting the inversely proportional
278. n that is required to create a color accurate proof at multiple sites Remote containers can be transferred easily between locations for example by FTP server For more information see Verifying color consistency across sites on page 337 VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY IN A FIERY XF WORKFLOW TO SET UP A VERIFY WORKFLOW 1 N A Go to System Manager Create a new workflow For more information see To create a workflow on page 56 Default workflow templates are available that are already set up with the basic settings for a verify workflow The workflows have the word Verify in their name However make sure that the selected control strip is compatible with your measuring device see step 5 below If you use the default workflow template Remote_Out_ ISOcoated_v2 a remote container is created of the measured results A remote container is required to verify color accuracy at two or more sites For more information see Verifying color consistency across sites on page 337 If you prefer to set up a custom verify workflow from scratch make sure to include the following settings Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Layout tab open the Footer pane On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings Set up a job ticket The job ticket is a prerequisite for achieving Fogra Proof Certification but is not essential for other forms of color verificatio
279. n the Balance folder before proceeding with the following steps You may need to copy the file manually to the Balance folder if it was originally saved to a different destination 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the output device On the Media tab open the Print Configuration pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Output tab open the Media Configuration pane CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES 2 Under Visual correction select the visual correction file 3 Save your changes Modifying plate characteristics You can modify the plate characteristics that are often applied to one bit files Plate characteristics control the size of screen dots when they are output on the platesetter You can use the Visual Correction tool to compensate for varying dot gain on different media However the changes are based purely on manual adjustments and should therefore be performed only as an emergency measure by experienced users As color management normally relies on receiving linear input data to apply color management properly there is a need to compensate non linear plate characteristics of the one bit files for color accurate output There is no fixed formula for modifying plate characteristics However in the case of contone file formats a simple formula is applied so that a 5 increase for the 50 patch will yield 55 TO MODIFY PLATE CHARACTERISTICS
280. nce profile is used instead e Under Delta E format select a tolerancing system for measuring color deviation Color accuracy is measured in terms of delta E Delta E is the mathematical difference between two colors in the L a b color space For more information see Glossary on page 382 VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY IN A FIERY XF WORKFLOW e Under Target tolerances preset define the acceptable deviation for color accuracy Tolerance values define the maximum error margin that is acceptable when verifying the color accuracy of a printout against a reference For example if you define a tolerance limit of 3 a measured delta E of 2 5 would be accepted as color accurate whereas a delta E measurement of 3 2 would not be considered color accurate A certain amount of deviation is almost unavoidable Due to differing printing conditions printer ink media etc it is generally impossible to obtain 100 identical prints on two different output devices By default a job is verified as color accurate only if all color measurements are within the defined tolerance limits However by enabling measurement approval in Verifier you can gain full control over whether a job passes or fails verification For example you can force a pass result if some delta E values are marginally exceeded For more information see To set up Verifier on page 316 You can select a set of predefined target tolerances or you ca
281. ncoated yellowish Offset ISO Uncoated yellowish Offset Verify PSO Coated NPscreen 15012647 Offset PSO Coated NPscreen 15012647 Offset Verify PSO Coated 300 NPscreen 15012647 Offset ROM Cartes DANO Mammen mee TOMI IEAT NEE tarik oee 2 Select a type of workflow environment Proof Photo or Production CREATING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3 Select the name of the template that best suits your workflow requirements Fiery XF provides many default workflow templates Each has been set up with color management settings for a particular workflow scenario such as pre press print production photo printing or contour cutting Initially only the default templates are available However you can modify the settings from a default template to suit your exact requirements and save them as a custom template For more information see To create a custom workflow template on page 34 4 Click Load A new workflow is created The workflow has the same name as the workflow template with a consecutive number added 5 Define a unique name for the workflow Do one of the following e In the layout area double click the new workflow overwrite the default name and press lt Enter gt e On the Workflow tab open the Basic Information pane and overwrite the default name 6 Make your required workflow settings For example you can apply special color profiles output jobs collectively as nestings or scale
282. nding on the format of the file that is being loaded someone _ l M Select the measurement No Date Time No patches Comment 16 11 2012 10 52 16 11 2012 10 52 16 11 2012 10 52 Number of measurements 3 3 Select a set of measurement data and click OK Logging on to a different Fiery XF server When you start Verifier from Fiery XF you are automatically logged on to the same Fiery XF server as the Fiery XF client TO LOG ON TO A DIFFERENT FIERY XF SERVER You can log on to any Fiery XF server in your network 1 Do one of the following e In Windows on the File menu click Login e On Macintosh on the Verifier menu click Login The Login dialog box appears 2 Enter your Fiery XF login credentials 3 Select the IP address of the Fiery XF server computer A list of all available Fiery XF servers in the sub network is displayed with their IP address Ask your system administrator if you are not sure which TCP IP address to use VERIFIER 4 Click OK The connected Fiery XF server is displayed at the bottom of the program window 336 VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY ACROSS SITES VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY ACROSS SITES A remote container is used to save a Fiery XF job and its settings in a single file Remote containers can be transferred easily between locations for example by FTP server They contain all the information that is needed to create and verify a color accurate replica of the job at diff
283. ng You can set up bi directional printing for the workflow Bi directional printing is faster than unidirectional printing as the print head prints in both directions However the result may be less accurate Not all printers support bi directional printing TO ACTIVATE BI DIRECTIONAL PRINTING 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Workflow tab open the Speed pane 2 Select Print bi directional 3 Save your changes Adobe print engines You can speed up job processing by increasing the number of Adobe print engines that are used Normally jobs are processed one after another by one single CPU core By increasing the number of Adobe PostScript 3 engines and Adobe PDF print engines you can process multiple PostScript PDF jobs simultaneously TO INCREASE THE NUMBER OF ADOBE PRINT ENGINES 1 Go to System Manager On the Tools menu click System Information The System Information dialog box appears 2 Under General settings increase the number of print engines to be used The default number of print engines for CPSI and for APPE is equal to the maximum number of CPU cores that are available for the operating system two for 32 bit computers and four for 64 bit computers 3 Save your changes This setting is a global setting that is applied to all workflows You must restart the Fiery XF server for the new value to take effect Multi threaded halftone processing The conve
284. ng from the multicolor source profile those colors are treated as spot colors RGB and grayscale jobs are not affected by these settings PANTONE PLUS spot color library You can switch from using the standard internal PANTONE spot color library to PANTONE PLUS PANTONE PLUS is a spot color library that includes contemporary metallic pastel and neon colors When selected the PANTONE PLUS color library is applied to all PANTONE spot color definitions To SELECT THE PANTONE PLUS SPOT COLOR LIBRARY 1 Go to System Manager On the Tools menu click System Information The System Information dialog box appears 2 Under General settings select Use PANTONE PLUS color definitions 3 Click OK The new setting takes effect immediately You do not have to restart Fiery XF Deleting a spot color table Spot color tables are saved in the ProgramData EFI Fiery XF Server Profiles Spotcolor folder Open the Spotcolor folder and delete the spot color table that is no longer needed You can also delete spot color tables by cleaning up Fiery XF For more information see Cleaning up Fiery XF on page 368 COLOR EDITOR COLOR EDITOR A spot color is any color that can be printed with its own ink in a single print run In contrast process color printing uses a mixture of cyan magenta yellow and black to produce other colors Spot colors can be produced in a much more vibrant range of colors than can be create
285. ng the preview on page 72 Make sure also that the Thumbnail column is displayed in the job list For more information see Customizing the job list on page 73 TO CHANGE THE SIZE OF THUMBNAIL IMAGES 1 In the job list right click a job point to Thumbnail Size and click an item You can choose from small medium or large Copying and moving jobs You can copy or move loaded jobs between workflows and printers JOB LIST AND PREVIEW WINDOW TO COPY OR MOVE JOBS TO A DIFFERENT WORKFLOW 1 Do one of the following e In the job list right click a job point to Copy to Workflow or Move to Workflow and click an item e In the job list click a job On the Edit menu point to Copy to Workflow or Move to Workflow and click an item You can copy or move jobs to any workflow to which you have access The Hold Job dialog box appears 2 Do one of the following e Click No to start job processing immediately e Click Yes if you want to edit the job first The job is copied or moved to the new workflow All previous job settings are overridden by the settings of the new workflow TO COPY OR MOVE JOBS TO A DIFFERENT PRINTER 1 Do one of the following e In the job list right click a job point to Copy to Printer or Move to Printer and click an item e In the job list click a job On the Edit menu point to Copy to Printer or Move to Printer and click an item You can copy or move jobs to any printer to which
286. ngine 94 Plate characteristics modifying 164 selecting 165 PostScript 3 engine 94 PostScript jobs 94 Preview activating 72 forcing 73 size 76 updating nesting 109 zoom 76 Preview window 76 Print characteristics simulating 360 Print engines 94 Print MIS integrating 255 media data base in Fiery XF 256 Print and cut devices setting up 235 Printer relinearizing 161 setting up 57 Printer inks using 268 287 Printing directly from Fiery XF 181 duplex in Advanced Layout 248 high priority 357 job 32 job length adjusting 360 number of copies 181 print and cut device 235 problems with 374 through a hotfolder 183 through a virtual printer 201 202 through Unidriver 189 to a Caddon cabinet 218 to a Fiery output device 213 toa VUTEk printer 215 to Cut Server 237 to file 212 to Ziind Cut Center 233 undefined spot colors 271 Problems with color management 377 licensing 372 logging on 370 media profiles 378 printing 374 server 370 USB devices 379 Process colors removing impure color 176 Profile Connector 158 INDEX Profiles comparing color gamuts 160 creating 147 device link 144 creating 155 inspecting 160 media 137 creating 152 174 optimizing 153 third party 170 updating 168 monitor 146 282 creating 157 multicolor 138 simulation reference 138 creating 156 editing 159 source 138 forcing the use of 273 Program architecture 14 folders changing default 367 structure 363 view saving 69 windows 27
287. nidriver Printing Preferences dialog box appears PRINTING THROUGH UNIDRIVER 3 On the EFI Unidriver tab click Change Settings 4 Under Type select Fiery XF 5 Under Connection select the computer on which a Fiery XF server is installed Alternatively type the IP address of a Fiery XF server 6 Under User and Password enter your Fiery XF login credentials PRINTING THROUGH UNIDRIVER 7 Click Connect The Unidriver Preferences dialog box appears Ti ee Plo a Workflow Production Quality 1 Page Layout olor Device Connection Media Set Media Size Special Use original image size from Adobe Photoshop Scale A E 100 00 g 4 100 00 Rotate Minimal media consumption J7 Mirror Horizontally Z 7 Mirror Vertically Align Align horizontally F flere 296 Align vertically Afe 28 G 8 Under Workflow select a workflow The tabs show the settings that have been made in Fiery XF for the selected workflow If you do not want to use the workflow settings from Fiery XF you can make your own custom settings in Unidriver Unidriver settings override the workflow settings from Fiery XF When you have made your required changes click Use my settings You can log on to a different Fiery XF server at any time by clicking Connect and selecting a different IP address 9 Click OK to exit the EFI Unidriver Preferences d
288. ning information screen dot shape and size screen ruling is simply extracted from the one bit file when the digital proof is printed Therefore digital proofs that are output with the OneBit Option are not only color accurate but also give a true screen representation of the final print run This makes the OneBit Option an ideal tool with which to check for possible moir patterns or rosettes The following one bit file formats are supported Tiff G4 Tiff G3 Packbit LZW compressed Tiff uncompressed Tiff Presstek Huffman PCX Len Harlequin Pagebuffer Founder DSC1 DCS2 copy dot format It is recommended that you do not use a laser printer to output one bit files due to the different screening methods You cannot create high quality proofs if you apply both laser screening and one bit screening to a job Laser printers are therefore only suitable for creating imposition proofs You can modify the plate characteristics that are often applied to one bit files Plate characteristics control the size of screen dots when they are output on the platesetter For more information see Modifying plate characteristics on page 164 ONE BIT FILES TO SET UP A WORKFLOW FOR ONE BIT FILES 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the File tab open the One bit pane 2 Do one of the following e Type the number of seconds wait before job completion This setting determines how long Fiery XF waits f
289. nsult your authorized dealer if you wish to purchase additional options How would you like to activate Automatically Manually Visit http activation efi com You will be asked to enter your EAC code which you will find inside the product packaging and your dongle ID see below The generated license file will be downloaded to your desktop or sent to you by e mail Dongle ID 1965786422 After you receive the license file click Install License to install it on your computer Install License 4 Click Install License and browse to the license file LICENSING 5 Select the license file and click Open The license file is copied to the FlexLM folder on your computer 6 Click Finish You may need to restart the Fiery XF server if the license is not automatically detected For more information see Fiery XF Server Restart on page 20 Regenerating a license file There may be occasions when you need to regenerate a license for example after reinstalling Fiery XF on a different computer The only prerequisite is that you must use the same dongle TO REGENERATE A LICENSE FILE 1 Make sure that the dongle is correctly plugged into a USB port on the computer 2 Start the Activation Wizard Assistant Do one of the following e Right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Activate Fiery XF e Go to System Manager On the System menu click Activation Wizard SO Sti 3 Cl
290. nt 2013_Content_Customer pdf EFI_Master pdf EFI EFI_Content pdf 2013_EFI pdf 2013 EFI Exhibition 2013_Exhibition pdf EFI_January_2013 pdf January_2013 Exhibition_January_2013 pdf Save your changes When you load master and content jobs Fiery XF automatically merges them The content job is superimposed on the master job The master job disappears from the job list Master and content jobs must be loaded together If you load first the master job and then the content job the jobs cannot be merged TO MERGE JOBS MANUALLY 10 Manually merged jobs do not have to comply to a specific naming convention Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job that will be the master background job On the File tab open the Job Merge pane On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings Select Master job Save your changes In the job list click the job that will be superimposed on the master job On the File tab open the Job Merge pane On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings Select Content job From the drop down list box select the master job that you want to use as the background Save your changes JOB MERGE The content job is previewed superimposed on the defined master job Unlike in automatic job merge workflows the master job remains in the job list after merging As long as the master job is loaded in Job Explorer you can apply it
291. ntry PRINTING THROUGH A VIRTUAL PRINTER 9 Make sure that the virtual printer is set up for printer sharing in the operating system e Windows Click Start point to Devices and Printers right click the virtual printer and click Printer properties On the Sharing tab select Share this printer Select also List in the directory to ensure that the virtual printer can be seen by other users on the network e Macintosh Open System Preferences In Print amp Scan check that the virtual printer is displayed In the printer list select the virtual printer and make sure that the check box for sharing the printer on the network is selected Then click Sharing Preferences and make sure that Printer Sharing is selected Once you have set up Fiery XF certain settings are needed on the computer on which the graphics program is installed For more information see Setting up the computer on which the graphics program is installed on page 202 Setting up the computer on which the graphics program is installed Before you can start printing you must set up Fiery XF as a virtual printer on the computer on which the graphics program is installed This documentation gives details of how to set up the Windows 7 and Macintosh OS X 10 8 operating systems Other operating systems may be slightly different Before performing the steps in the following sections make sure of the following e The workflow must be online in Sys
292. o the Updates folder TO CHECK WHICH UPDATES ARE INSTALLED If the Fiery XF server and client are installed on the same computer you can check which updates are installed 1 Do one of the following e Start Fiery XF In Windows on the menu click Fiery XF Server Information e Start Fiery XF On Macintosh on the Help menu click Fiery XF Server Information e Right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Show License Information A list of currently installed updates is displayed on the Update information tab UPDATING FIERY XF AND MEDIA PROFILES Updating media profiles If the Fiery XF server is installed on a computer with Internet access you can download and install new and updated media profiles automatically If the Fiery XF server is installed on a computer with no Internet access you can obtain new and updated media profiles from your EFI dealer and install them manually TO INSTALL MEDIA PROFILES AUTOMATICALLY 1 Right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Fiery XF Profiles Online Update The Profile Update Service dialog box appears 2 Click Next 3 In the Manufacturer Model column click your printer manufacturer 4 Inthe Media Profiles column select the check box es for the media profiles that you want to install You can select media profiles for different printer manufacturers in one download You can view the list of selected media profiles by clicking Download List To add or remove media
293. ob you can also make job specific settings before printing LOADING AND PRINTING A JOB 6 In the job list click the job and make your job settings optional For more information on individual settings see the context sensitive help 7 Save your changes Printing a job In the following cases printing does not start automatically and must be started by hand e Ifthe job was loaded as a hold job For more information see Loading a job on page 179 e Ifthe system configuration is set offline at workflow exit For more information see Setting system configurations online offline on page 61 e Ifyou previously canceled job processing e Ifthe job caused an error that required attention By default one copy of the whole job is printed This means In the case of a one page job the job is printed in its entirety e In the case of a multipage job all pages are printed e In the case of a nesting with more than one sheet all the sheets are printed Before you start printing you can select the number of copies specify a page range and define the order in which multiple pages or sheets are printed TO DEFINE THE NUMBER OF PRINTED COPIES 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Output tab open the Print Settings pane e In Job Explorer in the job list click the job On the Output tab open the Print Settings pane To
294. ob e Right click anywhere in the job list and click Import Job e Drag a file directly into the job list for example from the desktop or from a network folder The following file formats are supported PostScript PDF TIFE JPEG JPEG2000 RAW EPS Delta Lists Scitex CT LW TIFF IT DCS1 DCS2 RPF and PSD One bit files are also supported if the OneBit Option is installed Files in all other formats may be loaded but cannot be processed For more information see Loading and printing a job on page 179 TO SAVE CHANGES 1 In the job list click the job 2 Do one of the following e On the toolbar click Save e On the File menu click Save e In the job list right click the job and click Save If you do not save your changes you are prompted to do so when you switch to a different program view TO PRINT A JOB If you load jobs as hold job or if the workflow is set offline at workflow exit you can submit the job to the printer manually when you are ready for example after applying job settings 1 Make sure that the printer is switched on and that media is loaded in the printer 2 In the job list click the job 3 Do one of the following EE e On the toolbar click Print a e On the File menu click Print e In the job list right click the job and click Print For more information see Loading and printing a job on page 179 GETTING TO KNOW FIERY XF To RESET A JOB If you are
295. ob You can also select the spot color table for different jobs or integrate it into the workflow For more information see Selecting a spot color table on page 269 Selecting a spot color table You can select a spot color table for a single job or you can integrate it into a workflow By integrating a spot color table into the workflow you ensure that the spot colors are automatically detected in all jobs that contain those spot colors Only spot color tables that are saved to the Spotcolors folder can be selected in Fiery XF SPOT COLORS TO SELECT A SPOT COLOR TABLE 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Color tab open the Spot Colors pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Color tab open the Spot Colors pane 2 Under Spot color library select a custom spot color table 3 Save your changes Editing spot color tables In Job Explorer you can edit spot color tables as follows You can add new spot colors e You can change spot color definitions e You can tweek a spot color that aliases a different spot color Each time you save changes a new spot color table is created The new spot color table is saved under the original name plus an incremental number Therefore you can easily revert to an earlier spot color table if necessary TO ADD NEW SPOT COLORS TO AN EXISTING SPOT COLOR TABLE Load a job
296. oes not start as soon as jobs are added to the job list However some jobs cannot be loaded as hold jobs for example jobs that are loaded via a hotfolder In this case you can cancel job processing or set the workflow offline at workflow exit to prevent jobs from being processed unnecessarily NESTINGS 108 1 Go to Job Explorer Do one of the following e In the job list right click one or more jobs Then click New Nesting In the job list click one or more jobs On the toolbar click Create Nesting By clicking All Jobs in the Selector you can create a nesting from jobs that are loaded in different workflows If you select jobs in different workflows a dialog box appears for you to select the workflow in which to create the nesting Select a workflow and click Choose A nesting is created By default nested jobs are arranged on the media size that is set up for the output device If required you can set up a media size that overrides the default setting For more information see To set up a virtual sheet size on page 33 Nestings user interface ieee ame OO Legend Description 1 Page on a nesting Pages can be in any supported file format 2 Nesting sheet By default nested jobs are arranged on the media size that is set up for the printer You can override the default sheet size by selecting a virtual sheet size A virtual sheet can be bigger or smaller than the default sheet si
297. ogically through the minimum of steps that are necessary to set up a basic system configuration for the default users You can finetune your workflow settings later in System Manager if required Normally you will already have created a system configuration in this way when you started Fiery XF for the first time In System Manager In System Manager you have access to all the available settings and can create additional users workflows and output devices You can also make changes to existing system configurations To set up an output device you must have media profiles for that output device installed on the computer If you did not install the media profiles during installation you can install them now To install media profiles use one of the following methods e Download the latest media profiles from the EFI website For more information see Updating media profiles on page 168 e Install media profiles from the media profiles DVD For more information see the Quick Start Guide CREATING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Creating a system configuration in Setup Wizard Assistant System configurations that are created in Setup Wizard Assistant enable users to output jobs in their original size and with color management applied TO SET UP A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION IN SETUP WIZARD ASSISTANT You can click Finish Now at any time to exit the setup procedure Any settings that you have already made are saved 1 Go to System Manag
298. olger D Marcel Vervoort s MacPro Quad Bonjour Shared XF 10 130 84 106 Unidriver EFI Unidriver XF 10 130 84 108 Unidriver EFI Unidriver XF 10 130 84 110 Unidriver EFI Unidriver XF 10 130 84 112 Unidriver EFI Unidriver XF 10 130 84 116 Unidriver EFI Unidriver XF 10 130 84 136 Unidriver EFI Unidriver Name XF 10 130 84 106 Unidriver Location Use PRINTING THROUGH UNIDRIVER 3 On the Default tab from the list of printer names select the name of the computer on which the Fiery XF server is installed and click Add eoo Print amp Scan XF 10 130 84 106 Unidriver Open Print Queue Options amp Supplies Location Kind Fiery XF Unidriver Status Idle _ Share this printer on the network Sharing Preferences Default printer Last Printer Used Default paper size A4 A N N wW Click the lock to prevent further changes The Fiery XF server is added as a printer TO ADD UNIDRIVER AS A PRINTER IN A DIFFERENT SUBNET Make sure that Fiery XF is running before you perform the following steps PRINTING THROUGH UNIDRIVER 1 In System Preferences click Print amp Scan e00 Print amp Scan No printers are available Click Add to set up a printer efe Default printer Last Printer Used Default paper size A4 MY Click the lock to prevent further changes 2 Click Add Ifa menu opens click Ad
299. olor tables However you can also save spot color tables in BCT format BCT format is compatible with earlier versions of Fiery XF A dialog box appears Select workflow s to which to apply the spot color table Workflow Output Device Table Name EFI Linearization Linearization device Production Clean Color 1 Epson Stylus Pro 9900 9910 Company_X od Contour cutting 1 Epson Stylus Pro 9900 9910 I E Select all COLOR EDITOR 8 Select the appropriate check boxes to apply the spot color table to the required workflows Alternatively click Select all If a workflow already has a spot color table assigned to it the original spot color table is overridden but remains available in the list for reselection 9 Click OK The spot color table is created It is applied to the workflows that you selected To apply a spot color table to additional workflows see Applying spot color tables to Fiery XF workflows on page 299 Creating aliases You can create a fixed link to an existing spot color An alias spot color has exactly the same color properties as the original spot color but is saved under a different name for example you could set up the spot color NewSpotColor as an alias for a PANTONE color You cannot edit the color properties of an alias spot color but you can edit the gradation and transparency values However any changes you make to the original spot color are automatically appl
300. olors and spot colors are reproduced in shades of gray This method can be used to print on transparent dot film media using a conventional inkjet printer Screening methods in Fiery XF Fiery XF supports two types of screening methods v1 and v2 e vl screening Using the v1 method the screening file is applied to the output data The printer driver processes the screening file and creates the output data It means that the paper white simulation and full tones are also screened CM and spot Printer processing Output as Ae as driver Printout contone data Job t t fa Dot CREATOR e v2 screening With the v2 method the screening file is applied to the input data The input data is separated into grayscales then the SPT file creates the screened data Thereafter the separated files are treated the same as one bit files For v2 screening you require a license for the OneBit option gt a Job Grayscale separation CM and as n spot color processing Printer driver Printout f iz This method of screening permits higher screen rulings and does not screen paper white simulations or full tones When applying the v2 screening method observe the following Input files must be in the CMYK color space v2 screening cannot be applied to RGB or L a b data The screening and printer resolution must be the same Itis not possible to create a remote
301. on lic e Click Send Email to send the license file to any valid e mail address A dialog box appears to confirm that the license file has been sent to the specified e mail address Click Logout to exit the website Follow the instructions to install the license file manually LICENSING 44 TO INSTALL A LICENSE FILE MANUALLY VIA THE ACTIVATION WIZARD ASSISTANT Use this method to install a previously generated a license file If you are upgrading from an earlier version of the software make sure that you do NOT delete the existing license files from the FlexLM folder These are required in addition to the new license file s If you are extending an existing configuration of Fiery XF with additional options make sure to exit all client versions of the software before starting the following procedure 1 Copy the license file to the computer that is running the Fiery XF server software for example the desktop 2 Start the Activation Wizard Assistant Use one of the following methods e Right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Activate Fiery XF e Go to System Manager On the System menu click Activation Wizard 3 Click the Manually tab s enanos cod E S Activate EFI XF Additionally purchased options must be registered in the Activation Wizard Assistant After installing the license you need to restart the Fiery XF server to activate the additional options It is not necessary to install any additional software Co
302. on screen instructions to complete the installation Install the Cut Server license on a computer that is running the Fiery XF server software For more information see Licensing on page 40 TO SET UP FIERY XF 1 2 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Finishing tab open the Cut pane On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings Under Device manufacturer select a cutter manufacturer The Send to cut server after printing check box is automatically selected This setting ensures that jobs are submitted first to Cut Server and then forwarded to the cutter that you select on this pane Clear the check box if you do not want the cut data to be sent automatically to the cutter after printing Under Device type select a cutter type Under Cut marks type select a cut marks type Under Export path select a folder in which to save the cut contour files Click Choose and browse to a different folder if you do not want to use the default folder The export folder must also be set up as the hotfolder in Cut Server Ifa hotfolder is already set up in Cut Server select it as the export folder here An ai file and an xml job ticket are created during job processing Under Contour cutting click Extract contour path from EPS PDF If you do not extract the contour path from EPS PDF jobs or if the job does not contain a contour path the boundin
303. on the Media pane for the output device If the media is not listed it could be because Fiery XF is not able to detect the base linearization file Make sure that the media profile has been correctly connected to a base linearization file For more information see Profile Connector on page 158 and Third party media profiles on page 170 On the Color Management pane check the profile selection for the workflow TROUBLESHOOTING USB device problems When I connect my USB measuring device to the computer I am requested to install the device driver Should the device driver not be detected automatically Cause Remedy Occasionally the device driver may not be detected automatically when you connect the USB device to the computer If the wizard prompts you to install the device driver from DVD display the contents of the DVD browse to the USB Measurement Devices folder and install the appropriate device driver Alternatively download the current device driver from the manufacturer s website Why can my USB device for example dongle not be found Cause Remedy EFI Support ge N FR uw The device driver may not be correctly installed Install the device driver as follows Right click My Computer and click Properties Click Device Manager Search for Universal Serial Bus controllers Expand the list and search for the device that is not detected Non detected devices appear with a q
304. onfigured to enable communication between server and client The following ports must be available on the server and client computers Port Used for 50005 to 50026 General communication between the Fiery XF server and Fiery XF client 8010 Proxy server 4108 Epson Spectroproofer 8020 8022 8030 8032 JDF integration 27000 to 27009 60000 License management Cut Server 8031 8033 Connectivity between Fiery XF server and VUTEk printers 20020 to 20021 Fiery XF discovery UDP only 8021 9906 18021 Fiery Dashboard 18022 STARTING FIERY XF Furthermore make sure that the following applications can communicate through the firewall Fiery XF Windows applications Macintosh applications Server EFI_XF_Server EFI XF Server EFI Activation Wizard EFI Activation Wizard EFI_XF_Control EFI XF Control ProfileUpdater Profilupdater Updater Updater plink Pscp Client EFI_XF_Client Fiery XF Client EFI_ClientPtchr EFI_ClientPtchr EFI_ClientPatcher ColorEditor ColorEditor Color Tools Color Tools EFI Dot Creator EFIDotCreator Fiery XF Help EFI_Fiery XF HelpU EF ColorVerifier EFIColorVerifier Fiery Device Linker Fiery Device Linker Fiery Printer Profiler Fiery Printer Profiler EFI RGB Profile Connector RGB_Profile_Connector App2 Cut Server Only if installed For the Windows firewall the port and application settings are created automatically by the installer
305. ons are taken into account in the high end preview This process takes approximately one hour For more information see the product documentation TO SET UP THE CADDON CAN CONNECT SOFTWARE The Caddon can connect software runs on the Caddon can view cabinet The program is used to display measure and analyze spectralphotometric image data Jobs that are loaded in Fiery XF are also visible in the job list of the can connect software 1 In the Preferences dialog box type the IP address of the Fiery XF server For more information see the product documentation Verifying color accuracy TO VERIFY THE COLOR ACCURACY OF A JOB 1 Make sure that your measuring device is connected to the Caddon can view cabinet 2 In Fiery XF load the job For more information see To load a job in Fiery XF on page 179 3 Print the job For more information see To print a job on page 182 The print file is sent to Caddon can connect and displayed on the cabinet screen In Fiery XF the job receives the job status Can be verified 4 In Caddon can connect right click the job in the job list and click Verify 5 Measure the control strip For more information see the product documentation PRINTING TO A CADDON CAN VIEW CABINET After measuring the measurement data and job status are displayed simultaneously in Caddon can connect and on the Verify pane in Fiery XF If a job fails verification you may be able to improve on the r
306. opriate source profile is applied 9 Save your changes If you work regularly with different profiles and rendering intents it is a good idea to save each group of settings as a preset A preset is a template for a group of settings that are saved under a unique name You can create presets in the pane bar menu The next time you set up color management you need only to select the preset name Rendering intents Rendering intents describe how out of gamut colors are adjusted to fit into the destination color gamut The color gamut of the source color space often exceeds that of the destination color space of the printer When this happens saturated colors are liable to become clipped inaccurately represented This is the reason why digital photographs that appear in vivid saturated colors when viewed in the RGB color space of a digital camera or a computer monitor look dull in comparison when they are printed out using the smaller color space of a CMYK printer SELECTING PROFILES AND RENDERING INTENTS The illustration shows how different rendering intents project out of gamut colors to within the available color space Fiery XF uses the following rendering intents Rendering intent Description Absolute colorimetric This rendering intent leaves all colors within the destination color paper white gamut unchanged thus maintaining color accuracy If the destination color gamut is smaller than the source color gamut i
307. or incoming one bit files that belong to the same job When this time span has elapsed Fiery XF assumes that all the files have been received and starts printing e Select Number of one bit files in a job and type a number This setting defines how many one bit files belong to each job Fiery XF waits until the defined number of one bit files has been received before starting to print This setting overrides Waiting time for job completion and prevents jobs from being automatically printed when the time out period has elapsed Since printing starts as soon as all one bit files have been received it prevents unnecessary idle time 3 Select Sub directory for each job optional This setting determines whether a sub directory is created for each job You must select this setting if your one bit files were created by a RIP that automatically generates sub directories in which to save one bit files 4 Under File name contains the name of the color separations select or define a character sequence that fits the file naming convention of your one bit files This setting ensures that Fiery XF correctly recognizes the job name and all one bit files that belong to each job Make sure that you select a character sequence that is generic for all the files that you process By default Fiery XF analyzes file names from right to left whereby the file extension is not taken into account The variables have the following mean
308. ormation see To load a job in Fiery XF on page 179 You can set the workflow offline at workflow exit For more information see To set a system configuration offline on page 63 It is not possible to make job changes after you have created a step and repeat or a tiling If you need to make changes you must first reset the step and repeat or tiling Rotating a job You can rotate jobs by 90 180 or 270 degrees If you select Minimal media consumption images are rotated automatically if media wastage can be reduced in this way TO ROTATE A JOB 1 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job 2 Do one of the following On the Layout tab open the Layout Options pane Under Rotate select an angle of rotation In the preview window right click the page point to Rotate and click an angle of rotation On the toolbar click Transform Job Click the down arrow next to the Rotation Angle button and click an angle of rotation EDITING JOBS In the preview window rest the pointer on a page edge near to but not directly on a handle The pointer changes into an arrowed circle Drag the pointer in the direction that you want to rotate the page When you release the mouse button the page snaps to the nearest angle of rotation that is divisible by 90 Mirroring a job You can flip a job along its horizontal or vertical axis TO MIRROR A JOB 1 Go to Job Explorer In the job list
309. ower than extracting the information from the job but the result is more accurate 3 Save your changes Applying a working color space You can determine which source profile is applied to PDF jobs For PDF jobs that contain mainly RGB images applying the RGB source profile ensures that you achieve the best possible color quality CMYK workflow CMM a a5 PS PDF Format Contone Image RGB workflow CMM w F S E 5 Q a g n a 8 POSTSCRIPT AND PDF Joss TO APPLY A WORKING COLOR SPACE 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane 2 Under Working color space click an item Note the following e CMYK must be used in proofing workflows e CMYK must be used for PostScript jobs with cut contours This is because the RGB working color space converts all spot colors to RGB which prevents the cut contour from being extracted 3 Save your changes Overprinting in composite jobs Intentionally printing one layer of ink on top of another is known as overprinting Overprinting is sometimes used to avoid the need for trapping and to prevent gaps from appearing between colors P 8 On a printing press each color of ink that is used in a document is printed one at a time In other words each pr
310. p and set the overprinting setting to overprint CUTTING OPTIONS The following illustration shows the effect of applying the overprint setting ADVANCED LAYOUT ADVANCED LAYOUT The Advanced Layout Option is a smart nesting program It provides many professional functions that are not part of the standard nesting feature of Fiery XF If you have a license for the Advanced Layout Option you can e Nest jobs according to their contours e Create cut contours that are based on individual image shape with an automatic bleed that clones image content e Create perfectly aligned double sided prints e Optimize cut contours for smoothness e Place i cut marks and grommet marks around the smart nesting Be aware that jobs are assumed to be ready for output In Advanced Layout jobs can be scaled but they cannot otherwise be edited Advanced Layout supports the following file formats JPG TIFF PSD PDF and image EPS L ADVANCED LAYOUT TO EXPORT A JOB TO ADVANCED LAYOUT 1 Go to Job Explorer Do one of the following e In the job list right click one or more jobs and click Advanced Layout e In the job list click one or more jobs On the toolbar click Layout If you select multiple jobs from different workflows simultaneously you are prompted to choose a workflow for Advanced Layout Only one set of workflow settings can be exported The job is exported and the Advanced Layout program window op
311. pace Manager Workspaces are automatically available to all users with administrator rights They can be assigned manually to other users For more information see To assign a workspace on page 71 Editing workspaces You can make changes to an existing workspace TO EDIT A WORKSPACE 1 Do one of the following e On the tab bar click the menu button point to Workspace and click Workspace Manager e On the menu bar click Workspace and click Workspace Manager e In the layout area click a user On the Profile pane open the Workspace tab and click Edit 2 In the left hand column click a workspace 3 In the right hand column select or clear the check boxes The current settings from each pane not the default settings are saved to the workspace WORKSPACES 71 4 Do one of the following e Click Apply to save your settings Then click Close e Click Close The Confirm dialog box appears Click Yes to save your settings and to exit Workspace Manager The workspace is updated Users must restart the Fiery XF client to access the updated workspace Until then the original workspace settings continue to be available Deleting custom workspaces Make sure that the custom workspace is not selected for any user You cannot delete a workspace that is currently selected TO DELETE A CUSTOM WORKSPACE 1 Do one of the following e On the tab bar click the menu button point to Workspace and click Delete Workspace
312. page 201 TO LOAD A JOB IN FIERY XF 1 Go to Job Explorer LOADING AND PRINTING A JOB 2 Do one of the following e On the toolbar click Import Job e On the File menu click Import Job e Right click anywhere in the job list and click Import Job e Drag a file directly into the job list for example from the desktop or from a network folder The Import to dialog box appears Workflow EFI Linearization Production Quality 1 T Hold Job 3 In the list select the workflow Select the workflow that is set up with the correct settings for your job For example e Load a photo that you want to print in bright vivid colors in a photo workflow e Load a proofing job in a workflow that is set up to reproduce the colors of a printing press 4 Select Hold Job optional Held jobs are loaded in Fiery XF but are not automatically printed You can start printing when you are ready for example after you have applied job settings If your job can be output according to the workflow settings there is no need to select the check box 5 Click Import Your job is loaded in the job list In a fully automatic workflow the job is processed and printed according to the workflow settings If you need to edit the job you can cancel job processing and make job specific settings For more information see To cancel job processing on page 33 If you loaded the job as a hold j
313. port in RIP separations PostScript level 3 does PostScript level 2 does not By forcing in RIP separation you make sure that the in RIP information from the graphics program is processed even if the special PostScript command is missing and regardless of the type of PostScript printer that was used to create the file If you do not force the use of in RIP separation jobs are output as follows PostScript jobs that were created for a PostScript level 3 printer are output separated on printers that support in RIP separation If the printer does not support in RIP separation the job is output composite PostScript jobs that were created for a PostScript level 2 printer are always output composite because spot color separations cannot be correctly interpreted 3 Save your changes POSTSCRIPT AND PDF JOBS Defining the page size definition PDF jobs The page size of PDF jobs can be defined by the media box the crop box the bleed box the art box or the trim box Page boxes in PDF files 1 Media box 2 Bleed box 3 Trim box Crop box 4 Art box Media box Specifies the width and height of the page The MediaBox is slightly larger than the actual dimensions of the printed page in order to include elements that extend beyond the edge of the paper such as bleed and crop marks Bleed box Defines the region to which the contents of the page must be clipped when output in a production environmen
314. print individual pages of a multipage document select Print page or sheet and type the required range of pages for example type 2 6 10 13 to print pages 2 6 10 11 12 and 13 Then type the number of copies to print If you enter a range of pages you can print odd and even pages separately by selecting the appropriate item from the Pages setting You can sort the order in which pages are printed The default order for printing three copies of a three page document is 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 Sorted copies are printed in the following order 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 You can reverse the print order by selecting Reverse order 2 Save your changes LOADING AND PRINTING A JOB TO PRINT A JOB 1 Make sure that a media is loaded in the printer and that the printer is switched on 2 Print the job using one of the following methods e On the toolbar click Print e On the File menu click Print e In the job list right click the job list and click Print PRINTING THROUGH A HOTFOLDER PRINTING THRO UGH A HOTFOLDER Hotfolders are folders with predefined access rights They enable users who do not have Fiery XF installed on their computers to copy jobs to a centrally located folder The hotfolder is routinely monitored by Fiery XF and jobs that are placed in the hotfolder are loaded automatically into the Fiery XF workflow and processed according to the workflow settings There are two way
315. printer or job status The All Jobs button lets you view the jobs from all workflows By default the selector is hidden To CUSTOMIZE THE JOB EXPLORER WINDOW Job Explorer is divided into four areas e Job list e Preview window e Property inspector e Selector You can hide the preview window property inspector and selector The job list cannot be hidden GETTING TO KNOW FIERY XF 1 Do one of the following On the Workspace menu click Hide Preview Hide Selector or Hide Property Inspector e Rest the pointer on the edge of an area until it changes into a double headed arrow and click To hide the preview window the pointer must rest exactly on the sash bar in the middle Job Explorer 1 Click to show hide 2 Drag to change the size re iame _ iae a es ey ay aay aed You can also show or hide property inspector by right clicking a job in the job list and clicking the appropriate command System Manager System Manager is where you create and configure system configurations System Manager is accessible to users with administrative rights only Property inspector 1 Tab bar 2 Pane bar with collapsed pane 3 Expanded pane 4 Menu button GETTING TO KNOW FIERY XF Legend Description 1 The layout area is used for creating configuring and managing system configurations The layout area shows which users can print to which workflows and which workflo
316. provides maximum flexibility in customizing the software to suit you own particular workflow requirements One server version can be accessed from an unlimited number of client versions A Fiery XF client does not have to be installed on the same computer as the Fiery XF server The minimum version of the software comprises e Fiery XF includes one server version and an unlimited number of client versions The server is the software s nerve center It runs as a service and is responsible for job processing When you restart your computer after installing the software the server software starts automatically The client software simply provides an intuitive user interface All settings and actions that are initiated on the client computer are sent to the server for processing e One Output M Option for one printer up to 18 inches A wide range of additional options is available to supplement the standard version With the use of the appropriate options you can set up your ideal workflows and completely do away with the need for third party products INTRODUCTION System requirements The following recommended system requirements are necessary to install and run Fiery XF successfully Windows e Operating systems Fiery XF component Server System requirements Windows 7 Home Premium Professional Ultimate 64 bit Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit Windows 8 8 N 8 Pro 8 Pro N 64 bit 32
317. pse Dot CREATOR 5 Select a screen ruling and a screen angle 6 Select Rotate by 7 5 to prevent moir optional This setting rotates all screen angles by 7 5 counter clockwise to simulate the screen angles that are commonly used in flexographic printing Moir patterns can occur as a result of an unfavorable combination of print resolution and screen ruling for example if two halftone screens with only slightly different screen rulings are superimposed or if they are rotated by only slightly different angles The screen angles C 15 degrees M 45 degrees K 75 degrees and Y 90 degrees or 0 degrees produce the best results Screened printouts without moir patterns are generally only possible with screen rulings of up to 150 lpi 7 Click Preview to display a preview 8 Save your settings as a preset optional By saving your settings you can quickly and easily reload your settings at a later date 9 Click Save The screening file is saved to the Screening folder When you have created a screening file you can to incorporate it into a media profile For more information see Incorporating a screening file into a media profile on page 350 TO CREATE A SCREENING FILE WITH CUSTOM SCREEN ANGLES You can save your settings as a preset at any stage of the procedure if required By saving your settings you can quickly and easily reload the preset at a later date to make further changes 1 Start Dot Creator
318. put device from the system configuration e You can set the system configuration offline at a certain stage SETTING SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS ONLINE OFFLINE 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area set the required stage of the workflow offline Do any of the following e Click a green arrow to turn it into a red rectangle e Right click an object and click the following items see table below e Click an object user workflow or output device On the Edit menu point to the appropriate item and click an item Object Menu item User User name is Online Workflow Workflow Accepts New Jobs Workflow Processes and Prints Jobs Output device Printer name is Online Setting a system configuration aa I r I Tes I z I amet Denes offline 1 Prevents the user from logging on 2 Prevents automatic job detection For example hot folders are no longer monitored 3 Prevents jobs from being processed by Fiery XF automatically Stopping the workflow at this stage is the equivalent of loading an on hold job 4 Prevents jobs from being printed SETTING SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS ONLINE OFFLINE 2 Right click a line connecting two objects and click Disconnect Disconnect users workflows and output devices as required You can also use the following menu items Action To disconnect one user from one workflow Description In the layout area
319. r profile When you save an edited simulation reference profile it is saved with a new name To select a simulation reference profile in Fiery XF see Source profiles and simulation reference profiles on page 138 Inspecting a profile Profile Inspector is a tool for inspecting and comparing the color gamuts of RGB CMYK and named ICC profiles either individually or in pairs The profiles are displayed as three dimensional models CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES TO VIEW THE COLOR GAMUT OF AN ICC PROFILE 1 Start Color Tools and click Inspect Profile File Model Instrument Help am G Viewing Profile Coated FOGRA39 ISO 12647 2 2004 x a00 Clevaluated PCS to Device Render Init a _lPropertora PointSize 2 Q Background 3 O Wltighting 6 g Selected Color Information Description No point currently selected Aes Input 2 Click the Info button and follow the on screen instructions to view or compare color gamuts Relinearizing the printer Every printer even mass produced printers of the same model display slightly different color properties Added to this the color reproduction of a printer can change over a period of time You can compensate for deviances in color by performing a relinearization A relinearization adjusts the ink densities to those of the reference printer on which the media profile was created thus ensuring that the printer s color reproduction p
320. r the preview in dots per inch or in pixels If you need to edit individual pixels in a preview image it is recommended that you select a high resolution The higher the resolution the sharper the image in a zoomed in view and the more precisely you can edit the image 4 Save the workflow JOB LIST AND PREVIEW WINDOW To FORCE A PREVIEW OF A LOADED JOB 1 Do one of the following e In the job list right click the job and click Preview e In the job list click the job On the Edit menu click Preview Job list The job list provides an overview of loaded jobs The job status is color coded for easy recognition Customizing the job list You can customize the information that is displayed in the job list e You can add additional columns e You can rearrange the order of columns You can sort the order in which jobs are listed e You can filter the job list TO ADD OR REMOVE COLUMNS In addition to the default column headings you can display other job specific information 1 In the job list right click on any column heading and click an item To add a column click an item that does not have a check mark next to it To remove a column click an item that has a check mark next to it The columns Job Status File Name and Job ID cannot be removed TO REARRANGE THE COLUMN ORDER 1 Drag a column heading to the left or to the right D The columns Job Status File Name and Job ID
321. ration 62 Context sensitive help 17 Control strips dynamic wedge 132 selecting 130 Correcting color 163 CPSI 94 Crop marks 221 Cropping jobs 89 Customizing Job Explorer 28 job list 73 property inspector 30 System Manager 54 Verifier 328 workspaces 68 Cut contours 228 defining as spot color 240 in Advanced Layout 248 in Fiery XF 229 in the graphics program 228 processing 245 Cut Server 237 Cutting options 228 D Deleting jobs 33 temporary files 368 Delta E tolerances defining 306 318 warning indicator 329 INDEX Device link profiles 144 creating 155 Disconnecting system configuration 65 Dongle ID finding 20 41 Dot Creator 343 starting 347 Duplex printing in Advanced Layout 248 Dynamic rendering intent 141 Dynamic wedge 132 E Embedded output intent 139 source profiles 138 Environment backup and restore 263 EPS job detection 95 Exiting Fiery XF 35 F Fiery Global University 380 Fiery XF cleaning up 368 language 31 logging off 35 password 55 program folders changing default 367 structure 363 view saving 69 windows 27 system of measurement 31 uninstalling 381 updating 166 Fiery XF client exiting 35 starting 20 22 Fiery XF Control 18 exiting 21 icon displaying 18 21 processes 19 Fiery XF files uploading 168 Fiery XF server logging on 23 starting 22 stopping 20 File formats supported 32 printing to 212 Files cleaning up 368 Firewall settings 24 Flexo printing simulating 361 Foot
322. re Normally you will already have generated and installed a license file as part of the software installation procedure However there may be occasions when you need to generate a new license file for a newly purchased Fiery XF option To generate a license file you require the following e You require a computer with Internet access If you do not have a computer with Internet access you can ask your authorized dealer to generate a license file for you e You require the EAC that is printed on the Product Activation Certificate inside the product packaging e You require the dongle ID If the Fiery XF server is installed on a computer that has access to the Internet the dongle ID is detected automatically If the Fiery XF server is installed on a computer that does not have Internet access make a note of the dongle ID before you start the licensing procedure LICENSING 41 TO DETERMINE THE DONGLE ID You can find the dongle ID in Fiery XF Control Fiery XF Control is located in the status area of the taskbar Windows or in the Dock Macintosh of the computer that is running the server software If the Fiery XF Control icon is not visible or is displayed in a different color do the following e Make sure that Fiery XF Control is started e Make sure that the Windows taskbar is displayed In Windows make sure that Fiery XF Control is not a hidden icon For more information see Fiery XF Control on page 18 1 Plug the don
323. reater distance If your printer uses solvent ink be aware that the density of color will be reduced if you change the resolution It is recommended that you do not change the print resolution for UV printers PRINTING TO A VUTEK PRINTER 12 In the layout area connect the output device to a workflow For more information see Setting system configurations online offline on page 61 13 Save your changes PRINTING TO A CADDON CAN VIEW CABINET PRINTING TO A CADDON CAN VIEW CABINET If you have a license for the Softproof Output Option you can print to a Caddon can view cabinet The Softproof Output Option enables you to simulate and measure color output on a high resolution screen Verifying the color accuracy of a soft proof is cost effective and saves media without compromising on the quality of the proof To create a reliable soft proof all the devices must be precisely calibrated to ensure color consistency across the workflow Setting up Fiery XF This section describes which steps are necessary to set up a workflow and output device in Fiery XF TO SET UP A WORKFLOW To print to a Caddon can view cabinet it is recommended that you set up a verify workflow Note the following You can set up the workflow for one or two static control strips The dynamic wedge is not supported e The following measuring devices are supported ES 1000 and X Rite il Make sure that you select control strips that are
324. riate box 7 Save your changes In Job Explorer you can compare the effect of your adjustments with the original by clearing and reselecting the check box in the pane bar MAKING COLOR ADJUSTMENTS If you work regularly with different color adjustments it is a good idea to save each group of settings as a preset A preset is a template for a group of settings that are saved under a unique name You can create presets in the pane bar menu The next time you apply a set of color adjustments you need only to select the preset name Removing color impurities During color management colors are converted to the CMYK color space of the printer This process can result in small amounts of CMYK inks to be involuntarily added to pure color definitions Black ink When pure black is subjected to color management it is converted to CMYK which produces a dirty looking black in the printout By forcing the use of black ink you can ensure that all definitions of pure black by pass color management and are output using only the black ink of the printer This setting can most usefully be applied to text and other elements that are defined as pure black in the graphics program TO FORCE THE USE OF PURE BLACK INK 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Color tab open the Color Management pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Color tab open the Co
325. roperties remain constant It is recommended that you perform a relinearization in the following instances e Ifyou are using a media profile that was not created on your exact printer for example the media profiles that are provided with Fiery XF e After changing the print head e Ifyou notice that your proofs no longer match earlier proof results for example if the ink smudges or is not evenly distributed on the media or if cockling occurs as a result of too much ink on the media CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES As a general rule of thumb it is a good idea to perform a relinearization approximately every two weeks TO RELINEARIZE THE PRINTER BY MEASUREMENT When you relinearize the printer by measurement you optimize the L a b values in the base linearization file 1 Connect your measuring device 2 Start Color Tools and click Re Linearization by Measurement You can also start the Re Linearization by Measurement tool directly by transferring the settings from the output device to the linearization device If you start the Re Linearization by Measurement tool in this way many of the printer settings are already made for you Base linearization Please selec bazeinearzaton fi Measuring device EFLES i000 Relinearization control The optimization will be done automatically for a cyde count of The optimization will be stopped at a dE average of 2 isig Step 1 Print chart Print Step 2 Me
326. roportions If you change the height the width is adjusted accordingly and vice versa To scale width and height by different factors click the Scale Proportionally button to deactivate proportional scaling When proportional scaling is deactivated the button has a gray background e On the toolbar click Transform Job 1 and click the button 2 to activate percentual scaling Type a value in the appropriate box 4 5 to define a width or height Toolbar 1 Transform Job button LA r ph 017 Inch E FITA To ry Scale Percentually button D r fl 38494 inh E 7796 9 i 2 3 Scale Proportionally button 4 Edit boxes for width and height By default the page retains its proportions If you change the height the width is adjusted accordingly and vice versa To scale width and height by different factors click the Scale Proportionally button 3 to deactivate proportional scaling When proportional scaling is deactivated the button has a gray background e In the preview window right click the page point to Scale point to Percentual and click an item e On the Edit menu point to Scale point to Percentual and click an item TO SCALE A JOB NUMERICALLY You can scale a job by defining page dimensions as numeric values 1 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job 2 Do one of the following e On the Layout tab open the Layout Options pane Under Scale page select Scale job numerically In the bo
327. rs in the graphics program In order for Fiery XF to extract cut contours from the job observe the following when creating the image file in the graphics program e The cut contour must be defined as a CMYK spot color e The cut contour must be defined in a separate layer e Cut contours can be saved in different layers CUTTING OPTIONS e The layer with the cut contour must be the top layer of the job For example in Illustrator the cut contour layer must be at the top of the list of layers If the job contains a lot of transparencies it can slow down the RIPing speed To get round this problem it is recommended that you flatten all transparency levels In Illustrator On the Object menu click Flatten Transparency and clear the check box for converting all strokes to outlines If all transparencies are flattened the cut contour can be extracted even if it is not the top layer of the job Fiery XF provides a set of default cut contour names that are commonly used in the industry Each name represents a particular cutting type Fiery XF detects automatically cut contours with a default name The default cut contour names are e Regmark e Crease e Kiss Cut e Laser Cut Pen Plot e Router Cut e Score e Through Cut e CutContour e Die line Cut contours in Fiery XF Fiery XF detects automatically the default contour names If a cut contour is saved under a non default name you can either define it in System Mana
328. rsion of contone to halftone data is the most time consuming stage of job processing By activating multi threaded halftone processing the job s conversion to halftone data is spread out among several CPU cores thus speeding up the output Multi threaded halftone processing is a global setting that is automatically applied to all workflows However not all output devices support this feature It is available only for certain halftone printers that are driven by an EFI printer driver INCREASING JOB SPEED Generally speaking the time saving potential is greatest for the following types of jobs e Jobs that apply the halftoning method SE1 SE1 halftoning takes longer to process than SE2 halftoning e Jobs with a higher output resolution Be aware that the simultaneous processing of multiple jobs can slow down the output of some jobs This happens because only one job can be assigned a higher priority and be processed by several CPU cores This job is therefore printed first while other jobs are each processed by a single CPU core at a slower rate TO ACTIVATE MULTI THREADED HALFTONE PROCESSING 1 Go to System Manager On the Tools menu click System Information The System Information dialog box appears 2 Under General settings select Use multi threaded halftone processing 3 Save your changes Load balancing If you load jobs into Fiery XF through a hotfolder you can set up the hotfolder to be monitored
329. ry XF completes job processing and then starts printing RIPing and printing on the fly means that job processing and printing occur simultaneously As soon as one chunk of job data has been processed it is printed This setting increases the speed at which jobs are output However the printer may pause from time to time which can lead to undesirable lines in the printout TO ACTIVATE RIP AND PRINT ON THE FLY 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Workflow tab open the Speed pane 2 Select RIP and print on the fly 3 Save your changes RIP resolution The RIP resolution is the resolution that is used to process a job Afterwards the job is converted to the print resolution The RIP resolution affects the print speed and the print quality The higher the RIP resolution the better the print quality but the longer it takes to print the job Conversely a lower RIP resolution prints faster but results in a draft like print quality It is not possible to process a job at a higher RIP resolution than the print resolution Do not use this setting when processing one bit files A low RIP resolution results in fuzzy dots in the output TO REDUCE THE RIP RESOLUTION 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Workflow tab open the Speed pane 2 Move the slider to Fast 3 Save your changes INCREASING JOB SPEED Bi directional printi
330. s clipped in the output 1 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Layout tab open the Layout Options pane and select the Print jobs that exceed printable area check box 2 On the toolbar click Print To output a job without clipping you can scale the job or you can set up the printer for a larger media size Cropping a job You can change or increase the focal point of an image by removing unwanted background space TO CROP A JOB 1 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job b 2 On the toolbar click the down arrow next to the Transform Job button and click Crop Job gt hd H EDITING JOBS In the preview drag the pointer to select the section of the page that you want to crop Visual aids are available to help you to specify an exact area For more information see Visual aids for page alignment on page 77 Toolbar 1 Crop Job button 2 Dimensions of crop area 3 Top bottom margin widths 4 Left right margin widths EDITING JOBS You can finetune the selected area before cropping it e To reposition a crop box hold down lt Alt gt and drag the pointer from the center of the crop box e To resize a crop box do one of the following Rest the pointer on a handle along an edge of the crop box The pointer changes into a double headed arrow Then drag the pointer On the toolbar in the appropriate boxes type new values You can change the dim
331. s 370 License problems 372 Printing problems 374 Color management problems 377 Media profile problems 378 USB device problems 379 EFI Support 379 Knowledge Center 380 Online user forum 380 Fiery Global University 380 UNINSTALLING 381 GLOSSARY 382 INDEX 390 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION The Fiery XF product family is the perfect tool for anyone wanting to achieve high quality and consistent color reproduction Fiery XF targets the proofing production and photo markets as well as the sign and display and print for pay markets It is an ICC compliant client server application that runs on both Windows and Macintosh operating systems Its modular design makes it suitable for any size of operation and means that it can be flexibly configured to meet your individual requirements Fiery XF enables you to e Achieve the maximum gamut from the printer media and ink combination essential requirements for production heavy environments for which Fiery XF s intelligent clean color technologies tiling advanced step and repeat color adjustments for last minute edits and professional finishing are also a must e Simulate the colors achieved on a professional printing press or any other printer thereby making it possible to reproduce genuine ISO 12467 7 8 compliant validation prints and contract proofs on a conventional printer Program architecture Fiery XF is based on a server client architecture of modular design It
332. s can be restored only in System Manager 1 Do one of the following e In the layout area right click an empty area and click Import Environment e On the File menu click Import Environment The Import Environment dialog box appears It displays the contents of the Environments folder 2 Click the backup file If the folder is empty click Choose and browse to the backup file Unless you defined a different destination during the backup procedure the file is located on the desktop Select the backup file and click Open 3 Select Allow overwriting optional If you select this check box only files with unique names are restored All existing files of the same name are overwritten 4 Click OK A dialog box appears when the restore has been successfully completed 5 Click OK e Ifan appropriate output option license is available workflow and output device are restored and connected to each other However check the printer connection before printing through the restored environment e Ifan insufficient number of appropriate output option licenses is available workflow and output device are restored but not connected to each other e Ifno appropriate output option license is available the workflow is restored but not the output device SPOT COLORS SPOT COLORS A spot color is any color that can be printed with its own ink in a single print run In contrast process color printing uses a mixture of cyan magent
333. s directly from a graphics program This would be necessary for example if the image is in a format that is not supported for JDE In this case you can add a job by assigning a JDF ticket 1 In the job list click the job that you want to add to the JDF job 2 On the File tab open the Job Ticket pane 3 Under Attach JDF ticket from the drop down list box select the JDF job and click Apply JDF ticket names are made up of the job ID and the file name If the job has been loaded with the default name you can rename it with a unique name to make it easier to identify The job is moved and becomes part of the JDF job JDF INTEGRATION Editing JDF jobs in Fiery XF Normally JDF jobs that are submitted to Fiery XF are processed as soon as they enter the job list Therefore if you need to edit a JDF job in Fiery XF make sure that the workflow is set up as a hold workflow For more information see To set a system configuration offline on page 63 When you have made your required changes you can start printing manually You can edit content files like any other job For more information see Editing jobs on page 85 If your JDF job contains multiple content files the nesting settings are also available For more information see Aligning nested pages on page 112 TO DELETE CONTENT FILES 1 Do one of the following e In the job list right click the content file and click Delete e In the job list right c
334. s not support native ICC profiles and ICC profile tagging in PDF objects e Adobe PDF Print Engine also known as APPE APPE can process PDF jobs with up to 32 separations without converting them to PostScript format If APPE is applied to a PDF job with more than 32 separations the print engine automatically switches to CPSI The maximum number of separations that can be processed is 127 APPE does not support contour cutting If APPE is applied to a job with cut contours the printer engine automatically switches to CPSI APPE supports native ICC profiles and ICC profile tagging in PDF objects APPE can process composite jobs quicker than CPSI You can speed up job processing by increasing the number of Adobe print engines that are used For more information see Adobe print engines on page 354 TO SWITCH TO A DIFFERENT PDF PRINT ENGINE 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane 2 Under PDF print engine click an item Select the CPSI or APPE print engine 3 Save your changes POSTSCRIPT AND PDF Joss TO SWITCH TO A DIFFERENT IMAGE EPS PDF PRINT ENGINE The image EPS PDF print engine determines whether jobs are output with the internal EFI module or with CPSI 1 Do one of the following e Go to Syste
335. s to print jobs through a hotfolder You can copy jobs manually into the hotfolder You can set up Fiery XF as a virtual printer Setting up a virtual printer enables you to select Fiery XF in the print menu of the graphics program Jobs that are submitted for printing in this way are loaded into Fiery XF through the hotfolder For more information see Printing through a virtual printer on page 201 Hotfolders are normally set up for one particular workflow However it is possible to set up a hotfolder to be monitored by more than one workflow by applying load balancing In this case jobs that are placed in the hotfolder are diverted automatically to the first idle workflow that becomes available For more information see Load balancing on page 355 Creating a hotfolder in Fiery XF Hotfolders can be created at the following locations On the same computer as the Fiery XF server local hotfolder On a different computer from the Fiery XF server network hotfolder In Windows the following requirements must be met Both computers must be logged on with the same login credentials The Windows user must have administrator status For more information see Setting up a Windows user on page 187 TO SET UP A HOTFOLDER IN FIERY XF 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow 2 Set the workflow offline by clicking on the green arrow at workflow entry For more information see To se
336. se file through the activation website on page 43 You may need to restart the Fiery XF server if the license is not automatically detected For more information see Fiery XF Server Restart on page 20 TO GENERATE A NEW LICENSE FILE THROUGH THE ACTIVATION WEBSITE 10 11 Use this method if the computer that is running the Fiery XF server does not have Internet access On a computer with Internet access go to the website http activation efi com The Login dialog box appears Click a language button Enter the EAC code in the box and click Submit The EAC code is case sensitive Select the check box to the left of a listed product to indicate the items that you want to license Then click Next Type your dongle ID Then click Next For more information on where to find the dongle ID see To determine the dongle ID on page 41 Type an e mail address Then click Next The e mail address will be used to notify you of product innovations etc Fill out the online form with your user registration details Then click Next Check the order information and the dongle ID Then click Next If you need to make any changes click Previous to return to an earlier dialog box Specify how you want to receive your license file Select one of the following methods e Click Save to File to save the generated license file to a defined location on your computer The license file is saved as a text file with the file extensi
337. sed in a document is printed one at a time Each 8 P printing plate that is used on the press is made up only of components of just one color Separations are artwork that is split into four plates of cyan magenta yellow and black for process printing CMYK or into the required number of plates for spot color printing one plate for each color of ink Each separation prints a single process or spot color See also Composite job Screen angle The degree of rotation at which a halftone screen is printed Each element in a four color separation must be photographed through a screen that has been placed at a specific angle in order to eliminate moir patterns when the colors are superimposed Precise alignment is necessary and the order in which the color separations are printed can also affect the finished print image See also Halftone screening and Moir Screen ruling Sheet The number of lines per centimeter or per linear inch in a halftone screen The higher the screen ruling the smaller the dot size and the smoother the tonal changes will appear to the eye See also Halftone screening Sheet refers to the defined output size of a nesting It can be equal to or smaller or larger than the media size that is defined for the output device If the defined sheet size exceeds the maximum media size that is supported by the selected printer the nesting can be output as a tiling System configuration A system configuration
338. shadow with the color accuracy and paper white simulation of the rendering intent Absolute colorimetric With this rendering intent image data retains its definition in dark areas It means that shades of color are still visible in areas of shadow Relative colorimetric no paper white This rendering intent compares the white point of the source color space with that of the destination color space and adjusts all colors accordingly All colors that lie within the color gamut of the destination color space are accurately reproduced Any colors that lie outside the color gamut of the destination color space are replaced by the colorimetrically closest color that can be reproduced Relative colorimetric with black point compensation Absolute colorimetric with black point compensation If the black point of the source color space differs greatly from that of the target color space you can apply black point compensation on top of the rendering intents Relative colorimetric and Absolute colorimetric With black point compensation the full dynamic range of the source color space is mapped to the full dynamic range of the destination color space However if the black point of the source color space is darker contrast is lost during the conversion Activating black point compensation may cause gray shadows However this setting can be applied usefully to darker source black points Applying b
339. shared printer by name and type the IP address or the computer name of the Fiery XF server computer followed by the name of the virtual printer Use the following syntax http xxx xxx xxx xxx 63 1 printers virtualprintername or http computername 63 1 printers virtualprintername If you do not know the computer name you can search for it on the computer that is running the Fiery XF server Click Start right click Computer and click Properties Under Computer name domain and workgroup settings look for the computer name Click Next The virtual printer is installed Click Next Set the virtual printer as the default printer optional Print a test page to check that the virtual printer is working properly optional The test page appears in the job list of Fiery XF Click Finish You can now print to the virtual printer from your graphics program Occasionally problems arise when you try and print to the Fiery XF virtual printer that is located in a different subnet Although the virtual printer can be selected in the graphics program the jobs are not loaded in Fiery XF For more information see To print to a Fiery XF Macintosh server in a different subnet on page 210 Printing from Macintosh to a Fiery XF Windows server Perform the following steps on the computer on which the graphics program is installed TO SET UP A CONNECTION TO A REMOTE FIERY XF VIRTUAL PRINTER IN THE SAME SUBNET 1 2 In S
340. sirable effects such as unsmooth color gradients In a device link profile the color separations are maintained thus preserving the black channel of the source profile N gt CMYK CMYK ZEZ Preserving the black channel of the input color space is one of the main advantages of using a device link profile For this reason device link profiles are often used during data preparation for example to convert from ISOcoated to ISOuncoated Furthermore device link profiles enable you to by pass the L a b color space thus preventing contamination by other colors In other words 50 black stays 50 black However you should be aware that device link profiles are not as flexible in use as other ICC profiles Each device link profile can be used only for the specific combination of source and destination profiles for which it was created SELECTING PROFILES AND RENDERING INTENTS For more information on creating device link profiles see Creating a device link profile on page 155 TO SELECT A DEVICE LINK PROFILE TO OUTPUT TO A PRINTER To output to a printer copy the device link profile to the Profiles subfolder in which the base linearization file is located For more information see Program structure on page 363 Go to System Manager In the layout area click an output device On the Media tab open the Print Configuration pane Under Media name select the name of the device link profile T
341. specifically for these devices For more information see To set up a verify workflow on page 302 TO SET UP AN OUTPUT DEVICE FOR CADDON CAN VIEW 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the output device On the Device tab open the Information pane Under Manufacturer select EFI Under Device type select EFI Softproof Output When you select the Softproof option the Description box changes to Device ID Type the device ID of the Caddon can view device The device ID is the serial number of the Caddon can view cabinet You can get the device ID from the Preferences dialog box in the Caddon can connect software On the Device tab open the Connection pane and complete your settings For more information on individual settings see the context sensitive help PRINTING TO A CADDON CAN VIEW CABINET 6 In the layout area connect the output device to a workflow For more information see Setting system configurations online offline on page 61 7 Save your changes Setting up the Caddon hardware and software This section describes which steps are necessary to set up the Caddon hardware and software TO SET UP THE CADDON CAN VIEW CABINET 1 Calibrate the Caddon can view cabinet using the Caddon calibration wizard Use the calibration wizard to create a monitor profile to calibrate the lamps and to measure the ambient light conditions The ambient light conditi
342. st one color You can change the displayed color via the drop down list box above the grid diagram Alternatively you can display all inks simultaneously by selecting All 4 Inthe Ink column type a gradient between 1 and 99 B COLOR EDITOR 5 Do one of the following To add color gradients in the printer s color space type appropriate values in the characterization table e To add color gradients in the L a b or LCH color space connect your measuring device click Measure and follow the on screen instructions to measure a color patch The default measuring device is ES 1000 If you have an ES 2000 you must select it first in the Preferences dialog box For more information see Measurement device settings on page 282 The spot color and its gradients are displayed You can view the spot color from any angle by dragging the pointer to rotate the diagram After you have defined a gradient in the printer s color space you can finetune it by dragging the appropriate point along the curve in the diagram 6 Save your changes Checking the color accuracy of L a b spot colors You can check how accurately an L a b spot color can be reproduced using the selected profiles You can also check if an L a b spot color lies within the color gamut of your printer The color gamut describes the full range of colors that the printer can reproduce During job processing spot colors that are out of g
343. t Trim box Defines the intended dimensions of the finished page after trimming This type of box is used by imposition applications for arranging the order of pages Crop box Defines the region to which the contents of the page must be clipped when displayed or printed Art box Defines the region to which the contents of the page must be clipped when output in a production environment POSTSCRIPT AND PDF JOBS e PostScript jobs The page size of PostScript jobs is defined by the bounding box Fiery XF can retrieve and process this page size information However the page definition is not always exact due to rounding up or down errors that can occur when printing from some graphics programs Such inaccuracies can result in image distortion in the printout You can instruct Fiery XF to ignore the page size information from such jobs and to calculate the page size internally during job processing TO SPECIFY THE SIZE DEFINTION 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the File tab open the PS EPS PDF pane 2 Under Size definition click an item e For PDF jobs select an appropriate page size definition e For PostScript jobs select Calculate page size In this case the page size is calculated by Fiery XF during job processing The process is sl
344. t The calibration set defines a set of print conditions and ensures that the printer s behavior is adjusted optimally to the media CREATING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 15 Click Continue ee O O OO OO OO O Step 5 of 5 Media size Media format 590 551 Inch 16 Make media specific settings Select the source of the media roll or sheet Then select the media format Alternatively define a custom size by entering the required dimensions 17 Click Finish Your workflow and output device are now set up You can finetune the system configuration in System Manager if required Creating a system configuration in System Manager In System Manager you can create system configurations that are configured to your exact needs CREATING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION TO CREATE A NEW USER You can create new users in Fiery XF Each user is given a unique password and receives access to selected areas of the software Do one of the following e On the toolbar click New User e In the layout area right click an existing user and click New User e On the File menu point to New and click User A user with the name New User 1 is created Define a unique user name Do one of the following e In the layout area double click New User 1 overwrite the default name and press lt Enter gt e On the Profile tab open the User Account pane and overwrite New User 1 On t
345. t Alternatively by selecting Print only if verification results passed you can specify that a label is printed only if all the measured results are within the defined tolerances Under Characterization data select a reference Generated from reference profile This setting measures the color output against the colors that can be achieved by the simulation reference profile MKCheck10 and MKCheck11 characterization data Characterization data sets define a combination of printing conditions for standard printing processes The job colors are measured against the reference and any deviation from the reference is calculated in terms of delta E For Ugra Fogra media wedges you can select a set of characterization data Fogra IFRA PSR or SWOP to define a standardized printing condition The table below shows which characterization data to use for which reference profile it8 characterization data is authorized measured data from the Fogra Institute The measurement is based on the Altona Test Suite and the SOcoated_v2 simulation reference profile Reference profile Characterization data ISOcoated icc Fogra 27 ISOwebcoated icc Fogra 28 ISOuncoated icc Fogra 29 ISOuncoatedyellowish icc Fogra 30 ISOcoated_v2_eci icc Fogra 39 ISOcoated_v2_300_eci icc SC_paper_eci icc Fogra 40 PSO_MFC_paper_eci icc Fogra 41 PSO_SNP_paper_eci icc Fogra 42 VERIFYING COLOR CONSISTENCY IN A
346. t may mean that two distinct colors from the source color gamut are mapped to the same color in the destination color gamut This rendering intent also simulates the color of the reference media For example if you select the simulation reference profile ISOnewspaper26v4 icc in combination with the rendering intent Absolute colorimetric paper white your image will be printed on a gray background to simulate the color of newsprint Perceptual This rendering intent preserves the visual relationship between colors in a way that is perceived natural to the human eye by compressing all colors and scaling them to fit into the available destination color space Since all colors are affected even those that would normally lie within the color gamut of the destination color space are compressed even if they could normally be accurately reproduced SELECTING PROFILES AND RENDERING INTENTS Rendering intent Saturated Description This rendering intent aims to preserve vivid color at the expense of accurate color The source color gamut is scaled to the destination color gamut but preserves relative saturation instead of hue This means that color hues may shift if the destination color space is smaller than the source color space Perceptual absolute This rendering intent was developed by EFI It combines the advantages of the rendering intent Perceptual with regard to image definition in areas of
347. t 49 Creating a system configuration in System Manager 54 SETTING SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS ONLINE OFFLINE 61 WORKSPACES 67 Selecting workspaces 67 Customizing workspaces 68 Creating workspaces 68 Editing workspaces 70 Deleting custom workspaces 71 Assigning workspaces 71 JOB LIST AND PREVIEW WINDOW 72 Activating the preview 72 Job list 73 Customizing the job list 73 Thumbnail images 74 Copying and moving jobs 74 Preview window 76 Changing the appearance of the preview window 76 Visual aids for page alignment 77 EDITING JOBS 85 Rotating a job 85 Mirroring a job 86 Scaling a job 86 Cropping a job 89 Aligning pages on the sheet 93 POSTSCRIPT AND PDF JOBS 94 Print engines 94 EPS job detection 95 In RIP separation 96 Defining the page size definition 98 Applying a working color space 99 Overprinting in composite jobs 100 Non embedded fonts in PDF jobs 101 Loading multi page jobs as single pages 102 TIFF IT AND SCITEX JOBS 103 SEPARATED JOBS 104 NESTINGS 106 Setting up a nesting 106 Nestings user interface 108 Modifying nested pages 109 Managing nested pages and sheets 110 Aligning nested pages 112 General nesting settings 114 TILING 116 Tilings user interface 117 Modifying tilings 118 General tiling settings 120 STEP AND REPEAT 122 Modifying step and repeats 123 Renaming a step and repeat 124 JOB MERGE 125
348. t Yes No No IDEAlliance ISO 12647 7 Yes Yes No Ugra Fogra MediaWedge Yes Yes Yes VERIFIER 317 You can also use a custom control strip Click Add browse to the control strip file Select the control strip file and click Open By default control strips are loaded from the Color Verifier Charts folder For more information see Default folders on page 363 Under Characterization data select a reference The reference defines the target colors for your printouts The job colors are measured against the reference and any deviation from the reference is calculated in terms of delta E For Ugra Fogra media wedges you can select a set of characterization data Fogra IFRA PSR or SWOP to define a standardized printing condition The table below shows which characterization data to use for which simulation reference profile it8 characterization data is authorized measured data from the Fogra Institute The measurement is based on the Altona Test Suite and the ISOcoated_v2 simulation reference profile Reference profile Characterization data ISOcoated icc Fogra 27 ISOwebcoated icc Fogra 28 ISOuncoated icc Fogra 29 ISOuncoatedyellowish icc Fogra 30 ISOcoated_v2_eci icc Fogra 39 ISOcoated_v2_300_eci icc SC_paper_eci icc Fogra 40 PSO_MFC_paper_eci icc Fogra 41 PSO_SNP_paper_eci icc Fogra 42 PSO_Coated_NPscreen_ISO12647_eci icc Fogra 43
349. t a system configuration offline on page 63 PRINTING THROUGH A HOTFOLDER 3 On the Input tab open the General pane Click Choose and browse to the folder that you want to use as a hotfolder Make sure that you browse to a folder on the network Hotfolders must be set up for sharing to enable users to access them It is therefore recommended that you create a hotfolder that is a subfolder of a folder at root level on the hard disk for example C folder hotfolder or Macintosh HD folder hotfolder Observe the following e To avoid unnecessary read write access problems do not create a hotfolder on the desktop e Do not select a folder that has been mapped as an internal link 4 Click OK 5 Set the workflow back online by clicking the red box at workflow entry You must now set up the hotfolder for sharing to enable users to access it TO SET UP THE HOTFOLDER AS A SHARED FOLDER WINDOWS Perform the following steps if the hotfolder is located on the same computer as the Fiery XF server If hotfolder and Fiery XF server are installed on different computers both computers must be set up with the same login credentials For more information see Setting up a Windows user on page 187 PRINTING THROUGH A HOTFOLDER 1 In Windows Explorer browse to the folder that contains the hotfolder for example C folder 2 Right click the folder click Properties and click the Sharing tab Advanced Sharing Set
350. t to install and click Next Follow the on screen instructions to download the updated files and to complete installation Restart your computer if prompted to do so UPDATING FIERY XF AND MEDIA PROFILES The next time you log on to the Fiery XF server from a remote Fiery XF client a dialog box appears for you to start the update procedure Click Install to update the remote Fiery XF client and options After installation a copy of the updated files is saved to the Updates folder TO UPDATE FIERY XF MANUALLY This procedure describes how to update a Fiery XF server with no Internet access To perform the following steps you require the update files You can obtain the update files from your EFI dealer or you can copy them from a different Fiery XF server computer that does have Internet access For more information see To update Fiery XF automatically on page 166 1 Copy the EFI Downloads folder with the update files to the Fiery XF server computer to be updated 2 Exit all Fiery XF programs 3 Open the EFI Downloads folder 4 Open each subfolder one at a time and double click the program update file 5 Follow the on screen instructions to complete the procedure The next time you log on to the Fiery XF server from a remote Fiery XF client a dialog box appears for you to start the update procedure Click Install to update the remote Fiery XF client and options After installation a copy of the updated files is saved t
351. t up to include the following settings Setting Description Control Strip 1 Select a Ugra Fogra media wedge v2 2 v3 0 or any ISO 12647 7 compliant media wedge Characterization data Select Fogra MKCheck10 or Fogra MKCheck 11 reference data Job ticket Set up the job ticket to contain the following information e Name of the proofing software e Colorant e Substrate e Printing condition to be simulated Color profiles used e Date and time of printout e The delta E and delta H values of the Ugra Fogra media wedge must be within the defined tolerances For more information on setting up a verify workflow see To set up a verify workflow on page 302 VERIFIER VERIFIER 313 If you have a license for the Verifier Option you can check the color consistency of your jobs Delta E tolerance values define the acceptable error margin when verifying the color accuracy against a reference The Verifier Option supports the following latest profiling norms e ISO 12647 7 defines the requirements for contract proofing e ISO 12647 8 defines the requirements for validation print You can check for color consistency as follows e You can load measure or compare two sets of color values directly in Verifier This method is recommended for comparing print to profile or print to print applications and for measuring single color patches e You can set up a verify workflow in Fiery XF This method is recommend
352. ted by rows of dots whereby the size of each dot and the distance between them can be varied to depict different color densities The larger the dots and the closer the distance between them the darker the reproduced color tone During conventional inkjet proofing the printer driver receives color information from the color management module CMM and outputs the job using all the available printer inks However for screened output Fiery XF sends color information for the four process colors only Thus it is not possible to output screening files of jobs that have already been color managed Colors including spot colors are reproduced from CMYK inks by printing ink dots next to or on top of each other Dot CREATOR Halftone screening can be applied to composite jobs and to separated jobs e Composite output Composite output provides a more accurate simulation of printing technologies that use wide screen ruling During composite output all colors process colors and spot colors are printed on one page Colors are printed on top of each other according to a defined screen ruling This method can be used to simulate silk screen screening on conventional inkjet printers e Separated output Separated output can replace traditional imagesetter technologies that use wide screen rulings for example in the silk screen industry During separated output each color channel is printed on a different page All colors process c
353. ted on the Color Management pane of the Color tab General operations in Color Editor The following sections describe general operations to help you in your everyday work with Color Editor COLOR EDITOR Creating a new spot color table TO CREATE A NEW SPOT COLOR TABLE 1 Start Color Editor For more information see Starting Color Editor on page 277 2 Do one of the following e On the toolbar click New Table e On the File menu click New Table The New Table dialog box appears Workflow Select workflow v Printer Calibration set Use default preset EPL name Color space 3 Type a unique name for the spot color table 4 Select a Fiery XF workflow optional There is no need to select a workflow if the spot color table will be applied to multiple workflows Spot colors can be optimized for only one combination of calibration set and printer COLOR EDITOR 5 Select a calibration set optional The calibration set defines the settings for ink type media name and base linearization file for the selected printer The calibration set is important for defining printer dependent spot colors By selecting a workflow and a calibration set you can use Color Editor for the following purposes e You can convert L a b spot colors so that they fit into the color gamut of the selected printer e You can reduce delta E values by creating and applying an L a b optimization f
354. tem Manager For more information see Setting system configurations online offline on page 61 e The virtual printer must be set up correctly for printer sharing Otherwise the virtual printer cannot be detected in the network For more information see Setting up the virtual printer in Fiery XF on page 201 Printing from Windows to a Fiery XF Windows server In Windows Fiery XF automatically creates a shared printer that can be used like any other shared printer Perform the following steps on the computer on which the graphics program is installed TO SET UP A CONNECTION TO A LOCAL FIERY XF VIRTUAL PRINTER If the Fiery XF server and the graphics program are installed on the same computer the virtual printer is immediately visible in the print menu of the graphics program No further steps are necessary and you can now print to the virtual printer from your graphics program For more information see Printing from a graphics program to the Fiery XF virtual printer on page 210 PRINTING THROUGH A VIRTUAL PRINTER TO SET UP A CONNECTION TO A REMOTE FIERY XF VIRTUAL PRINTER REQUIRES INTERNET ACCESS If the Fiery XF server and the graphics program are installed on different computers you have to add the virtual printer as a new printer Perform the following steps on the computer on which the graphics program is installed Use this method if the computer that is running the graphics program has Internet access
355. tem administrator for advice 7 Save your changes Mapping a print MIS database to a base linearization file in Fiery XF When you select a media name in Fiery XF a base linearization file is applied The base linearization file contains details of the print settings for the job printer model ink type number of inks and print resolution Print MIS devices and Digital StoreFront manage media types differently The media sizes are saved in a database but the database entries do not contain details of print settings So that you can use the database entries from print MIS devices a special tool called Media Mapper is provided This tool enables you to link each database entry to a base linearization file in Fiery XF JDF INTEGRATION When you set up a JDF connection to a print MIS device in Fiery XF the contents of the database are automatically submitted to Fiery XF The database is regularly synchronized TO MAP A PRINT MIS DATABASE TO BASE LINEARIZATION FILES IN FIERY XF 1 On the Tools menu click Map Media The Map Media dialog box appears The left hand side displays a list of media from the print MIS database The right hand side displays the media names that are available in Fiery XF 2 Under XF Media select a manufacturer a printer and an ink type 3 Do one of the following e Drag a print MIS media from the left hand side on to a Fiery XF media name e Right click the MIS media and click Map The print set
356. ter Print MIS products efi J Printer ii Cfi Fie output JDF compatible printer ef The following JDF JMF file formats are supported e MIME package JDEF JMF with content URL JDE JMEF without content JDF INTEGRATION Setting up a JDF connection To set up a JDF connection certain settings are necessary at the print MIS device in Fiery XF and at the output device Before setting up a JDF connection make sure of the following e The workflow name and the output device name cannot contain special characters The workflow must be connected to a valid output device For more information see Creating a system configuration on page 48 For more information on setting up a VUTEKk printer see Printing to a VUTEk printer on page 215 To SET UP A JDF CONNECTION TO A PRINT MIS DEVICE 1 Go to System Manager On the Tools menu click System Information 2 Under General settings select Enable JDF communication and click OK 3 On the Edit menu click JDF Device Registration Server Name or IP Address Port Number 9200 4 Type the IP address and the port number of the workstation on which the MIS software is installed The default port number is 9200 in http mode and 12443 when running as https You can check that the connection has been established by clicking Test To SET UP A JDF CONNECTION TO A JDF COMPLIANT OUTPUT DEVICE 1 Go to System M
357. thout having to define unknown spot colors TO EXCLUDE A SPOT COLOR FROM THE JOB 1 In Job Explorer in the job list click the job On the Color tab open the Spot Colors pane 2 In the first column of the spot color definition table clear the check boxes as required By clearing a check box you can exclude it from the job By default all spot colors are selected 3 Save your changes Changing the sequence of inks By default spot colors are printed on top of the process colors irrespective of the order that is defined in the graphics file However the ink sequence can greatly affect the printed result A spot color that is printed below the process colors looks completely different if it is printed on top of the process colors You can sort the sequence in which the job colors are printed However the process colors are treated as a a block and cannot be moved individually The reason for this is that the color output of all process colors is described by the simulation reference profile and not by a spot color definition TO CHANGE THE SEQUENCE OF INKS 1 In Job Explorer in the job list click the job On the Color tab open the Spot Colors pane 2 In the spot color definition table click a color 3 Underneath the spot color definition table click an arrow button to move the color up or down the list 4 Save your changes SPOT COLORS Changing the search order During job processing Fiery XF searches for
358. tings from the base linearization file are displayed Be aware that some media may have more than one base linearization file From the drop down list box select the base linearization file that was created for the desired print settings 4 Click Save When you load a JDF job Fiery XF applies the base linearization file that is linked to the print MIS media You can export details of media mappings to a CSV file On the Edit menu click Export Media Catalog To PROCESS JDF JOBS WITH AN UNMAPPED MEDIA If the media that is selected for an incoming JDF job is not mapped to a base linearization file the job receives an error status in Fiery XF You can link the job to an appropriate base linearization file by right clicking the job and clicking Map media The Map Media dialog box appears The workflow printer is pre selected For more information see To map a print MIS database to base linearization files in Fiery XF on page 257 Alternatively you can create a new base linearization file for a print MIS database entry For more information see To create a new base linearization file on page 151 JDF jobs in Fiery XF JDF Connector runs as a service It starts up automatically whenever the Fiery XF server is started If the server is not running the JDF connection is interrupted How JDF jobs are loaded in Fiery XF depends on the number of content files that are attached Jobs with only one content file are loaded as singl
359. to conserve media space 1 Do one of the following e In the job list right click the nesting and click Add Job to Nesting e Drag a job from the job list on to the nesting in the job list The page is arranged in the nesting Be aware that pages that are too big to fit on the nesting sheet cannot be automatically placed In this case reduce the scaling factor Then in the job list select Placed for the new job and update the preview TO DELETE A NESTED PAGE 1 Do one of the following e In the job list right click the nested page and click Delete e In the job list click the nested page and press lt Del gt e In the preview right click a page and click Delete TO REMOVE A PAGE FROM A NESTING 1 In the job list right click the nested page and click Remove from Nesting The job remains in the job list but is no longer part of the nesting TO CLONE A NESTED PAGE You can create copies of nested pages The page must already be part of the nesting 1 Do one of the following e In the job list right click a job On the Edit menu click Clone e In the preview right click a job and click Clone e In the preview select a job On the Edit menu click Clone The Clone Image dialog box appears M4 2of5 NESTINGS 111 2 Enter the number of clones you want to create and click Clone It The cloned pages are placed in the nesting but are not automatically arranged Update the preview You can apply individ
360. to represent color The most widely used color spaces are RGB for digital cameras monitors and scanners and CMYK for inkjet printers and offset presses Each color space can reproduce a different range of colors known as the color gamut The RGB color space has a much wider color gamut than the CMYK color space Added to this not all devices can reproduce accurately the full range of colors that is defined by the color space The actual color capabilities between devices can vary greatly and even two printers of the same model can produce slightly different color results Visible color gamut RGB color gamut PANTONE color gamut CMYK color gamut To overcome this problem the ICC International Color Consortium developed a recognized standard for color management systems to enable uniform cross device color reproduction This standard is based on a series of profiles that control color reproduction from image creation to job output Fiery XF uses the following to achieve color accuracy e Media profiles e Source profiles e Simulation reference profiles e Rendering intents e Monitor profiles SELECTING PROFILES AND RENDERING INTENTS Media profiles Media profiles describe the color reproduction properties of the printer for a specific media The color reproduction properties are defined by the combination of media type ink type and print conditions TO SELECT A MEDIA PROFILE 1 Do one of the following
361. to the output device optional Assigning a color can help you to identify output devices more easily For example you can assign a specific color to all output devices that are printing on the same type of media Do one of the following e In the layout area right click the output device click Color Indicator and click a color e In the layout area click the white stripe to the left of the printer name and click a color You can select one of the available basic colors or you can define a custom color To define a custom color click Define Custom Colors Custom colors must be defined in the RGB color space When you have defined a color click Add to Custom Colors Click OK to close the dialog box 9 Save your changes After you have created a system configuration you need to set it online For more information see Setting system configurations online offline on page 61 SETTING SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS ONLINE OFFLINE SETTING SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS ONLINE OFFLINE To process and output jobs in Fiery XF automatically the system configuration must be fully online at all stages However there may be times when you need to set a part of the system configuration offline in order to make changes By setting a system configuration offline you prevent jobs from entering a workflow that is temporarily unavailable TO SET A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FULLY ONLINE 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area connect the user to the
362. tting in Windows TROUBLESHOOTING Cause The license files may not be detected Remedy Try reinstalling all the license files With the exception of the file default lic remove all license files from the FlexLM folder and then reinstall each file separately Right click the Fiery XF Control icon and click Activate Fiery XF For more information see Licensing the software on page 40 Make sure to install via Fiery XF Control Do not simply copy license files to the FlexLM folder I am unable to set up or connect any more output devices Cause You do not have enough Output Option licenses Remedy Purchase an additional Output Option license Cause You may be trying to set up the same printer via two different connection types Remedy Make sure that all instances of the printer including the linearization device use the same connection type My printer is not listed in the printer list Cause You may be trying to connect to an output device that requires a separate license Remedy Make sure that the installed license supports your printer model Printing problems Why am I unable to load any jobs Cause Fiery XF requires a certain amount of free disk space If less than 2 5 free disk space or less than 5 GB free disk space is available you may not be able to load and process jobs Remedy Ensure that the hard disk has sufficient free space TROUBLESHOOTING Cause Remedy Cause Remedy
363. ual job settings to each clone However if you delete the original all the clones are deleted also You can also clone jobs by using copy and paste Ctrl C Ctrl V to create a simple step and repeat Afterwards click Apply to rearrange the cloned pages on the sheet As with cloned pages if you delete the original the copy is deleted also TO DELETE A CLONED PAGE 1 Do one of the following e In the job list right click a cloned page and click Delete e In the preview right click a cloned page and click Remove Clone TO ADD A NEW NESTING SHEET AND MOVE PAGES TO IT bN A new nesting consists always of one sheet If you nest more pages than can fit on the sheet additional sheets are automatically created In a manual nesting you can add new sheets manually and move pages to it The page must already be part of the nesting You cannot move jobs from one nesting to another It is not possible to add new sheets if the nesting is set up for roll media In the job list click the nesting Do one of the following e Right click an empty area of the preview window and click New Sheet On the Nesting menu click New Sheet A new sheet is added Select the nested page that you want to move to the new sheet You can click the page in the job list or in the preview On the Edit menu click Cut The page is added to the clipboard Go to the new sheet You can use the buttons on the toolbar to scroll to the new sh
364. uestion mark next to them Right click the device entry and click Update Driver Software Download and install the current driver by selecting the recommended setting If you run into difficulties while working with Fiery XF and you cannot find the solution in this manual contact your reseller or distributor for technical assistance Make sure to provide the following information when contacting your reseller or distributor e Version name and release number of your software e License information e Printer model e Operating system with version number e Details of additional hardware and software that is installed for example ISDN boards virus scanners TROUBLESHOOTING TO FIND THE CONTACT DETAILS FOR YOUR REGION 1 Do one of the following e On the Help menu click EFI Technical Support e Visit http www efi com support contact by product asp Knowledge Center EFI has set up an online knowledge center to supplement the information found in this user manual The Knowledge Center is filled with useful information and tips on working with Fiery XF It also contains articles on how best to linearize certain printers or how to obtain good results with layered printing Therefore if you are having trouble getting to grips with a certain feature of Fiery XF visit our website at http w3 efi com en services fiery wide format services knowledge center Online user forum The online forum is open to all users of F
365. ult a job is verified as color accurate only if all color measurements are within the y J y defined tolerance limits However by enabling measurement approval in Verifier you can y 8 PP y gain full control over whether a job passes or fails verification For example you can force a pass result if some delta E values are marginally exceeded For more information see To set up Verifier on page 316 If a job fails verification you may be able to improve on the result by performing a job specific optimization This process optimizes the job s color management by creating a correction profile that is a better match for the color gamut of the simulation reference profile Afterwards you must reprint the job and repeat the verify procedure For more information see Verify workflows in Fiery XF on page 301 Dot CREATOR DoT CREATOR If you have a license for the Dot Creator option you can create screening files spt from continuous tone data and implement them in Fiery XF via the media profile Halftone screening Continuous tones are difficult to output satisfactorily on conventional printing presses This is because unlike photography differences in lightness cannot be directly reproduced in offset printing Printed paper either has color or it does not It is not possible to print just a little color Halftone screening is the name of the process that is used to overcome this problem Here color is represen
366. und the image you can add white space between image and i cut marks By cutting the image you can crop each edge by a defined margin Cut the image to eliminate unwanted paper white or to reduce the size of the image It is not possible to move i cut marks inside the bounding box i cut level 1 or inside the cut contour i cut level 2 Under Export path select a folder in which to save the cut contour files Click Choose and browse to a different folder if you do not want to use the default folder The following cut contour files are created during job processing e i cut level 1 creates an cut file e i cut level 2 creates a cut file and an ai file Under Contour cutting select Extract contour path from EPS PDF If you do not extract the contour path from EPS PDF jobs or if the job does not contain a contour path the bounding box is automatically used as the cut contour 13 14 CUTTING OPTIONS Define non default cut contours optional If your jobs regularly contain cut contours that are saved under a non default name you can define them here The cut contours you define in System Manager are automatically applied to all workflows e Under the table click Add A new row is added to the contour colors table e In the Contour source column overwrite Enter spot color name with the exact name of the cut contour from the graphics program Then press lt Enter gt In the
367. up of the job s most prominent colors For example if a job is composed mainly of shades of blue the dynamic wedge will have a high proportion of blue patches As with other types of control strips you can use the dynamic wedge to verify color accuracy Faremo uao mas Votoms Cater age est a H pn mt tase Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Verify tab open the Control Strips pane The dynamic wedge is available for control strip 1 only Select DynamicWedge Dynamic wedges are always created for a page In a nesting it is not possible to create a dynamic wedge for a sheet Select the measuring device that you will use to measure the dynamic wedge Select the number of color patches for the dynamic wedge 16 32 and 64 color patches are possible Fewer patches are printed if all the job s key colors can be represented by using less than the selected number of patches Select whether you want to create a dynamic wedge that consist of process colors CMYK spot colors or a mixture of both The dynamic wedge can also display L a b spot color gradients To define L a b spot color gradients you require a license for the Spot Color Option FOOTER 133 7 Select In gamut colors only optional This setting maps out of gamut colors to the outer edge of the printer gamut
368. up or down to a different layer Do one of the following e On the toolbar click Order and click an order type e Right click anywhere in the preview and click an order type e On the Edit menu point to Order and click an order type The layer order is changed General nesting settings TO RENAME A NESTING New nestings are created with a default name You can overwrite the default name with a unique name 1 Do one of the following e In the job list right click the file name Nesting and click Rename e In the job list click the file name Nesting Then click the left mouse button again The file name changes into an editable box 2 Overwrite Nesting with a new name Copy Paste Cut and Delete commands are available if you right click on the nesting name 3 Click anywhere outside the box to apply the change Nesting footer 1 Page footer 2 Sheet footer NESTINGS 115 TO ADD A FOOTER You can print out a footer for each page and for each sheet of a nesting A footer can contain e A job ticket with information pertinent to the job e One or two control strips for verifying color accuracy ia Bi a E For more information see Footer on page 128 TO CHANGE THE ALIGNMENT OF NESTED PAGES You can align nested pages with the left right top or bottom edge of the sheet Bottom alignment is not available for roll media For more information see Aligning p
369. upports the following latest profiling norms e ISO 12647 7 defines the requirements for contract proofing e ISO 12647 8 defines the requirements for validation print You can check for color consistency as follows e You can set up a verify workflow in Fiery XF This method is recommended for comparing profile to proof proof to proof and proof to print applications e You can can load measure or compare two sets of color values directly in Verifier This method is recommended for comparing print to profile or print to print applications and for measuring single color patches For more information see Verifier on page 313 Verify workflows in Fiery XF A verify workflow is recommended for the following purposes e To verify a proof or print for ISO 12647 7 12647 8 or G7 compliance To verify any house standard e To achieve Fogra Proof Certification e To verify color consistency across sites Comparing profile to proof is one of the most useful applications In an everyday situation you can compare the color values of a proof that has been created on your printer with the color values from the profile that simulates the printing press A good color match indicates that the proof lies within the defined tolerances and that the printing process is being correctly reproduced You can check the color consistency of a job that is printed at different sites by creating a remote container A remote container contains all the informatio
370. ur base linearization file do one of the following e To select a new base linearization file in Fiery XF see Media profiles on page 137 e To select a device link profile in Fiery XF see Device link profiles on page 144 e To select a new base linearization for an existing media profile see Media profiles on page 137 Editing a profile Profile Editor is a tool for modifying an existing CMYK or RGB simulation reference profile For example you can use it to make contrast or saturation settings or to enter the precise white point of the media Profile Editor is primarily intended for use in the production market to modify color output CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES To EDIT A SIMULATION REFERENCE PROFILE 1 Start Color Tools and click Edit Profile LZ Fiery Profile Editor So File Edit Tools Instrument View Help Editing Profile _ i D Rendering intent Perceptual Photographic x E Output Edited oy t o i i Qables e kid Point to the profile edit tool buttons above g a description will be shown 4 gt Edits are prioritized and applied in order of Info EFI Reference Image RGB 1 150ppi tif Saree SENE K E Preview Output Media Color B Source Profile EFIRG8 2 Editlist A Display Profile sRGB PC 2 Click the Info button and follow the on screen instructions to complete your monito
371. user setting up 187 Workflow high priority 357 online offline 61 remote 337 setting up 56 templates custom 34 verifying color consistency 301 Working color space applying 99 Workspaces 67 assigning 55 71 creating 68 customizing 68 deleting custom 71 editing 70 selecting 67 Z Ziind Cut Center 233
372. uttons to find and replace spot color names 7 Click Close Importing spot colors You can add spot colors by importing them from another spot color table To IMPORT SPOT COLORS 1 Start Color Editor For more information see Starting Color Editor on page 277 2 Do one of the following e On the toolbar click Import f e On the File menu click Import The Spotcolor folder opens 3 Select a spot color table and click Open The following file formats are supported CXF BCT ICC and TAB COLOR EDITOR It is not possible to save two spot colors with the same name in one spot color table If a spot color name exists in both spot color tables the Import Conflict dialog box appears In this case you can either rename or replace one of the spot colors Setting Rename Description Rename a spot color in either of the spot color tables This may be useful if two spot colors of the same name have different color values Use this setting to keep both spot colors Replace Replace a spot color in either of the spot color tables This setting overwrites the name and the spot color values thus providing an easy way to merge two spot colors Cancel Cancel All Do not import conflicting spot colors In this case spot colors remain unchanged in both spot color tables Click Cancel to skip the displayed conflict Click Cancel All to skip all conflicting spot colors The spot colors are i
373. ves a brief description of the settings on each pane Global settings The following are settings that affect the appearance of the user interface TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY LANGUAGE By default Fiery XF is displayed in the language of the operating system Follow the steps below to change the display language in Windows On Macintosh you can change the language via the international settings in System Preferences To display one of the supported Asian languages on a PC Fiery XF must be running on an operating system that supports double byte fonts 1 Go to System Manager On the Edit menu click Languages and click a language 2 Restart Fiery XF for the new language to take effect If you change the display language make sure that the help set for that language is installed Otherwise no help will be available You can install help sets in additional languages from the software DVD TO CHANGE THE SYSTEM OF MEASUREMENT By default the system of measurement that is set up for the operating system is used 1 On the Edit menu point to Measurement System and click a system of measurement You can choose between millimeter centimeter meter inch and foot General Fiery XF operations Job processing The following are operations that you require in your everyday work with Fiery XF GETTING TO KNOW FIERY XF To LOAD A JOB 1 Do one of the following e On the toolbar click Import Job A e On the File menu click Import J
374. via USB to the server computer The printer must be switched on when you start Fiery XF Otherwise the printer cannot be detected CREATING A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION e Select Print to file to print to PDF TIFF format to create a softproof on a Caddon can view output device or to output to a Fiery output device Check the export path Click Choose and browse to a different folder if required Complete the rest of your settings The available settings depend on the type of file output For more information see Printing to file on page 212 Printing to a Caddon can view cabinet on page 218 or Printing to a Fiery output device on page 213 See also the context senstive help e Select Print via JDF port to set up a JDF connection to a VUTEKk printer For more information see Printing to a VUTEk printer on page 215 See also the context senstive help 11 Click Continue Step 4 of 5 Media type Media profile cmyK 720 x 720 720x1440 dpi Super 720x720 dpi SP7900CT_720x720_BEST_eXpress_Paper epl 12 Select the type of ink that is inserted in the printer 13 Select the name of the media that you are going to use Fiery XF provides media profiles that have been created for specific combinations of media ink and resolution Furthermore you can implement your own custom media profiles that have been created for your exact printer 14 Select a calibration se
375. w is printing to which output device In the layout area you can halt jobs at certain stages of the workflow This may be desirable if you need to make alterations to a system configuration for example to divert a workflow to a different output device if one printer needs servicing For more information see To set a system configuration offline on page 63 2 In property inspector you can configure the user workflow or printer that is selected in the layout area For more information see Creating a system configuration in System Manager on page 54 Property inspector Job and workflow settings are arranged on tabs Each tab is subdivided into panes For example the Workflow tab consists of the panes Basic Information Preview and Speed Panes must be expanded to view the available settings To expand a pane click the pane bar gt Basic Information D gt Preview I H Speed High priority workflow Print bi directional 3 __ RIP and print on the fly RIP Resolution g High quality Standard Multiple You are using low res fonts PS and PDF files will be processed at a maximum of 1200 dpi GETTING TO KNOW FIERY XF Using the menu buttons you can customize property inspector to show only the tabs and panes that you require for your everyday work The menu buttons provide also access to the context sensitive help The context sensitive help gi
376. with undefined spot colors 2 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Color tab open the Spot Colors pane w Under Spot color library select a custom spot color table 4 Define unknown spot colors For more information see To define spot colors for a loaded job on page 266 5 Save your changes TO CHANGE SPOT COLOR DEFINITIONS 1 Load a job that contains the spot color that you want to edit 2 Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Color tab open the Spot Colors pane 3 Under Spot color library select a custom spot color table 4 Inthe spot color definition table make the required changes 5 Save your changes SPOT COLORS TO EDIT SPOT COLORS THAT ALIAS AN INTERNAL SPOT COLOR The spot colors of spot color manufacturers are defined in the device independent L a b color space and saved as a name that cannot be edited for example PANTONE YELLOW C or TOYO 0008 If the output is not exactly as you want you can make color adjustments To adjust the color values you must convert the spot color to editable values in your printer s color space Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Color tab open the Spot Colors pane Under Spot color library select a custom spot color table In the Source column of the table click the down arrow next to the spot color and click Inkjet The spot color is displayed in the color
377. xes type a width or a height By default the page retains its proportions If you change the height the width is adjusted accordingly and vice versa To scale width and height by different factors click the Scale Proportionally button to deactivate proportional scaling When proportional scaling is deactivated the button has a gray background EDITING JOBS e On the toolbar click Transform Job 1 and click the button 2 to deactivate percentual scaling When percentual scaling is deactivated the button has a gray background Type a value in the appropriate box 4 to define a width or height Toolbar 1 Transform Job button b r 0 117 Inch E 34 000 Inch 2 Percentual scaling button 0 0117 Inch 50 667 Inch EO 2 3 Scale Proportionally button 4 Edit boxes for width and height By default the page retains its proportions If you change the height the width is adjusted accordingly and vice versa To scale width and height by different factors click the Scale Proportionally button 3 to deactivate proportional scaling When proportional scaling is deactivated the button has a gray background TO OUTPUT AN OVERSIZED JOB By default Fiery XF outputs jobs in their original size However if the job will not fit fully on the media job processing is aborted with an error message You can output an oversized job by instructing Fiery XF to print jobs that exceed the media size In this case the image i
378. y For more information see Starting Color Tools on page 148 TO TRANSFER PRINTER SETTINGS TO THE LINEARIZATION DEVICE 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area right click an output device that has already been set up and click one of the following items Click Linearize Device to create a new base linearization file Click Re linearize Device to optimize the ink densities of an existing base linearization file e Go to System Manager In the layout area click an output device that has already been set up On the Device tab open the Media pane Under Calibration set click New The printer settings are transferred to the linearization device If the linearization device was previously set up for a different printer you are warned that the current settings will be overwritten Starting Color Tools Before you can start Color Tools you must first configure the linearization device For more information see Setting up the linearization device on page 148 CREATING AND OPTIMIZING PROFILES TO START COLOR TOOLS 1 Do one of the following i e On the toolbar click Color Tools e On the Tools menu click Color Tools The start screen appears with a list of available tools Be aware that the start screen looks slightly different if you do not have a license for the Color Profiler Option The Color Profiler Option provides tools that are concerned with profile creatio
379. y XF must be set up correctly For more information see Setting up the virtual printer in Fiery XF on page 201 TO PRINT A JOB 1 Start Fiery XF If Fiery XF is not started it is not available as a printer in the graphics program 2 Open the image file in the graphics program and select the print command 3 Select the Fiery XF printer The settings you make in the print dialog box such as the number of printed copies overwrite the equivalent setting in Fiery XF 4 Click OK The job is sent to Fiery XF and appears in the job list General tips e In Windows you are requested to enter your Windows user password when you submit a job to the Fiery XF virtual printer To avoid having to retype your password for each job select Remember this password in my keychain e When printing directly from a graphics program on roll media or a custom media size the P 8 y grap prog printable media length is restricted to slightly less than two meters To overcome the problem try loading the job by drag and drop TO PRINT TO A FIERY XF MACINTOSH SERVER IN A DIFFERENT SUBNET Occasionally problems arise if the Fiery XF server is installed on a Macintosh computer that is located in a different subnet Although the Fiery XF virtual printer can be selected in the graphics program the jobs are not loaded in Fiery XF In this case you need to make a setting in Common Unix Printing System CUPS version 1 4 4 or newer This version is installed
380. y defined by the selected color profile and the print resolution is also dependent on the selected printer To SET UP A VUTEK PRINTER 1 Go to System Manager In the layout area click the output device On the Device tab open the Information pane Under Manufacturer select EFI VUTEk Under Device type select a VUTEK printer On the Device tab open the Connection pane Under Connection type select an item e File output Jobs are printed to RTL and GIF format and saved to the specified export folder The RTL file is the data file that is sent to the printer The GIF file is used to display a preview of the job on a VUTEk PrintStation The names of print files are customizable For more information see the context sensitive help e Print via JDF port Some VUTEKk printers support JDF Job Definition Format JDF enables Fiery XF to receive information such as media consumption and ink consumption from the printer If you select a JDF compliant printer as the device type you can print via the JDF port For more information see Setting up a JDF connection on page 255 If you can connect to Fiery Dashboard you can also receive notifications by e mail about specific printer statuses and job statuses Click Fiery Dashboard to register for a Fiery Dashboard account and to set up the notification criteria When you log on to Fiery Dashboard you can view device statistics 10 11 PRINTING TO
381. y if all color measurements are within the defined tolerance limits However by enabling measurement approval you can gain full control over whether a job passes or fails verification For example you can force a pass result if some delta E values are marginally exceeded 6 Click the Comparison Settings tab and define the target tolerances Tolerance values define the maximum error margin that is acceptable when verifying the color accuracy of a printout against a reference For example if you define a tolerance limit of 3 a measured delta E of 2 5 would be accepted as color accurate and would generate a passed result On the other hand a delta E measurement of 3 2 would produce a not passed result A certain amount of deviation is almost unavoidable as due to differing printing condtions printer ink media etc it is generally impossible to obtain 100 identical prints on two different output devices VERIFIER 319 You can select a set of predefined target tolerances or you can define you own Predefined tolerances Predefined presets are available for recognized standards The predefined tolerance limits are specified for ISO 12647 7 contract proofing ISO 12647 8 validation proofing or G7 compliant verification of proof jobs They can be applied either to daily proof production verification based on an ISO 12647 7 or 12647 8 compliant media wedge or for certification purposes such as FograCert whereby Medi
382. you have access The Hold Job dialog box appears 2 Do one of the following e Click No to start job processing immediately e Click Yes if you want to edit the job first The job is copied or moved to the first workflow that is connected to the selected printer All the job settings are transferred with the job The job is printed using the media settings of the selected printer JOB LIST AND PREVIEW WINDOW Preview window Changing the appearance of the preview window You can change the size of the preview area e You can increase the size of the preview window e You can scale a preview e You can zoom in or out on a previewed area TO CHANGE THE SIZE OF THE PREVIEW WINDOW 1 Do one of the following e On the View menu click Maximize Preview This setting increases the size of the preview window so that it fills the whole screen All other parts of the Fiery XF program window are hidden To show the Fiery XF program window again click Maximize Preview to clear the check mar k e Rest the pointer along the line that separates preview window and job list Drag the pointer downwards to increase the size of the preview window Drag the pointer upwards to increase the size of the job list Be careful not to rest the pointer on the sash bar in the middle of the dividing line If you click the pointer on the sash bar you hide the preview window TO SCALE A PREVIEW You can scale a preview in relation to the preview window
383. you to tweek the color appearance of CMYK and RGB jobs It is not possible to make color adjustments to multi color jobs CMYKOG or CMYKRGB jobs that contain spot colors or grayscale jobs TO TWEEK INDIVIDUAL COLORS 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Color tab open the Color Ajustment pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Color tab open the Color Ajustment pane 2 On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings 3 Select Apply color corrections to static wedge optional This setting can be applied to CMYK jobs only In a proofing environment color consistency must be measurable By applying the changes to the control strip you can verify by measurement that the color adjustments have been applied to all jobs Color corrections cannot be applied to dynamic wedges 4 Move the color correction sliders for each color channel to add or subtract color Alternatively type a percentage in the appropriate box In System Manager you can edit the CMYK and the RGB color spaces In Job Explorer Fiery XF automatically detects the color space of the selected job 5 Move the appropriate sliders to increase or decrease brightness contrast and saturation Alternatively type a percentage in the appropriate box 6 Move the slider to increase or decrease the blurriness or sharpness Alternatively type a percentage in the approp
384. ystem Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Color tab open the Color Management pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Color tab open the Color Management pane 2 On the pane bar select the check box to activate the settings 3 Under Advanced Settings select Convert to grayscale 4 Move the slider to select a gray tint 5 Save your changes Creating a color negative You can invert job colors to create a color negative To INVERT COLORS 1 Do one of the following e Go to System Manager In the layout area click the workflow On the Output tab open the Advanced Print Options pane e Go to Job Explorer In the job list click the job On the Output tab open the Advanced Print Options pane 2 Under Separations select Merge separations This setting is used to invert the colors of composite jobs 3 Select Invert colors 4 Save your changes LOADING AND PRINTING A JOB LOADING AND PRINTING A JOB When you have set up a system configuration you are ready to load a job and start printing Loading a job This section describes how to load a job manually in Fiery XF Details of how to load a job by other means are provided in the appropriate sections of this documentation For more information see Printing through a hotfolder on page 183 Printing through Unidriver on page 189 and Printing through a virtual printer on
385. ystem Preferences click Print amp Scan Click Add If a menu opens click Add Printer or Scanner On the Windows tab search for the Windows computer on the network Select the computer and select the Fiery XF virtual printer When prompted to do so log in with your Windows user password PRINTING THROUGH A VIRTUAL PRINTER 5 Under Use review the setting e Ifthe Fiery XF client is installed on the computer it means that the appropriate PPD is already available Select Select Printer Software In the list of available printers select the EFI Colorproof XF printer and click OK Click Add to add the Fiery XF printer to the list of available printers e Ifthe Fiery XF client is not installed on the computer it means that the appropriate PPD is not available In this case you need to install it from the Macintosh software DVD Insert the Macintosh software DVD into the DVD ROM drive Then under Use select Other browse to the EFI Fiery XF ppd on the DVD and click Open The PPD is located in the Fiery Tools folder Click Add to add the Fiery XF printer to the list of available printers TO SET UP A CONNECTION TO A REMOTE FIERY XF VIRTUAL PRINTER IN A DIFFERENT SUBNET 1 In System Preferences click Print amp Scan 2 Click Add If a menu opens click Add Printer or Scanner 3 On the Default tab from the list of printer names select the Fiery XF virtual printer 4 Click Advanced If the Adv
386. ze If the nesting sheet is bigger you can output the nesting as a tiling 3 All Jobs button Click to display all loaded jobs This enables you to create a manual nesting of jobs that are loaded in different workflows 4 Tree view of job list It shows the nesting with nested pages NESTINGS 109 Legend Description 5 Locks a page at the current position on the sheet Click the padlock icon to lock or unlock a page A locked page closed padlock cannot be modified nor can it be rearranged on the sheet To make modifications you must unlock the page open padlock 6 Shows placed and unplaced pages Placed pages are visible in the preview and can be printed Unplaced pages are not visible in the preview and cannot be printed Select or clear the appropriate check box to place or unplace a job Jobs that are too big to fit on the nesting sheet must be scaled down before they can be placed 7 Apply button Click to rearrange nested pages according to the settings on the Nesting pane and to update the preview Modifying nested pages You can apply job settings such as color adjustments cropping and mirroring to nested pages For more information see Editing jobs on page 85 Be aware that nesting settings such as scaling and rotation override job settings So for example if the nesting is set up for uniform page scaling you cannot apply a different scaling factor to an individua

Fiery Manual - Print and Finishing Solutions

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents